1746-south-melbourne-market-roof-specs

1746-south-melbourne-market-roof-specs
4. Specification
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
19
Table of Contents – Specification
1
PRELIMINARIES ..............................................................................................21
2
GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS.........................................................58
3
ROOFER...........................................................................................................86
4
PAINTER ..........................................................................................................97
APPENDICES
A
FINISHES SCHEDULE...................................................................................... A
B
ROOF ACCESS RECOMMENDED SPECIFICATION (SAYFA) ....................... B
C
HYDRAULICS ROOF DRAINING PLAN (SYPHONSYSTEMS)....................... C
D
CONTRACTOR’S SITE EXTENTS................................................................... D
E
PART 5 ASBESTOS AUDIT ............................................................................. E
F
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION ........................................................................F
G
HYDRAULIC SERVICES SPECIFICATION ..................................................... G
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
20
1
PRELIMINARIES
1.1
Introduction to the Project
Project Overview
The South Melbourne Market Roof address is York Street, South Melbourne, Victoria
3205.
The works within this contract are summarised as follows:
Construction of a new roof over the First Floor South Melbourne Market car park. A new
rainwater harvesting and collection system. Works shall be conducted such that a
minimum of 150 car bays (including 3 x accessible bays) remain available for public
access and use during Market open days (Monday, Wednesday, Saturday and Sunday
and some public holidays).
The contractor is to propose how many additional car bays can be made accessible during
the construction period. The Contractor is to allow for traffic management of the site,
including signage and revised parking layouts throughout the works in order to
accommodate the above.
1.2
Interpretation
Definitions/Terminology
The headings of Specification clauses and sub-clauses are for convenience only and shall
not change the meaning of the Specification.
The sequence of information and cross references, if any, are for convenience only and
shall not change the meaning of the Specification.
Words implying persons shall, where applicable, to include companies. Words in the
singular include the plural.
In any trade where the Specification calls for the Works to be carried out ‘to the standards
and requirements of the Local Authority’, the Contractor shall allow for obtaining the
details of such from the Local Authority and for complying therewith.
If works specified exceed the standard and requirements acceptable by the Local
Authority, the Contractor shall allow to carry out the Works as specified.
Defined expressions in the Contract shall have the same meaning in the Specification,
and the following expressions shall have the associated meanings:
Approved, approval:
Means obtaining approval from the Superintendent before
commencing the applicable work. Such approvals are
procedural approvals only. Any approval of drawings, samples,
prototypes, workmanship, methods of work or any other matter
whatsoever under the Contract or in respect of the Works does
not waive or affect any right of the Principal or diminish in any
way the Contractors responsibility in respect of the Works
or
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
21
BCA:
the Contract.
Means the Building Code of Australia.
Codes:
Means, in addition to the Building Code, standard
specifications or codes of practice published by Standards
Australia and other recognised Australian and overseas
associations.
Construction
Validation:
The process by which the Contractor shall validate that all
operational components of the building are commissioned and
installed in accordance within the Contract documents.
Drawings:
Means Drawings issued by the Principal and/or
Superintendent, including all subsequent details and
amendments.
Means handover of the Works by the Contractor to the
Superintendent.
Handover:
Including:
Means including but not limited to.
Inspected:
Means inspected by the Superintendent.
Make good:
The words 'make good' or 'to be made good' shall mean that the
work referred to shall be reinstated to its original quality and/or
new condition or to match the quality and nature of the
surrounding finishes. All shall be to the satisfaction of the
Superintendent.
Maintain:
Means maintained in working condition.
Month:
Means calendar month.
Proprietary:
Proprietary means identifiable by naming manufacturer,
supplier,
installer, trade name, brand name, catalogue and
reference number.
Provide:
Means supply, deliver and install, and includes the meanings
'manufacture', 'finish' 'fabricate', 'test' and 'commission'
Reject, rejected:
Means rejected by the Superintendent as not complying with the
Contract Documents and, unless the contrary is indicated, shall
mean that the work or
materials
rejected
shall
be
replaced or repaired by the Contractor at its own expense.
Required:
Means required by the Contract Documents, or by a statutory
authority having jurisdiction over the works, or by law, or as
required by site conditions to complete the work, or requested
by the Superintendent.
Shop Drawings:
Means Drawings indicating complete details of fabrication
assembly, installation and fixing of the items concerned,
including explanatory notes and
specifications.
Specification:
Means this document complete with attachments, annexures
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
22
and appendices.
Statutory authority:
Means any statutory or other body, and its officers and agents,
having control over all or part of the Works, or which supplies
services to the Works.
Subcontractor:
Means any subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer, fabricator,
installer or the like
of the Contractor, or, if there is no
subcontractor, the Contractor.
Submit:
Means submit to the Superintendent for approval, unless
specified for information only.
Selected:
The words ‘selected’ shall mean selected by the
Superintendent, irrespective of any trade usage and the
Superintendent shall be the sole judge of what is or what is not
selected. Selection is not restricted to standard range, but from
all products available.
Visitors:
Means those persons invited by the Superintendent to view the
Works on site.
Working Day:
As nominated in the relevant industry Working Day Calendar.
1.3
Documents
The Drawings and the specification represent generally the forms, dimensions and
description of work to be carried out.
The Contractor is required to keep a copy of the Drawings and specification available on
site for the duration of the Contract - all properly registered, maintained and up to date.
This specification and Drawings are not structured to suit separate trades (and Trade
Contractors), but the document must be read in its entirety. Do not break up this
specification to provide to trades. Parts of each trade appear in a number of sections, and
all trades need to meet the requirements of the whole specification. No claims shall be
made by the Contractor in relation to where information is provided in this specification
Drawing Schedule
The Drawings and schedules identified in the Document Transmittal for the tender
documents apply to this Contract.
Classified Documents
Do not disclose to third parties Contract documents, except exclusively for the purposes of
tendering, without the prior written approval of the Principal and subject to conditions
imposed.
Provision of Drawings
Prior to the date of Possession of Site the Superintendent shall provide to the Contractor
six sets of Drawings. Two sets of these Drawings shall be used for the preparation of the
Building Contracts and the additional four copies are provided to the Contractor to execute
the Works. The four copies from which to execute the Works shall be endorsed “FOR
CONSTRUCTION” by the Superintendent.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
23
Should the Contractor require additional copies of these Drawings then they can be
reproduced by the Contractor (solely for the purpose of the execution of the Works) or,
they can be requested of the Superintendent.
Two copies of any revised Drawings will be provided to the Contractor with the relevant
revisions noted. Revisions to these Drawings issued during the execution of the Works will
also be provided on the same cost basis.
The Contractor will be provided with a drawing register at the date of Possession of Site.
This drawing register will be supplied by the Superintendent and it should be maintained
up-to-date for the duration of the Works by the Contractor. The Contractor must have an
approved audit process for receipt of Drawings to ensure that the revised Drawings are
reflected in the drawing register.
Should the Contractor request copies of the CAD files for the purposes defined elsewhere
in this Specification then these will be prepared by the consultants. These will only be
provided to the Contractor in an Autocad format. These CAD files shall be used for no
other purpose other than those stated in this specification. The transfer conditions and the
risks to the Contractor are also defined in this Clause of the Specification.
CAD Drawings
Unless specifically noted otherwise CAD Drawings will not be made available to the
Contractor for the duration of the project. In the situation where CAD Drawings are
provided to the Contractor they will be provided for information only and they shall not
form part of the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall note that CAD Drawings can be read to a much higher level of
accuracy than can the paper (hard) copies of the Drawings. Do not read any dimensions
from the CAD Drawings unless they are also evidenced on the hard copies.
The Contractor shall only utilise the paper (hard) copies to execute the Works. Any liability
arising out of dimensions and information gained from the CAD files and Drawings which
cannot be read or ascertained from the paper Drawings shall be the sole responsibility of
the Contractor. The Contractor shall make no assumptions in relation to the CAD
Drawings and have no expectations on their level of accuracy.
The purposes for which CAD Drawings may be made available to the Contractor are:
1.
Architectural.
For preparation of As-built Drawings
2.
Engineering.
For preparation of Engineering Services Shop and As-Built Drawings.
The issue of these CAD Drawings will be at the sole discretion of the Superintendent and
the Contractor shall have no expectation that they shall be made available.
All of the Contract documents including any data transmitted during the construction of the
works shall be considered copyright except for the sole purpose of providing information to
the Contractor in undertaking works associated with these specifically nominated
purposes.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
24
This information shall not be used for any other purposes or provided to any other
subcontractors or to others without the permission of the Superintendent.
Upon transfer of this information to the Contractor and its successors and assigns the
Contractor shall indemnify Paul Morgan Architects and the Principal from any liability
arising from the transmitted data as a result of the information, of errors, omissions or
incorrect information, corrupt data, incorrect operation of equipment and/or systems on
which the data is used, infringement of intellectual property rights which may be the
property of another party and/or any other cause.
The CAD Drawings are supplied on the following conditions:
(i)
The Superintendent and the Principal assume no liability in connection with
the supply or transfer of the data by electronic means or any use of it by the
Contractor or any third parties that the Superintendent would not have
incurred if the data had been transferred in the form of documents on
paper.
(ii)
Particularly, the Superintendent and the Principal do not warrant the
integrity of the data or accuracy or quality of any information contained
within the data and all responsibility relating to the use of such information
is entirely the Contractor’s.
(iii)
The Superintendent and the Principal will not be liable for loss of profits,
loss of use of data, software or information (or portions thereof) or any
damage whatsoever suffered by you or for which you may become liable as
a result of using the data.
(iv)
The Contractor will perform all system back-up necessary to ensure that
your system and all data files can be fully recovered in the event of error or
corruption as a result of any data transfer.
(v)
The Contractor will perform all reasonable virus and integrity checks on the
data prior to the data transfer.
(vi)
The Contractor will check and ensure that any system on to which the data
is to be transferred (including any software and existing system data) is in
good working order and is in a fit state to enable the data transfer to take
place.
(vii)
At or before the supply of the electronic data the Superintendent will give
you a copy of the data transferred on paper. The Contractor may check and
confirm that it is identical to the data provided electronically. The
Superintendent shall be entitled to assume that the data provided on paper
and electronically are identical unless you advise us of any discrepancies
within seven days of the receipt of the data.
(viii)
The data shall not be changed.
(ix)
If a disclaimer is included in any part of the data, the disclaimer must be
included in any reproduction of the part of the data to which it applies
whether the reproduction is electronic or by some other means.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
25
(x)
If the Superintendent’s name and/or a copyright warning is included in any
part of the data, it must be included in any reproduction of the part of the
data to which it applies whether the reproduction is electronic or by some
other means.
(xi)
The Contractor will not provide the data or documents or information
produced from the data to any third party without our prior written approval.
(xii)
If the Superintendent approves the transfer of data to a third party the
Contractor must enter a written agreement with them which is identical to
this agreement except:
(xiii)
for the names of the parties; and
(xiv)
that equivalent points 1, 2, 3, 12 and 13 of this agreement must be for the
Superintendent’s benefit and the benefit of the Principal as well as for the
Contractor’s benefit.
(xv)
It is possible that the Superintendent may provide the Contractor with later
editions of the data from time to time. If the Superintendent does the
Contractor must ensure that:
(xvi)
any work undertaken by the Contractor is based on the latest edition of the
data supplied; and
(xvii)
any party to whom the Contractor have supplied data is promptly provided
with the latest edition.
(xviii)
In no event will the Contractor bring any claim or legal proceedings against
the Superintendent, or the Principal, or the Superintendent’s or the
Principal’s agents or employees relating to the supply of the data.
(xix)
The Contractor shall indemnify the Superintendent and Principal and their
respective employees and agents from and against any and all costs,
expenses, fees (including reasonable legal and counsel’s fees) and liability
arising from the supply of the data.
Standards and Codes
The Contractor must comply with all requirements of the BCA and Australian Standards
and Legislative Requirements current at the date of tendering, and Reference Codes and
Standards listed in the preface to those Standards and Codes are applicable in respect of
all materials and workmanship except where in conflict with the provisions of these
specifications.
The applicable and relevant authorisation standards shall have the same force and effect
and are made part of the Contract documents as if copied directly into the Contract.
Where materials and/or work which are the subject of an Australian Standards and
specified without reference to the subject Standard, then the higher quality, standard or
requirement for the materials and/or goods shall apply.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
26
Trade Names or Equal
Proprietary brands and trade names of materials or equipment must be used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions and with particular regard to the conditions
relevant to these works.
All materials used for the Works must be as specified or scheduled. should the Contract
documents state “or equivalent” or “or approved equivalent”, then the following procedure
shall apply:
Generally:
(i)
The Superintendent or his representative is to be immediately notified prior to any
such proposed change. The Contractor shall furnish all technical and design
information to support the claim of “equivalence”.
(ii)
The Superintendent or his representative will be the sole judge the equivalence of
the product.
(iii)
The Contractor will provide written advice that acknowledges that they will bear all
the expenses of the costs of test and other proofs of equality including assessment
by a third party nominated by the Superintendent.
(iv)
Where the Superintendent or his representative feels appearance is important,
‘appearances’ will be a factor in the judgement.
(v)
Where the Superintendent or his representative approves the use of an equivalent
product or material, the cost of supply and installation of the equivalent product or
material will not be additional to the Contract sum.
Engineering Equipment:
The manufacturer and model numbers specified herein or on the Drawings indicate the
preferred type of equipment and the design intent. Alternatives maybe proposed at the
time of the tender where noted with proof that they are "equal". Acceptable "equal"
proposal shall include submission of proof for:
(i)
Identical construction details
(ii)
Identical materials specification
(iii)
Identical technical performance
(iv)
Appropriate technical literature
(v)
Any initial and running cost savings
(vi)
Technical calculations
Where an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed in the drawing, which
requires any redesign of the system, Drawings showing the layout of the equipment and
such redesign as required therefore shall be prepared to the satisfaction of the Principal at
the Contractor's own expense. Where such approved deviation necessitates a different
quantity and arrangement of materials and equipment from that originally specified or
indicated on the Drawings, additional materials and equipment required by the system
shall be provided at no additional cost.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
27
Royalties and Patent Rights
All royalties and other sums payable and all licenses required for the use of any patented
article, process or invention in or about the works shall be paid and obtained by the
Contractor and the Contractor shall be liable for and shall indemnify the Principal against
any legal liability, loss, claim, proceedings or costs whatsoever arising by reason of the
Contractor infringing or being held to infringe any patent rights in relation to any such
article, process or invention.
Interpretation of the Drawings
Diagrammatic Layouts
Layouts of service lines, plant and equipment as shown on the Drawings are
diagrammatic only, except where figured dimensions are provided or calculable. Before
commencing work the Contractor must obtain measurements and other necessary
information.
Levels
Spot levels take precedence over contour lines and ground profile lines.
Dimensions
The Contractor must check dimensions on Site before proceeding with the work under the
Contract. The Contractor must obtain measurements and other information necessary to
carry out the work specified. If the Works include alterations and/or additions to existing
work, the Contractor must verify the dimensions of the existing work before proceeding,
and notify discrepancies to the Superintendent.
Do not scale Drawings.
Do not interpret / interpolate / read dimensions off any CAD Drawings.
Architectural Drawings take precedence over Consultant Drawings
Should there be discrepancies between drawings, the Contractor shall seek clarification
from the Superintendent.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clarify and to refer to architectural
Drawings and subsequent architectural advices for final placement of all services and the
like in relation to joinery, fixtures and fittings.
No claim for a variation to the Contract Sum from a failure to do so will be considered.
1.4
The Site
Location
The site is located at: Corner of York and Cecil Streets, South Melbourne,
Victoria.
Appreciation of Requirements
The Tenderer must visit and examine the site of the Works and become fully informed of
its nature, surroundings, approaches and means of access, the location of existing utilities
and services and all matters or circumstances likely to affect the cost or time for carrying
out the Works.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
28
The Tenderer when inspecting the Site shall at their own cost contact the local authorities’
officers in the area and check with them the location of all water, gas, electric, drainage,
sewerage, telephone, fire alarm, control valves and all other services.
For the purposes of determining whether the Site Conditions differ from conditions or
characteristics the Contractor should have reasonably anticipated, the Contractor shall be
deemed to have, during the preparation of its tender submission:

examined information made available to the Contractor by the Principal for the
purposes of tendering, including without limitation the Contract Documents,
Schedules, Conditions of Tendering, Reports, Maps, Diagrams, and the like;

examined all information relevant to the risks, contingencies, and other
circumstances which could affect the Works, and which is obtainable by the
making of reasonable inquiries;

informed itself as far as practicable of all relevant physical conditions upon and
below the surface of the Site and adjacent to the Site, and the climatic conditions
at or near the Site;

informed itself as far as practicable of the nature of the Works and materials
necessary for the execution of the Works, the means of access to and facilities at
the Site, and transport facilities for deliveries to the Site;

informed itself as to the availability of labour and the accommodation required;

informed itself as to the existing services around the Site from relevant authorities;

satisfied itself as to the correctness and sufficiency of the tender for the work under
the Contract, and that the rates and prices stated cover the cost of performing all
the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract; and

informed and satisfied itself of any other matter which may be reasonably
necessary desirable or relevant to the submission of the tender;
Failure by the Contractor to do all or any of the things deemed to have been done under
this Clause will not relieve the Contractor of his liability to perform all his obligations under
the Contract.
No warranty is given by the Principal to the Contractor concerning the accuracy or
otherwise of information regarding Site conditions supplied by the Principal. The
Contractor acknowledges that it has not relied on any information supplied by the Principal
regarding Site conditions.
Contractor’s Site
The Contractor shall occupy only 50% of the Rooftop car park on market open days. The
remaining 50% of the carpark shall remain open and accessible to the public on all market
days for the duration of the contract (150 car spaces inclusive of 3x accessible carbays).
The boundary of the Rooftop car park construction zone may be amended from time to
time as required for the staging of construction, however, the Contractor is required to coordinate with the Superintendent and Market Operator and agree on the extent of the
Contractor’s site prior to commencing. The minimum number of carbays to remain open
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
29
(150 car spaces inclusive of 3x accessible carbays) is not negotiable during any of the
Market opening days.
Market opening days are: Wednesdays, Fridays, Saturdays and Sundays throughout the
year and some Public Holidays.
Contractor Site Extents:
The Contractor’s Site for the execution of the Works is to be confirmed with the
Superintendent prior to commencement of on-site works. Refer Appendix D. The
Contractor’s Site Extents include:
1.
Rooftop. Excluding 150 car spaces inclusive of 3x accessible carbays on market
days)
2.
Street space above footpath (subject to council approval)
3.
Western Ground Floor Carpark – 13(no) car bays adjacent to market building
The use of the Site for temporary works and construction plant, including working and
storage areas, location of offices, workshops, sheds and parking must be restricted to the
site as described above and in Appendix D. The Principal cannot make available to the
Contractor any other areas of land which are additional to the designated Site. Should the
Contractor desire additional area and/or alternative access points to construct the Works
and/or alternatively seeks to make use of the adjoining roads and footpaths, then it shall
be the Contractors responsibility to negotiate access from the relevant owner or authority
having jurisdiction over the land.
The Contractor must not permit any works to be performed outside the designated site
boundaries including loading, carparking, storage and the like.
The Contractor shall prepare their tender on the requirement to execute the Works from
within the area defined as the Contractor’s Site Extents and to accommodate continuous
use and public vehicle access to (150 car bays inclusive of 3 Accessible bays as a
minimum (approximately 50%).
As part of the tender submission a proposed Site Control plan must be provided. Such
plan will indicate:

How the site is to be accessed during construction.

The location of contractor’s car parking and access arrangements.

How impacts of the existing street network will be minimized during construction.

Staging of construction in order to maintain the public vehicle access (minimum
150 rooftop car bays inclusive of 3 Accessible bays).
Prior to commencement of the development, a detailed Site Control Plan is to be
submitted to the Superintendent for Approval.
Access Roads
The Contractor shall note the Contractors site as defined on the Drawings. Access to the
Contractors site shall be via: York Street.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
30
The Contractor shall survey all existing roads, footpaths and kerbs in the vicinity of the
Works and on the rooftop as described elsewhere in this Specification.
Contractor’s vehicles shall not obstruct roads, driveways, escape routes from buildings
and fire protection equipment.
The Contractor shall ensure that all trucks and cars leaving the site shall be thoroughly
clean and do not allow the adjoining roads to be soiled. Clean all trucks as applicable prior
to leaving site.
Existing Services
The Contractor must protect and maintain all public utilities and services installations on or
off the site including gas, water, electricity, sewerage, stormwater, security, fire services,
telephone and the like that may be disturbed during the execution of the Works.
All services on the site which are not required for the execution of the Works shall be shut
off, capped or otherwise controlled, prior to commencement of the work under the
Contract. In all cases each utility authority which is involved shall be notified in advance
and its approval shall be obtained.
The Contractor shall identify all existing services affecting the Site and shall make all
enquiries, surveys, inspections and tests necessary to identify and locate all services.
Unless reported to the contrary, the Contractor shall be deemed to accept that all existing
engineering services are in good working order.
The Contractor must ensure that all services are maintained to any occupied and/or
tenanted areas for the duration of the work. The electrical, mechanical, water, fire
protection, security, fire, gas, telephone and the like shall continue to operate uninterrupted to the occupied and/or tenanted areas for the duration of the Contract.
Before interrupting any service such as electricity, water, gas, telephone and data, etc, the
Contractor shall give at least 48 hours notice to the Superintendent describing the nature
of the work to be done, the time and the expected duration of the shutdown. All
interruptions shall be kept to the absolute minimum and only at such time as has been
agreed to by the Principal.
Existing services may be used as temporary services for the performance of the Contract
subject to the approval of the Superintendent. Should approval be granted to utilise
existing services as temporary services for the performance of the Contract, the
Contractor must pay for all costs in relation thereto.
The Contractor is responsible for the fire services for the duration of the Contract. The
Principal will invoice the Contractor for any Metropolitan Fire Brigade false alarm charges
arising from work by the Contractor or their Subcontractors.
During construction of the work and in the event of damage to any of the existing utilities
and services the Contractor must render any assistance required in connection with any
such instance. The Contractor shall be liable for the cost of any necessary repairs.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
31
Hoardings
The Contractor must secure the area designated as the Contractor’s Site to meet their OH
& S requirements and to the satisfaction of the Superintendent, and remove such modes
of security upon completion of the Works and make good the grounds.
The Contractor must obtain the necessary consents for hoardings, pay all fees and
charges, and construct hoardings in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate
regulatory Authorities. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining all necessary
scaffolding permits.
The Contractor must take all necessary precautions to minimise danger and obstruction to
pedestrians. Precautions shall include supplying, installing and maintaining barriers and
warning signs.
Occupied Premises
The scheduled buildings/areas are designated as an occupied premises and the
Contractor must permit the occupants to continue in quiet, safe and secure occupation of
the premises for the duration of the Works.
Occupied Premises Schedule:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Approx 50% of rooftop on market open days( 150 car spaces inclusive of 3x
accessible carbays)
Entire Market Floor and all market service areas
All footpaths around the market on Cecil, Coventry and York Streets.
Other areas to be agreed with the Market Operator .
York St carparks
West GF carpark excluding 13 bays
The Contractor must make available safe access to the Occupied Premises for the
occupants and visitors and maintain all emergency egress routes in accordance with
statutory requirements and safety issues. The Contractor shall allow for all screens,
hoardings, signage and staging of the Works to ensure that the occupied areas remain in
conformity with the safe egress requirements of the BCA.
The Contractor must arrange work to minimise nuisance to occupants and ensure their
safety. Protect all occupants and visitors against weather, dust, dirt, water and other
nuisance by temporary means which are safe and secure.
The Contractor must ensure that all services shall be maintained to the Occupied
Premises for the duration of the project. Should the Works necessitate the temporary
disconnection of services then the Contractor must allow for these works to be performed
out of hours from the operational hours of the businesses and ensure their completion and
reinstatement during the same period.
The Contractor shall take all steps necessary to minimise nuisance, disruption or anything
that may affect the Occupant or their business. The Contractor and the Occupant will need
to coordinate the Works as is most appropriate for the execution of the Works and the
operation of their business in occupation. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to
ensure that these Works are coordinated and a staging plan for the Works specific to the
environs of the Occupied Premises must be prepared. If necessary the scheduled scope
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
32
of works shall be performed outside of working hours. The Contractor shall allow for this in
the Contract sum.
Noise and Other Nuisance
The Contractor must take all practicable precautions to minimise noise resulting from its
activities. All construction equipment shall be fitted with noise suppressors, acoustic
linings or shields. All tools and silencers shall be kept in first class condition at all times.
Permission shall be obtained before carrying out work involving high level noise.
Comply with the recommendations set out in Appendix E of A.S. 2436-1981, Guide to
Noise Control on Construction, Maintenance and Demolition Sites, and all Statutory
Authority Regulations and Guidelines concerning noise and nuisance arising from the
Contract being carried out.
The Contractor must comply with the Environment Protection Authority’s Noise Control
Guidelines for Construction and Demolition Site Noise and ensure that noise from
operations does not cause a nuisance in Local Authority guidelines.
In all aspects, the Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to minimise nuisance
and disruption to the General Public and Occupiers of adjacent buildings in and around
the building site and elsewhere. The contractor must promptly comply with all reasonable
requests from such persons for the cessation of such nuisance including, but not be
limited to, the following items:

Limiting noise levels and vibration during the Works from tools, plant and
operation.

Respecting the rights and privacy of the building occupants, contents and general
public.

Not using radios, cassettes or devices capable of similar outputs to play music or
other broadcasts.

Not using offensive language within the hearing of building occupants, users or the
general public; avoiding offensive behaviour such as wolf whistling.

Sexual harassment and racial discrimination is illegal and regulations relative to
such harassment will be enforced.

Limiting offensive odours arising from the Works.

Avoiding whenever possible the need for shouting in order to communicate.

Provision and enforcement of suitable rules amongst the Contractor’s staff and
Subcontractors, suppliers of others working at the Contractor’s instruction
concerning the use of proper toilet facilities and the avoidance of spitting onsite.

Consumption of alcohol and use of illegal substances whilst on the site is strictly
prohibited.

The avoidance of litter, trails of dirt and dust etc.

Dogs are not permitted on the site.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
33

Adjoining buildings, occupiers and the public shall be protected against dust, dirt
and water nuisance. The Contractor will be responsible for and will be deemed to
have made due allowance within his tenure.

The Contractor must ensure that the behaviour of workers on the site does not
offend the occupants of adjoining buildings and the public generally, and shall
remove from the site anyone who’s behaviour is unacceptable to the
Superintendent.
Project Signboard
NOT USED
Site Offices and Amenities
a)
Contractor’s Office
The Contractor must provide service and maintain Site offices for the duration of the
Works. The Contractor must keep the Site office clean. The position of the Site office shall
be agreed with the Superintendent. If during the progress of the Works it becomes
necessary to move the Site office, the Contractor may only do so with the approval of the
Superintendent, without charge to the Principal and with the minimum of inconvenience.
The Contractor must secure access to the Site office at all times.
The Superintendent must have access to the Site office while the Contractor is in
attendance on site.
The Site office shall be ready for occupancy before any major site operations are started.
Demolition or removal of the Site office on completion of the Works shall be carried out
only with the permission of the Superintendent. The Site office shall remain the property of
the Contractor and shall be removed from the Site on completion of the Works.
The Contractor’s office shall be provided with a computer, software and data connection to
email digital photographs from the site office to the Superintendent’s office. The site office
shall be equipped with a digital camera to record progress issues which may arise on site,
for forwarding by email to the Superintendent’s office. This facility must be provided on
site within two weeks of possession of site. The foreman / or site representative must be
familiar with and competent in the use of this equipment.
b)
Telephone, Facsimile and Data
The Site office must be equipped with a telephone, facsimile machine, computer, modem
and data connection which shall be available for use by the Superintendent and his
delegated representatives, and maintained for the duration of the Contract.
c)
Meeting Room
The Contractor must provide, in addition to the Site office and other amenities, a room
suitable for use as a meeting room for all Site meetings. With the approval of the Principal
Superintendent, rooms within an existing building on the Site (where applicable) may be
used for the purpose of a Site office or a meeting room.
d)
Site Amenities
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
34
The Contractor will provide all statutory and necessary amenities and sanitary facilities as
required for workmen and other persons lawfully upon the Site and remove them on
completion of the Works. Any temporary amenities buildings to be provided shall be
located in positions approved by the Superintendent.
The temporary sanitary conveniences must be kept in a clean and tidy condition for the
duration of the Works.
Temporary Services
The Contractor must provide all temporary services necessary to complete the work. The
Contractor shall provide, maintain and remove at Practical Completion all necessary
services. These services shall include water, electricity, sanitary conveniences, plant and
telephones and the like. The Contractor shall pay for all services until Practical
Completion.
The Contractor must:

Provide and maintain temporary services necessary for the execution of the work
under the Contract, including temporary vehicular crossovers and temporary
drainage and pumps;

Install meters, valves and switchboards in accordance with the requirements of the
relevant authorities;

Pay all charges in connection with the installation and use of such services.

Make all of the above services available to Subcontractors.

Arrange temporary power, by making arrangements with the relevant authority to
provide temporary power for duration of the Works to the standard in AS3012
(1990) ‘Electrical Installations – Construction and Demolition Sites’.

Provide adequate lighting for work in progress at any part of the Works to the level
recommended in AS1680, and in accordance with the Code of Practice for
Temporary Electrical Installation on Building and Construction Sites (Department of
Business & Employment, Occupational Health and Safety Act 1985).
On completion, the Contractor must disconnect temporary services and clear away all
traces of the installation and connections.
1.5
Site Safety
Safety/Security
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the proper and adequate safe guarding of
the Works and of fixed and unfixed materials and equipment on the site during both
working and non-working hours. The Contractor must take all necessary measures to
protect the Works. The frequency of patrol inspections shall be as determined by the
Contractor’s Occupational Health and Safety Plan.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
35
The Contractor must at all times do everything prudent and/or necessary to ensure the
safety and freedom from injury, damage or interference to all properties, services for
persons in relation to the Works.
No claims for Extension of Time or Extra Cost will be allowed in respect of damage or loss
of material or interruption of the work due to the Contractor’s failure to safeguard the
works. The Contractor shall without cost to the Principal replace all losses.
The Contractor must protect the public and adjoining buildings from any damage. All
protection and precaution works must comply with all relevant Legislative Requirements.
Occupational Health and Safety
a)
General
The Contractor is solely responsible for all issues relating to Occupational Health and
Safety on the Site and for the Works. The Contract Documents fully describe the extent of
the Works to be constructed, but it is the Contractor’s responsibility as to how the Works
are safely constructed on site.
Upon submission of the tender it shall be deemed that the Works described in the
Contract Documents are able to be delivered in accordance with safe work practices.
Upon submission of the tender the Contractor warrants that the Works can be constructed
in a safe manner and in conformity with the scope defined in the Contract Documents.
During the tender period, the Contractor must familiarise themselves with the proposed
Works to identify any part of the Works which cannot be constructed both in accordance
with the Contract Documents and in accordance with Occupational Health and Safety
requirements. The Contractor must nominate, at the time of tender, any portions of the
Works which in their opinion they cannot construct safely and in accordance with OH&S
requirements. If nothing is stated at the time of tender it shall be deemed that the Works
can be constructed safely and in accordance with these requirements.
No claims shall be made by the Contractor to vary the Works in order to meet OH&S
requirements during the Contract period. The Contractor must select their method of
construction to achieve the best practices in work place safety. No claims shall be made in
relation to time or cost resulting from any issue related to Occupational Health and Safety
on the Site.
b)
Legislative requirements.
Despite anything else contained in the Contract for the Works, the Contractor shall comply
with the requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, Regulations under the
Act and those Codes and Draft Codes of practice and Regulations, including Plant
regulations, which are relevant to work being executed under the Contract.
The Contractor must comply with the Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004 and is
therefore obligated to provide and maintain, so far as is practicable, a working
environment for its employees and members of the public, that is safe and without risk to
health. As a condition of this Contract, the Principal requires that any Contractors or
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
36
Subcontractors that may be engaged to perform a service or works on its behalf will at all
times comply with the Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004 and provide and maintain
a working environment, systems, procedures and practices necessary for the health and
safety of all persons including Contractor employees, the Principal’s employees and
members of the public who may be affected by the services or works.

As a condition of this Contract, the Contractor must identify all potential hazards and
exercise all necessary precautions for the health, safety, and welfare of all persons it
has engaged as employees or independent contractors or agents at all times to
perform work at the Site. The Contractor will also identify all potential hazards and
exercise all necessary precautions for the health, safety and welfare of the
Principal’s employees, visitors, persons in adjacent properties and members of the
public who may be affected by the Works. This is to include those members of the
public who, for any reason, enter the Works area and any buildings or compounds
under the control of the Contractor.
The Contractor, its employees, Subcontractors and agents must comply with the following
requirements in respect to health and safety:

Legislative Requirements; codes of practice, Australian Standards, and the
Principal’s policies and procedures which are in any way applicable to the Contract
or the performance of the services under this Contract;

local, national or the Contractor’s own standards or codes of practices, whichever
are the most stringent, unless specified otherwise;

requirements as necessary to ensure a safe system of work for the particular
activity/location, including permit to work, isolation and lockout procedures and
safety work practices;

any specific requirements as directed by the Superintendent;

control of all identified hazards associated with the system of work so far as it is
practicable; and

policies, procedures or measures implemented or adopted by the occupiers of any
premises at or within which the Contractor performs work
c)
Non Compliance
Where failure by the Contractor to ensure the safety, health and welfare of persons on the
site results in civil or criminal liability on the part of the Principal, the Contractor shall
indemnify and hold harmless the Principal for and in respect of any costs, expenses,
penalties, fines, awards, damages, legal costs or compensation incurred by the Principal.
The Contractor must promptly, at its own cost, make provision to take measures directed
by the Superintendent to comply with its Occupational Health and Safety obligations and
the Contractors Health and Safety Plan. If the Contractor disputes the necessity to do so,
it may refer the matter to the OH&S division of Victorian WorkCover Authority.
Pursuant to the Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004 and without prejudice to the
responsibilities of all parties as set out in the General Conditions of Contract, the
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
37
Superintendent may suspend whole or part of the Works until such time as the Contractor
has complied with its Occupational Health and Safety Obligation. The suspension will be
effective regardless of whether the Contractor disputes the necessity for the suspension.
All costs arising out of such suspension will be borne by the Contractor.
d)
Demonstrate evidence of OH&S Management System
The OH&S management system of the Contractor must meet the compliance
requirements associated with all the duties of an employer and occupier specified in the
Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004.
The Contractor must, when requested by the Principal, submit a copy of their Company’s
OH&S Management System. The Management System must include as a minimum
requirement the following:

OH&S policy and objectives;

Organisation structure & responsibilities;

Procedures for safe work practices including procedures for equipment and plant
safety, dangerous goods and hazardous materials and public health, safety and
welfare (if applicable) and first aid and emergency procedures;

Training and induction programmes;

Auditing and inspection procedures;

Consultation procedures;

Project Safety Plan;

Project Risk and Plant Risk Assessment;

Site Risk and Safety Plan;

Performance monitoring;

Reporting of accidents and injuries and potential hazards, accidents and injuries;

Investigation of accidents and injuries and potential hazards, accidents and
injuries.
e)
Health and Safety Plan
The successful tenderer must prepare a site specific OH&S plan (‘the OH&S Site Plan”)
prior to commencing the Contract works. The OH&S Site Plan must specifically address
identified risks related to the works documenting the systems and methods the Contractor
will implement to effectively manage those risks.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
38
Where possible the OH&S Site Plan should follow the existing company OH&S policy and
procedures amended to address specific risks of the works. In addition, the OH&S Site
Plan must also address the following issues:

management and coordination of the Contractor’s employees, independent
contractors and agents to ensure health, safety, and welfare on the Contract works;
and,

provide for prompt notification to the Superintendent of any accident or injury or
potential accident or injury occurring at the Contract works and an investigation
procedure.
f)
OH&S Reporting
The Contractor is required to provide regular fortnightly reports (at site meetings) on
health and safety performance relating to the Works. An approved Occupational Health
and Safety Checklist will be the basis of this report. The content of this form may need to
be amended from time to time depending on the stage of the project and the specific
works being performed by the Contractor. This report will be completed by the Contractor
at regular intervals during the Contract work, at least monthly, or at shorter intervals if
required.
g)
OH&S Incident Notification
The Contractor is required to notify the Principal within 24 hours of any accident, injury, or
potential accident or injury, property or environmental damage associated with the
provision of the Contract works or services in accordance with the requirements of the
Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004.
h)
Non-compliance
The Principal has the right to suspend or terminate the Contract works if in the opinion of
the Principal, the Contractor fails to remedy breaches of health and safety.
Contractor Site Safety Guidelines
a)
Site Boundaries
Site boundaries shall be delineated according to the drawing in Appendix D and described
as the “Contractor’s Site”. Such delineation must include all necessary hoardings,
barricades, warning signs and/or lights, locked doors/gates, witches hats, total enclosure
of the work site or other approved methods.
Work areas which are designated as restricted shall display notices in accordance with the
applicable Australian Standards for warning signs.
The Drawings identify the overall site in which the Contractor may operate. The detailed
extent of internal site boundaries are to be agreed with the Principal, Occupants and
Superintendent prior to commencing.
During the term of the Contract, the Contractor must ensure adequate protection to
adjoining property and their owners and occupiers. Where adjoining or neighbouring
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
39
properties and/or buildings are damaged as a result of negligence, carelessness or
inefficiency, the Contractor shall immediately repair such damage and make good
surfaces without cost to the owners and occupiers of adjoining properties, or to the
Principal.
b)
Site Guidelines
When undertaking works the Contractor shall observe the following guidelines for
operation:

The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety standards for the site. On-site
safety shall be maintained in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety
Act 2004, other relevant legislation and the best practices within the Industry.

The Contractor shall erect all hoardings, screens, barriers, witches hats, hazardous
lights as necessary to identify any hazardous or risks to the public, staff, or any
other site occupants.

The Contractor shall minimise dust and noise at all times.

The Contractor shall advise of a detailed sequence of works.

The Contractor shall not utilise any areas outside the Contractor’s Area without
approval of the Superintendent.

Carparking, loading, storage and the like will not be permitted outside the
Contractors Area.

The Contractor shall appoint a designated safety officer to assist in the works
outside the Contractors Area and where the safety of the employees or the public
is at risk.

The Contractor shall keep the Superintendent and the Principal’s nominated
representative fully informed of their sequence of works, their programme, their
safety procedures and all works which effect the safety of the site.
c)
Site Security
When the site is left unattended the Contractor must ensure that all points of entry to the
site are locked and any other access prevented.
d)
Electrical, Gas and Water Services
All electrical, gas, water, sewer, steam and other service lines not required in the
demolition and construction process must be shut off, capped or otherwise controlled,
prior to commencement of the work under the Contract. In each case any Utility Agency
which is involved must be notified in advance and its approval or services, as necessary,
shall be obtained.
e)
First Aid
Prior to the commencement of the work under the Contract, the Contractor must make
provisions for prompt medical attention in case of serious injury. On-site first aid facilities
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
40
must be provided in accordance with the Occupational Health & Safety Act 2004 and the
2008 Compliance Code for First Aid in the Worksplace issued by Worksafe Victoria.
The telephone numbers of the hospital, physician, fire brigade or ambulances must be
prominently posted on site. A first aider should be present at the site in accordance with
the First Aid Compliance Code and a first aid facility and first aid kits complying with that
Code must be available and accessible.
f)
Housekeeping
Temporary electrical leads, hoses or pipes must be suitably supported and adequately
protected in order to prevent injury to pedestrians and damage to vehicles.
Unless otherwise agreed, the Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the restoration
of the site to a condition that is free from risks to health and safety at the completion of the
work under the Contract. All materials required on site must be stored safely within the site
boundaries.
The Contractor shall be responsible for cleanliness, order and hygiene on site. On site
amenities must comply with the standard of amenities in accordance with the
Occupational Health & Safety Act 2004 and the Code of Practice for Building and
Construction Workplaces issued by Worksafe Victoria.
g)
Use of Work Platforms and Lifting Equipment
The Contractor must ensure that:

safe work platforms are used where work cannot be performed safely from the
ground or from solid construction.

scaffolding is based on solid foundations.

care is taken to prevent damage to scaffolding planks and components from falling
debris.

damaged planks and components are removed and replaced by qualified
scaffolders.

working platforms are kept clear of debris.

damage to scaffolding from on site vehicles and earthmoving machinery is
prevented.

all scaffolding conforms to the Code of Practice for Plant.

all scaffolding work, platforms, powered mobile plant, lifting plant, lift trucks and lifts
conform to the Occupational Health and Safety (Plant) Regulations 1999 and are the
subject of risk assessment and risk control measures pursuant to those Regulations.

so far as is practicable, no load is simultaneously lifted by more than one piece of
plant, e.g. dual crane lift.

so far as is practicable, no load be suspended over or travel over any person
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
41
h)
Ladders
The Contractor shall:

inspect ladders prior to use to ensure that they are in good condition for safe
operation.

use ladders only for works of a minor nature.

secure all ladders top and bottom.

ensure that only one person works from a ladder.

not over reach when using a ladder.

not carry out any cutting or work involving the use of power tools
from a ladder.

use in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations
i)
Roofs
The Contractor shall carry out all work on roofs in accordance with the Code of Practice Work on Roofs.
j)
Fire Protection
The Contractor shall be responsible for fire protection at the site.
Fire prevention must be taken into consideration when determining work methods and
selecting tools and equipment for use at the site.
Fire alarms, fixed installations and ancillary equipment such as pumps and water supplies
shall not be shut down or altered without the Superintendent’s authorisation.
The cost of Fire Brigade call outs due to false alarms which are caused by the Contractor
or are a result of the Contractor’s Works will be a charge on the Contractor.
k)
Electrical Safety
All electrical power tools, leads, site lighting and power supply shall be operated or
connected in accordance with the Code of Practice for Temporary Electrical Installations
on Building and Construction Sites. The Contractor must ensure that the provisions of the
Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 2004 relating to electrical hazards from plant
are complied with at all times.
l)
Personal Protection Equipment
Personal protection equipment appropriate for the hazards associated with the work being
carried out by the Contractor and subcontractor must be provided by the Contractor. The
personal protection equipment must comply with statutory or Australian Standard
specifications.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
42
The personal protection equipment required shall be listed on the approved Risk
Assessment Checklist.
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the personal protection equipment
provided to employees is used where required.
The Contractor must provide suitable storage facilities for personal protection equipment.
m)
Excavation and Trenching
Any excavation and trenching work must be carried out in accordance with the provisions
of the Code of Practice for Safety Precautions in Trenching Operations.
n)
Containers That Have Held Combustibles
Welding and cutting work on containers that have held combustible solids, liquids, gases
or dust must be rigorously cleaned by the Contractor to ensure that the containers are free
of such material.
o)
Contractor’s Vehicles
Contractor's vehicles shall not obstruct roads, driveways, escape routes from buildings or
fire protection equipment and all speed limits must be defined, clearly displayed and
observed.
p)
Confined Spaces
When work is to be performed inside a container, vessel or other confined space, work
must be carried out in accordance with all applicable Codes of Practice and Australian
Standards.
q)
Dangerous Goods Act and Regulations Compliance
The Contractor must comply with the provisions of the Dangerous Goods Act 1985 and
the Regulations made thereunder, namely:

Dangerous Goods (Explosives) Regulations 2000

Dangerous Goods (Liquefied Gases Transfer) Regulations 1987

Dangerous Goods (Storage and Handling) Regulations 2000
r)
Occupational Health and Safety (Plant) Regulations 2004
The Contractor must at all times ensure that the provisions of the Occupational Health and
Safety (Plant) Regulations 2004 are complied with and in particular shall carry out risk
assessments and control measures in accordance with, and as required by those
Regulations.
s)
No Smoking Policy
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
43
No smoking shall be permitted in any of the existing buildings or the new buildings on site.
This no smoking requirement also includes new buildings and refurbished buildings when
they are under construction. Smoking on site will only be permitted in designated areas
which are identified by the Contractor and only with the approval of the Contractor.
t)
Alcohol and Drugs
The Contractor must ensure that its employees, Subcontractors and agents are not
affected by alcohol or drugs when performing work or attending the site. Consumption of
such substances in the course of carrying out the Contract is prohibited.
u)
Personal Protection
Personal protection is to be provided according to the Occupational Health and Safety Act
2004. Personal hearing protection devices (complying with Australian Standard AS1270)
must be used in all "Designated Noise Areas". Safety glasses or non-fogging goggles (AS
1337) must be worn when sawing, drilling, sanding, nailing, using any mechanical
equipment or conducting work that could reasonably cause a hazard requiring protection.
Head protection and ‘site vests’ for visual identification are to be provided for all staff at all
times on site.
All personal protection is to be provided for all site visitors.
v)
Disposal of Refuse
The Contractor must remove refuse (including food scraps and the like) resulting from
work under the Contract from the Site.
The Contractor is responsible for the supply and removal of bins. Bins shall not restrict
traffic in carriage ways and must be illuminated at night.
Debris must not be stored within stairways, passages or exits. All debris shall be removed
from site and placed in bins. The Contractor is required to ensure that the work area is
kept clean and tidy and that bins are emptied on a regular basis.
Bins and debris must be removed before holiday periods at Easter, Christmas and prior to
Institute Open Days.
For dropping refuse, the Contractor must use hoppers and shutters, chutes or refuse
buckets which are covered or of such a design as to confine the material completely and
prevent dust emission.
w)
Disposal of Contaminants
The Contractor must properly dispose of contaminants in accordance with all statutory and
contractual requirements and from Site to approved locations or as otherwise directed by
the Superintendent.
x)
Installed Equipment
The Contractor must protect installed equipment against damage by dust, dirt, shock or
other causes.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
44
y)
Existing Flora
The Contractor must adequately protect from damage all trees, other plants and garden
beds within or surrounding the Site. The Contractor is responsible for rectification of any
damage to existing flora, including grassed areas and garden beds.
z)
Construction Drainage
NOT USED
aa)
Vermin Control
The site must be kept clean and suitable provision made for disposal of food scraps, etc.
Take all precautions necessary to prevent infestation by vermin and insects.
bb)
Synthetic Mineral Fibre Products
In any demolition or construction use of Synthetic Mineral Fibre products, the Contractor
must ensure that work safe practices recommended by the manufacturers are complied
with.
cc)
Sexual Harassment
The Contractor must conform to the Equal Opportunity Act 2010.
1.6
Execution of the Works
Authority Approvals
Before entering into the Contract, the Principal has given notices, paid the fees, and
obtained the permits, approvals and other authorisations stated in the following schedule.
This schedule identifies those applications made by the Principal and/or paid by the
Principal. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain and pay for all other permits,
approvals and authorisations necessary to complete the Works which are not identified in
this schedule as being obtained or paid for by the Principal.
This schedule shall not be deemed to be a complete or fully inclusive list of the
applications, permits, approvals and authorisations required by the Contractor, but only
those applied for or paid by the Principal. The Contractor shall take all steps necessary to
ascertain the permits, approvals and authorisations necessary to complete the Works and
accept all risks and costs associated with Authority approvals.
Authority/
Service
Provider
Application
made by
Principal
(Yes/No)
Application
to be made
by
Contractor
(Yes/No)
Contribution/
Fees paid by
Principal
(Including
GST)
Contribution/
Fees to be
paid by
Contractor
(including
GST)
Permits,
Approvals,
Authorisations
received
(Yes/No)
1. Building McKenzie
Permit
Group
YES
No
100%
$
Pending
3. Town
Planning
Permit
YES
No
100%
$
Yes
Trade
COPP
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
45
Obtain all necessary permits, consents, approvals and certificates from all authorities
having jurisdiction over any part of the work of this Contract. Pay all royalties and costs
relating to patent rights, trade marks or other protected rights. Comply with all regulations
and by-laws of the authorities and fully indemnify the Principal against any claims arising
there from.
Setting out the Works
The Contractor is responsible for the correct setting out of the Works and the accuracy of
the Works, and shall make good at the Contractor’s expense any errors which may occur.
The Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of a licensed surveyor who shall
carry out and check and provide the certificates required by the Superintendent.
The Contractor shall verify dimensions, bearings, levels and the existence of services.
The Contractor shall refer to the Superintendent for instructions in the case of any
discrepancy between the Drawings and the physical features on site.
The Contractor shall coordinate and is fully responsible for the accurate and
comprehensive setting out of the building including, but not limited to the following:

existing columns and walls prior to the erection of any column or wall

columns and beams between the lowest floor level and the upper most roof level
and penetrations through them for services

finish level of all floors

walls, floor outlets and other services, including those in false ceiling spaces or
cast into concrete elements

the buildings and subsequent erection thereof in accordance with the documents
within the boundaries of the site
The licensed surveyor must provide confirmation of the set out in the form of a survey plan
when requested by the Superintendent. All costs associated with the engagement of a
surveyor shall be met by the Contractor including any requests made by the
Superintendent to confirm the whole or any parts of the set out of the works.
Statutory Requirements and Industrial Relations
General:
The Contractor must ensure continuity of cover for himself and his Subcontractor and
shall, when called upon to do so, provide documentation to demonstrate that:
The Legislative Requirements of GST, Work Cover, Payroll Tax (where applicable) and
Construction Industry Long Service Leave, PAYE Taxation, the Prescribed Payments
Scheme and Redundancy Payment Central Fund are being met.
The provisions of Workers Superannuation
employees/unions and employers, are being met.
schemes,
where
agreed
between
The Contractor must work strictly in accordance with the conditions of the Code of practice
for the Building & Construction Industry – Victoria.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
46
Code of Practice:
Further the Contractor shall recognise the following Code of Practice and undertake to
maintain a good industrial record and to ensure that the Contractor and all Subcontractors
engaged by the Contractor will for the duration of the Contract:
(a)
Adhere to awards and formal industrial agreements;
(b)
Adhere to national Wage Case Principles;
(c)
Prohibit ‘all-in’ or cash-in-hand payments;
(d)
Ensure good safety practice in accordance with relevant legislation, awards and
the procedures contained in the Building Industry Agreement;
(e)
Refuse claims for payment for lost time due to industrial action unless: exceptional
circumstances exist on genuine safety issues or fundamental breaches of Contract
or employment by employers in accordance with the Building Industry Agreement.
This remains the responsibility of the Contractor and is not to be reimbursed.
Other Requirements:
Contractors must comply with Equal Opportunity and Affirmative Action legislative
requirements in the hiring and employment of staff as detailed in the current versions of
the following Acts: Federal Racial Discrimination Act, Federal Sex Discrimination Act,
Federal Disability Discrimination Act, Federal Human Rights and Equal Opportunity
Commission Act, Federal Affirmative Action (Equal Employment Opportunity for Women)
Act, Victorian Equal Opportunity Act.
Grounds on which discrimination may not occur include, but are not limited to: age,
gender, pregnancy, race, disability (physical or intellectual, past, current or predicted),
marital or parental status, religious or political beliefs, family responsibilities.
Contractors Supervision
The Contractor must provide an efficient and appropriate site organisation. In addition to a
qualified and experienced General Foreman, the Contractor shall employ qualified
Supervisors, Assistant Foremen, experienced Leading Hands and site office clerical staff
as necessary for the execution of the work. Provide supervision of workmen and control of
the quality of the workmanship.
The Contractor must provide a Services Coordinator. They must be employed full time on
the site for the duration of the Works, and have role dedicated to the coordination of all
building services.
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all operations and methods of the
construction, material and workmanship, are safe, sufficient and in accordance with the
Contract documents. No inspection by the Superintendent and no instruction given, or
certificate issued by the Superintendent, shall be deemed to imply that the Superintendent
has assumed or taken over any part of the Contractor’s responsibilities.
The Contractor is responsible for the supervision of the Works to ensure that the Works
are constructed in conformity with the Contract Drawings, specifications and other
Contract Documents. The Contractor must oversee and supervise the construction of the
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
47
Works and incorporate all standards set by the Australian Standards Association in
relation to building practices and all regulations and by-laws of the relevant Authorities.
The Contractor must supervise the day to day running of the building works and is
responsible for the method of construction, its conformity with the documents, and the
safe operation of the site.
Working Hours
Unless the Contract otherwise provides, the working hours are the customary industry
working hours worked between 7:00am and 5:00pm, and the working days shall be
Monday to Friday inclusive. Excluded are public holidays and where applicable rostered
days off and scheduled productivity leisure days in accordance with the current Code of
Practice for the Building & Construction Industry – Victoria.
NOTE: Work is permitted on Market open days provided that occupied premises
remain uninterrupted.
The working hours and working days may be varied with the prior approval of the
Superintendent when the Contractor finds it necessary to carry out work outside the
working hours or on other than the working days stated in the Contract. In such cases the
Contractor must promptly notify the Superintendent in writing and there shall be no charge
to the Principal.
Clerk of Works
No Clerk of Works shall be appointed.
Quality Assurance
The Contractor shall establish and maintain a quality system in compliance with AS3900
or ISO 9000 series standards and shall be effective from the commencement of the
Works. The Contractor shall provide details of the quality manual within 4 calendar weeks
of acceptance of tender and if this is satisfactory to the Superintendent, the successful
Contractor shall thereafter implement this system.
The Contractor shall not be relieved of any responsibilities or obligation in respect of the
execution of the Works and shall remain solely responsible for the same notwithstanding:

the obligations of the Contractor to plan, develop and implement a quality
system in accordance with this Contract; or

any comment or direction upon review or acceptance of approval to proceed
with or request to vary any part of the quality system by the Superintendent.
a)
Plan Outline
The plan outline is to be structured in accordance with the format detailed below and shall
include the appropriate interfaces with the Contractor’s own Corporate Quality System.
The tenderer shall submit a sample of the proposed plan for this Project. In addition, the
tenderer shall submit a copy of its Inspection and Test Plan; its procedure for sample
“Management Review” and “Document Control”.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
48
b)
Project Quality Plan
Subject to acceptance of the Plan outline by the Superintendent, the Contractor will be
requested to provide prior to commencement and within fourteen (14) days of Letter of
Acceptance a comprehensive Quality Plan based upon the approved outline document.
The Quality Plan must detail all measures to be undertaken and records proposed to
accurately reflect full compliance with the project specification and other documentation.
c)
Plan Format
As a minimum requirement, the Quality Plan shall detail the following:
1.
2.
3.
9.
Project Details, Name, Contractor, Client, etc
Scope of onsite/offsite works
Address the interface between client, consultant, principal contractor,
subcontractors and suppliers.
Show organisational structure
Include job descriptions for key management and supervisory staff.
Detail level of responsibility and authority of all project staff.
Nominate a Project Quality Representative and provide appropriate CV for same.
Master List or similar control document procedure and specific registry of quality
system and other technical documents.
Verification procedures for the completion of the works an identification of defects.
d)
Cost and Time In Respect of Quality
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The Contractor must allow for all verification/compliance testing of supplied goods and
services in accordance with the various trade/discipline specifications, at no additional
cost.
No additional costs will be paid for the provision of quality assurance measures necessary
to reflect the requirements of AS 3902 as amplified by AS 3905.2 “Guide for the Use of AS
3901, 2 and 3 for Construction” on this project.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the performance of all its sub-contractors/suppliers
to meet the quality assurance requirements of the Works.
If sub-contractors/suppliers employed on the project do not have the appropriate capacity
to meet the quality assurance requirement the Contractor shall put in place appropriate
quality systems for the sub-contractors/suppliers to demonstrate to the Superintendent
that the required level of quality has been achieved.
e)
Project Quality Records
The quality records to be maintained are those stated in AS 3905.2 Section 4. These
records must be available on site at all times to the Superintendent.
Environmental Accreditation
NOT USED
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
49
1.7
Administration
Programme of Work
Contract Commencement:
Construction Programme:
Within 7 working days after the letter of acceptance, establish a construction programme
which demonstrates graphically the events, resources and times necessary to achieve
Practical Completion on the last day of the time for Practical Completion as nominated in
the Contract.
A construction programme for the whole of the works shall be prepared by the Contractor
in critical path network form using Microsoft Project or approved equivalent with subnetworks as required to detail adequately the critical activities. Three A3 size copies of this
construction programme shall be delivered to the Superintendent within three weeks of
being given possession of the site. After approval of the Superintendent, the Contractor
shall provide a data disk of the approved programme.
Indicate in the construction programme:(a)
Completion times, in working days, for at least the following critical stages of the
project:
Contract acceptance

Possession Site

Completion of set-out

Completion of preliminary siteworks

Completion of Safety Works

Completion of checking by Building Surveyor

Completion of commissioning and cleaning
(b)
The earliest and latest starting and finishing times of all critical activities relevant to
the Contract in diagrammatic form including any nominated sub-Contract and
separate contracts. The critical path shall be highlighted in colour to indicate the
critical events of the project commencing from the date of acceptance of tender
and finishing at the expiration of the time for practical completion inserted in the
Annexure to the General Conditions of Contract.
(c)
In addition to activities on or near the critical path, significant activities would
include:

the work package carried out by subcontractors;

the supply of any required Drawings or information by the Superintendent;

approvals required from Authorities;
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
50

provision and approval of shop Drawings, samples or any other
product data;

any off-site activities such as prefabrication;

supply of essential materials and major plant;

commissioning, testing and coming into service of all installations;

supply of draft and final operating and maintenance manuals and
instructions;

training and instruction of any operators;

Contractor’s verification process;

supply of all as-built and installed information;

Contractor’s rectification of defects.
The programme shall clearly describe a critical path plan showing the dates of
commencement and completion of each trade in each major section and items of the
works and showing practical completion by the due date.
The Construction Programme shall provide details of the duration, interdependencies and
occurrence of every significant activity necessary for the completion of the Works.
The allowable duration of each activity may vary with respect to the type of activity, its
interdependencies and its significance. Activities of one week’s duration on, or close to the
critical path, are considered significant. The level of detail of non-critical activities must be
such that the duration can be accurately assessed and the interdependencies clearly
shown.
The construction programme shall be based on the relevant industry’s work day calendar a five day working week, excluding weekends, public holidays and leisure and rostered
days off.
The work shall be executed in accordance with the construction programme submitted.
The Contractor shall be entitled to advance the execution of the works and shall notify the
Superintendent in writing of any change to the schedule.
At intervals of not more than 4 weeks and prior to the Site Meetings, the Contractor will
review the whole of the Construction Programme and prepare a revised version of it which
incorporates any changes in methods, times or sequence of activities and takes into
account adjustments to the project calendar date, time, scale and provides for any agreed
extensions of time. Every such revised version of the construction programme shall also
indicate and provide for any corrective actions being or proposed to be taken by the
Contractor to bring the progress of the Works into conformity with the requirements of the
Contract relating to progress and completion.
Whenever the construction programme is revised, the Contractor will promptly issue to the
Superintendent two A3 size copies of the revised version.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
51
Notwithstanding anything contained in this clause, the Contractor shall be and remain
solely responsible for all planning, scheduling, sequences, methods, and techniques in
and about the construction of the Works and for the due performance of all the
Contractor’s obligation under this Contract with respect to the progression and completion
of the Works. In particular without affecting the generality of the foregoing, neither
anything contained in the construction programme, nor the acceptance by the
Superintendent of any version of the construction programme, nor anything else done or
required by the Superintendent shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to procure
that the Works are completed safely, on time and in accordance with the Contract
documents.
The Contractor shall report at each site meeting the percentage progress on each current
activity and identify the action proposed by him to overcome delays to any of these
activities. The details so reported and identified shall be included in the minutes of the
meeting. The Contractor must allow for the cost of providing and revising the programme
within the tender as described herein.
Administration Procedures
The administration procedure for the issue of a Superintendent Instruction (SI) will be in
accordance with the following:

All instructions required under the Contract by the Superintendent or his
representatives shall be issued on a Superintendents Instruction (SI) form and
signed by the Superintendent or Superintendent’s Representative.

If an instruction involving engineering advice is required, the inspecting engineer
shall provide Consultant Advice to the Superintendent. An SI will be issued to
incorporate the requirements of the engineering advice and that advice will be
attached to the Superintendents Instruction and forwarded to the Contractor. The
Contractor must not undertake work from advice or instructions received directly
from any Consultants. The Contractor must only undertake work from instructions
received from the Superintendent.

Where the Superintendent determines that a Cost Variation is likely due to the
issue of an SI, they will provide clear instruction to proceed or not to proceed with
the work. The Contractor must proceed with the work when instructed,
notwithstanding that the cost of the variation is yet to be determined.

The Contractor will price the SI and return a Variation Quotation with a detailed
and comprehensive break up of cost to the Superintendent. This must be provided
prior to the date nominated on the Superintendent’s Instruction. Compliance with
these dates may be a condition precedent to the payment of Progress Certificates
at the sole discretion of the Superintendent.

The Superintendent will review, assess and issue a Variation Order to the
Contractor to formally determine the value of the variation and the Contract Sum
Adjustment.

Variation Orders will be numbered sequentially regardless of the origin of the
Variation.

Where a Quantity Surveyor is appointed they shall consult with the Superintendent
to prepare estimates and review claims for Variations and seek assistance from
the Engineers as necessary.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
52

The Construction Drawings issued to the Contractor will not be updated to include
variations to the Works instructed by the Superintendent. The Site Instruction and
any associated sketches/Drawings will be the full extent of information and
Drawings issued to Site. The Contractor must maintain a QA procedure to ensure
compliance with all Site Instructions as they amend the Construction Documents.
Cashflow Forecast
The Contractor must provide to the Superintendent (within seven working days of
acceptance of tender) a cashflow forecast showing the monthly values of work expected
to be completed in relation to the Contract time. This forecast must be based upon and
consistent with the construction programme and is submitted in accordance with the
Programme of Work.
With each Progress Claim submission by the Contractor they must include an updated
copy of the cashflow forecast to reflect the actual figures in addition to the forecast figures.
Site Meetings
The Contractor must hold, facilitate and chair site meetings throughout the term of the
Contract and ensure the attendance of the Superintendent and Consultant
representatives. A representative of the Principal may attend from time to time.
Site meetings will be held at intervals not exceeding 2 weeks at an agreed time. The
Contractor must keep complete and accurate minutes of site meetings and within three
working days after each site meeting, submit to each party written copies of the minutes
for their action.
The site meetings shall provide the forum in which the progress of the Works can be
monitored, the principal design and construction issues can be addressed, and to ensure
that administration related procedures are being dealt with in a timely manner. The site
meetings provide the overview of the project and shall be chaired by the Contractor to
achieve this objective.
Prior to the commencement of the Works the Contractor shall attend a preliminary site
meeting, arranged by the Superintendent, with the Principal, Project Manager, consultants
and other relevant stakeholders. The objective of this meeting is to discuss and/or confirm
site management issues and details of Contract Administration procedures.
Progress Certificates and Payments
Invoices are processed as described in the General Conditions of Contract AS4000 and
the Annexure. The Contractor is required to present a GST Invoice and Statutory
Declaration. Invoices cannot be processed without these details.
The Contractor shall furnish, in an acceptable form to the Superintendent, statement of the
amount claimed for each Progress Payment. The claims are to be fully itemised and shall
show the value and percentage of works carried out to date for each trade heading. The
Superintendent will issue Progress Payment Certificates at monthly intervals in
accordance with the Terms of the General Conditions of Contract.
Provisional Sums and supplied items included in the Tender Documents will be omitted in
full or in part at the Superintendent’s discretion, in ascertaining the Contractor’s works
value for Progress Payment purposes.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
53
The Contractor shall note that all warranties and guarantees must be produced in writing
at the completion of each relevant trade before Progress Payments are authorised.
As a condition precedent to the payment of each Progress Certificate, the Contractor must
provide Variation Quotations to the satisfaction of the Superintendent.
The Works include all administrative procedures required to perform the work in
accordance with the Contract documents. When assessing progress claims the
Superintendent must take into consideration the Contractor’s progress in relation to the
pricing of variations. Failure to comply with the pricing of variations by the date nominated
on the Superintendent’s Instructions may result in the withholding of a Progress
Certificate. The Superintendent, at their sole discretion, may elect not to process a
Progress Certificate until they are satisfied that the required Variation Quotations have
been satisfactorily provided.
The Variation Quotations must include comprehensive and detailed costings together with
all supporting documentation required for the Superintendent to determine a value for the
variation.
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the Variation Quotations are provided by
the nominated dates. No time extensions will be granted for any issue in relation to the
delay in providing a Progress Certificate due to the failure to comply with these
requirements.
Practical Completion
Practical Completion is the stage in the execution of the works under the Contract when
the works are complete except for minor omissions and minor defects which do not
prevent the works from being reasonably capable of being used for their stated purpose,
which the Superintendent determines the Contractor has reasonable ground for not
promptly rectifying, and rectification of which will not prejudice the convenient use of the
works. This shall include those tests which are required by the Contractor be carried out
and passed before the works reach Practical Completion, have been carried out and
passed, and documents and other information required under the Contract which, in the
opinion of the Superintendent, are essential for the use, operation and maintenance of the
work, which have been supplied.
The Contractor shall have completed the Works (save for minor omissions and minor
defects) including the following items before the issuance of a Certificate of Practical
Completion:
(Generally in chronological order)

completion of the Works (including site clean up to the satisfaction of the
Superintendent)

Construction Validation by Contractor

Contractor’s Defects Rectification

provision of as-built Drawings and Operation & Maintenance manuals.

lodge all documents including warranties and guarantees, maintenance manuals
and approvals from all relevant authorities.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
54

provide a Certificate of Final Inspection as issued by the nominated Building
Surveyor

commissioning

provision of training for Principal’s Staff (the Contractor must make reasonable
endeavors to co-ordinate times for staff training).

Coordinate Superintendent’s/Consultants’ Defects Inspection

Rectification of all defects which the Superintendent determines may prejudice the
convenient use, or safety of, the Works
All items listed as defects shall be completed within 15 working days from the issue of the
defects list.
If such minor items are not completed within the 15 working days the Superintendent shall
have the right to engage tradesmen and execute the completion of the items and shall be
entitled to charge the Contractor for the expense in respect of same. These changes shall
include the consultant fees associated with having these works performed by another
contractor.
The Works, including Operation and Maintenance Manuals, must be complete before
Practical Completion. The Superintendent will not issue a Certificate of Practical
Completion where there is outstanding work or where the Works are incomplete.
Variations
a)
Final
Within one month of the issue of the Certificate for Practical Completion the Contractor
must conclude their claims for variation costs. Variation costs which arise after this time
will not be accepted by the Superintendent and this requires the Contractor to remain upto-date with the costings of variations throughout the duration of the project. The
Contractor must take all steps necessary to ensure that they, and any of their
subcontractors or suppliers, are aware of this requirement and they shall notify them of
this closing date of the submission of Variation Claims and Costs.
Provisional Sums and Quantities
Please provide provisional quantities for the following items included in the tender:
Render:
Remove and replace render (in areas less than 0.5m2) 10 no.
Remove and replace render (in areas greater than 0.5m2) 20m2
Concrete repair:
Repair concrete as specified (in areas less than 0.5m2) 10 No.
Repair concrete as specified ( in areas greater than 0.5m2) 20m2
Amounts for profit and attendance are to be included within the tender for these
provisional quantities. Work extending beyond the Provisional Quantities will be charged
at these rates with additional percentage for profit and attendance as defined in the
Annexure.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
55
Contingency Sum
No contingency sum is included in this Contract. ($Nil).
Separate Contracts
NOT USED
Out-of-Hours Contacts
The Contractor must respond (and be in attendance) to any request by the Principal or
their nominated representatives to attend to emergency situations on Site, outside the
normal working hours.
Within 7 days of letter of acceptance, the Contractor must provide the names and contact
telephone numbers of responsible persons employed on the Site who may be contacted
after hours during the course of the Contract.
Form of Security
For the purposes of this Contract, the security shall be Bank Guarantees in a form
approved by the Principal. Separate Bank Guarantees must be provided for each amount
of the retention fund to be released at separate stages in the Contract. The Bank
Guarantees shall be released at the dates of Practical Completion and Final Completion.
The Superintendent may, at their sole discretion, require additional monies retained to
ensure the completion of the defects and the provision of the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals. These monies shall be withheld from payment to the Contractor until the
Operation and Maintenance Manuals are provided and all the defects identified by the
Superintendent at the time of Practical Completion are rectified by the Contractor. Where
defects have not been rectified within 15 working days, the Superintendent will arrange for
others to rectify the defect(s). The cost of these works shall be deducted from monies
owed to the Contractor – directly from the cash retention or, where required, from the
Bank Guarantee. Any outstanding cash retention will be returned to the Contractor
subsequent to the satisfactory completion of the defects by others.
GST
Goods and Services Tax (GST) applies to the Works. The Works will be valued nett and
the GST will be added to the nett assessment.
1.8
Reports/Audits
Hazardous Materials
(a)
Generally
All materials, articles or substances brought onto the Site by the Contractor which pose
any health, fire or explosion risks, must be used in accordance with all current regulations
and manufacturer’s recommendations and full details must be presented to the
Superintendent in the form of a Hazardous Materials Register. The Contractor is
responsible for the supply of information and training of all labour, on materials or
substances which are brought onto the Site. This information may be requested by the
Principal through the Superintendent.
The Contractor shall provide safe storage, handling and labelling of all hazardous material
in accordance with the Dangerous Goods Regulations. This includes segregation of
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
56
chemical classes, the provision of bunding, physical security and the issue of MSDS’s
prior to use. Adequate measures are to be taken to contain potential spillage, including the
on-site availability of materials to contain and clean up spills.
The Contractor is responsible to clean up and to make good any damage (both direct and
consequential) resulting from leaks and spills.
The stormwater drains are not to be used for the disposal of hazardous waste. The
Contractor shall store and dispose of hazardous waste in accordance with all Standards
and Authority requirements.
Refer Appendix E Part 5 Asbestos Audit Review. In the event that hazardous materials
are discovered on site, the contractor should exercise caution, comply with all work safety
guidelines and advise the Superintendant immediately.
1.9
GENERAL
Treasure Trove
Any treasure trove, including coins or objects of antiquity found during excavations or
attendant work shall remain the property of the Principal and must be handed to the
Principal immediately they are found. Refer General Conditions of AS4000 Contract,
Clause 24 Site.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
57
2
GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
2.1
Submissions
Samples
The Contractor shall provide samples and sample panels for approval by the
Superintendent prior to commencing the work for which the sample is provided.
These samples are required for the Superintendent to make a penultimate assessment of
the proposed material and/or finish and/or colour.
Provision of the nominated sample does not mean that the finish or sample will be
automatically approved. The sample, finish or sample panel will be resubmitted as many
times are necessary to gain approval from the Superintendent in relation to quality, colour,
finish, detail and suitability for its intended purpose.
The Contractor must allow in their tender sum and their programme for the Superintendent
to vary the colour of the sample submitted at least once subsequent to the originally
requested sample being provided.
For all other assessment criteria other than colour the Contractor must allow for as many
samples as maybe required to gain the approval of the Superintendent. This requirement
must be allowed for in the tender sum and programme for the Works.
A sample register must be established (to the satisfaction of the Superintendent) by the
Contractor to allow the Principal and Consultant team to record acceptance of the sample.
Prior to commencing the trade, the Contractor shall submit the following samples for the
project at the size nominated:
Item
a.
Concrete

N/a
b.

Masonry
N/a
c.

Structural Steelwork
N/a
d.

e.

Metalwork
N/a
Carpenter
N/a
f.

g.

h.

Joiner
N/a
Plasterer/Render
Colour/Size/Number
Roofer
Colourbond Roof sheet (RF-01)
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
58

Opal Roof sheet (RF-02)
i.

Façade, Window Frames and Glazing
N/a
j.

Floor, Paving and Unit Finishes
N/a
k.

Doors, Door Frames and Hardware
N/a
Samples must not be incorporated in the Works, but shall be provided separately for
continued reference against the item under construction. The provision of all samples
must be programmed by the Contractor to gain approval from the Superintendent prior to
any potential delay arising from the request for further samples, unsatisfactory execution
of the sample or review by the Superintendent. Time extensions shall not be granted for
the approval processes associated with the provision of samples.
The Contractor shall identify the project subcontractor or supplier, manufacturer and
applicable product and model numbers attached to the samples. The Contractor shall
identify all non-compliances with the project requirements, and the characteristics which
may detrimental to successful performance of the completed work.
The Contractor shall keep approved samples in good condition on site for reference until
Practical Completion.
The Contractor shall only commence items of the works for which those samples have
been approved by the Superintendent, the Principal and members of the consultant team
as nominated by the Superintendent.
The Contractor shall coordinate the submissions of all related samples. Any delays
caused by the late submission or inadequacy of samples shall not be recognised as a
reason for a variation or time extension.
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to match approved samples throughout the work.
2.2
Prototypes
The Contractor shall provide prototypes for the items nominated below. The reason for
these prototypes being requested from the Contractor is to allow the Consultant team to
confirm that the nominated component of the Works can be constructed as detailed are
tested and are suitable for their intended purpose. The Contractor is responsible for
fabrication of the prototype, which confirms the setouts, the materials, the detailing, the
tolerances, issues of constructability, and fitness-for-purpose.
These prototypes must be provided and constructed in a time period where they do not
cause delays to critical path activities. Therefore, the Contractor shall construct these
prototypes as early as possible for consultation /revision with the Superintendent.
Construction of the prototype does not mean that it will gain approval from the
Superintendent. The fabrication/approval of a prototype is a process which requires
Contractor involvement. It requires the Contractor and the Superintendent to collectively
review the prototype to make minor additions, design suggestions and/or alterations to the
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
59
prototype from time to time to meet with the design and construction objectives of the
component under consideration. The Contractor must allow for minor modifications to the
prototype which arise from the Superintendent/Contractor review. All of this work shall be
included in the tender sum.
The components for which the Superintendent requires the Contractor to provide a
prototype are:


Flashing profiles – capping and fascias
1x downpipe clip.
2.3
Shop Drawings
Four copies of each set of shop drawings shall be submitted. These shall be collated and
stapled.
The drawings shall be comprehensive indicating all details of fabrication, assembly
installation furnishing and fixing of the items concerned for the following:
Scaffolding / Access walkways / steelwork / ladders / roof access systems /
Syphonic Roof Drainage System
Submit computations to demonstrate structural sufficiency, safety and performance.
Setout:
Detailed setout of the work. including centrelines or reference points, joint widths
and spacings, edge margins, anchorages and fixings, ancillary and adjacent work, in
plan, elevation and section. Include templates as required.

Fabrication and construction details:
Large scale details of members and assemblies, including structural properties and
specifications of materials. Include three-dimensional and exploded views if
requested.

Assembly, installation and connections:
- Fabrication, installation, and allowable range of base-structure movements.
- Embedments, anchorages, brackets and attachments to base-structure.
- Separate identification of dead load and restraint connections where
applicable.
- Connections and fixings, including visible fixings and sealing.
- Closing off, sealing and trimming to base-structure and adjoining surfaces.
- Provision for movement, and three dimensional adjustment.
- Provision for construction tolerances.

Indicate sequence of installation, including method of installing the last panel in any
vertical section so that required joint movement allowances are maintained. Indicate
method of verifying provision for movement after installation.

Flashings/Trims

Hardware, fittings, trim and accessories
Joints
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
60

Finishes, colours and coatings

Performance requirements

Cores, chases, built-in fixings and the like
Coordination of shop drawings with other trades
The Contractor must submit the drawings after having checked and coordinated them with
all other trades and the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall submit them in complete trade lots for each of the above. The
drawings must not be submitted staged, in part or incomplete. The drawings shall be
returned to the Contractor if they are not in a satisfactory form for examination by the
Superintendent. Shop Drawings must be submitted in an approved form to the
Superintendent a minimum of 4 weeks prior to manufacture. Should the drawings require
amendment, the Contractor shall amend the drawings as required by the Superintendent.
The Superintendent must be given 2 weeks to check the Shop Drawings. If returned to
the Contractor for amendment, the Superintendent shall be given a further 2 weeks to
examine the amended shop drawings. The Contractor shall make due allowance in the
programme for this examination process of shop drawings prior to manufacturing.
The Contractor must acknowledge that there will be regular exchange of information
between the Superintendent/Consultant team and Contractor/Shop Drawing team to
prepare shop drawings. Discrepancies which become evident shall not entitle the
Contractor to an Extension of Time. The Contractor must recognise this process of
clarification, provision of information, identification and resolution of discrepancies as part
of the Shop Drawing procedures and shall be deemed to be included in their Tender Sum
and Project Programme.
Prior to submission to the Superintendent, the Contractor shall be required to check,
approve and sign the submitted shop drawings. The Contractor shall not forward any
shop drawings to the Superintendent directly from the Subcontractors. The drawings shall
be checked for dimensional accuracy, number, extent, compliance with standards,
coordination with all other services and to ensure all necessary ceiling heights are
maintained. The Contractor shall also identify any foreseeable problems or conflicts.
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the services within the ceiling spaces
nominated.
Prior to shop drawings for the Mechanical Services being submitted to the Superintendent
for examination the Contractor shall check and coordinate all other services with the
mechanical layouts. The Contractor shall ensure there is no conflict of services and that
the required service zones and pathways are maintained.
2.4
As Built Drawings
The Contractor shall provide within 2 weeks prior to the date of Practical Completion of the
Works three sets of prints of the final as-built drawings and an electronic transfer of
information in an approved form. The drawings shall include locations of all installed
services and roof access systems, including mechanical, electrical, communications,
security, sprinklers, hydraulics, fire services, stormwater, sewer, gas etc. Failure to
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
61
provide these drawings will result in the Superintendent withholding 2.5% of the relevant
trade claim owed to the Contractor until they are satisfactorily completed.
The Contractor shall obtain from the Superintendent a computer disk of the relevant
drawings (only for the purposes of providing as-built drawings) and shall mark thereon the
exact position and route of all underground and concealed piping and/or ductwork and
wiring as actually laid, by dimensions from boundaries, buildings and other fixed points.
The position of all valves, branches, inspection openings, etc., shall be dimensioned and
shall be checked by the Contractor before the work is covered up.
Variations in position or size of pipes, valves, etc., within the building shall be marked on
these sets of drawings and checked by the Contractor.
These dimensioned drawings shall be returned to the Superintendent on completion to
enable an exact record of the whole installation to be made for use in future maintenance.
It is the Contractors responsibility to prepare all of the as built drawings on an electronic
format.
The Contractor shall coordinate and show all dimensions where applicable. Supply all
notes and descriptions necessary for a complete record including variation referencing.
The Contractor shall supply drawings showing services or installations as completed, and
such services shall be correctly drawn, dimensioned and clearly indicated including all
relative inverts and levels, valves, stop clocks, changes in direction, points of access,
junction fittings, sizes, flow capacity and other relevant information.
Generally installation and service drawings shall be executed at the time of construction or
installation and before the items have been covered up. The Contractor shall:
-
-
During the installation of all services maintain a check and recording system for the
exact location, size, materials and levels of such services;
Keep an accurate record of the works as build on dye trace copies of all relevant
drawings and arrange with the Superintendent for obtaining CAD transfer or dye
tracings from an approved commercial printing company and pay all costs;
Employ only competent draftsmen to carry out the recording legibly with suitable
dimensions and labels in accordance with AS 1203 show levels of in ground
services and dimension to columns or fixed parts of the works.
These drawings shall form the basis for recording the final actual locations of all services
and other alterations and in particular as follows:
-
Water supply (including cocks, ties, branches, valves etc.)
Stormwater (including pits, 1.0’s, inverts, etc.)
Sewerage (including pits, 1.0’s inverts, etc.)
Fire Service (including control valves, etc.)
Underground Electrical Supply Cables.
Conduits cast into slabs.
For services installations to be concealed below ground or in-walls the Contractor must
photograph the installation prior to concealing the works. Provide copies of photographs
with as built drawings.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
62
2.5
Site Records
The Contractor shall make legible daily records for the site which shall be made available
to the Superintendent upon request. These daily records shall include (but are not
necessarily limited to the following):
















2.6
labour on the site
construction plant on the site
materials on the site
classification of tradesmen and staff employed on the site
visitors to the site including those from the Contractor’s head office identifying arrival
and departure times
daily weather record
inspections and test undertaken
all issues in relation to the Occupational Health and Safety Guidelines including all
accidents or near accidents
tests and attendance by authorities having jurisdiction over the works
meetings of contractor’s, consultants and other project stakeholders on site
industrial disputes
notifications from any party not directly associated with the work (adjoining
properties, tenants, public and the like)
QA procedures
OHS procedures and records
The Contractor and/or their subcontractors and/or their employees, as the situation
requires, must provide sworn affidavits in relation to activities, work,
communications, information and like, when requested by the Superintendent. The
Superintendent may request evidence in the form of an affidavit to clarify matters of
site records.
Record of all incidents, complaints, discussions or agreements with the building
management/operators.
Surveyor Confirmation
The Contractor shall engage the services of a licensed surveyor for the setting out of the
Works. The Contractor’s surveyor must provide confirmation to the Superintendent that
the setout for the Works are in accordance with the Contract Drawings at the following
stages of construction:


Preliminary setout for the in-ceiling works including roof framing, structural members,
access and rigging platforms.
The survey confirmation shall be undertaken prior to any fabrication.
The survey drawing must show any deviations from the structural setout as confirmation to
the Superintendent that the Works are being executed in accordance with the Contract
Document. Errors in the setout shall be corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the
Principal.
The confirmation of the building setout is to be provided to the Superintendent as
verification of compliance with the Contract Documents and does not diminish the
Contractor’s responsibility for the accurate setting out of the Works. The Contractor must
undertake all other survey work as necessary to meet their responsibilities under the
building contract.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
63
2.7
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Before the date of Practical Completion, the Contractor must furnish to the Superintendent
three copies of operating, service and maintenance instructions or manuals for items of
equipment and plant, including supplier’s or manufacturer’s descriptive literature, all as
further described in these Specifications. Include a complete list of suppliers of all
equipment and major materials used in the Works. Failure to provide the comprehensive
Operation and Maintenance manuals will result in the Superintendent withholding 2.5% of
the relevant trade claim owed to the contractor until they are satisfactorily provided.
Unless otherwise specified the manuals shall include








On completion submit a maintenance manual setting out a program for regular
maintenance cycles at not more than five-year intervals. Include renderwork
cleaning, desalination, inspection and repair of joints and flashings, checking
rainwater goods for blockages and breakdown, and detection of potential failures
arising from movement or other causes.
Comprehensive manufacturers information on all plant and equipment installed
The designed performance specifications and commissioning test results
All services, wiring and assembly diagrams for all plant and equipment
Details of all manufacturers maintenance instructions.
Information required for arranging both servicing and spare parts.
The names and contact details of any subcontractors who installed each piece of
plant and equipment.
An A3 paper copy of all “As built Drawings”
Schedules:




All schedules described in Consultants Specifications.
Mechanical installation/equipment and lifts service/equipment
Electrical installation/equipment/fire services/communications
Proprietary equipment items (including spares identification, etc)
Specific requirements relating to the provision of Operating and Maintenance Manuals and
plant operation training sessions are further defined in the respective engineering services
sections of this Specification.
The manuals are to be submitted in draft for review prior to final documentation.
The Contractor shall allow three (3) working days for comprehensive education and
training of the nominated Principal’s personnel in the use and operation of all installed
plant and systems, including engineering services installation.
Subcontractors will be required to furnish to the Contractor all instructions, manuals and
other literature in accordance with the requirements of their respective subcontractors.
Format: A4 Size loose leaf, in commercial quality, 4 ring binders with hard covers, each
indexed, divided and titled. Include the following features:

Cover:
Identify each binder with typed or printed title “OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL” to spine. Identify title of project, volume number, volume
subject matter, and date of issue.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
64










Ring size: 50 mm maximum, with compressor bars.
Text: Manufacturers; printed data, including associated diagrams, or typewritten,
single-sided on bond paper, in clear concise English. Number pages consecutively.
Dividers: Durable divider for each separate element, with typed description of
system and major equipment components. Clearly print short titles under laminated
plastic tabs.
Drawings: Fold drawings to A4 size and accommodate them in the binders so that
they may be unfolded without being detached from the rings. Provide with
reinforced punched binder tabs.
Contents: Drawings and technical data necessary for the efficient operation and
maintenance of the installation. Include the following:
Table of contents: For each volume. Title as cover.
Directory: Names, addresses, and telephone and facsimile numbers of principal
consultant, sub-consultants, contractor, subcontractors and names of responsible
parties.
Equipment descriptions:
Name, address and telephone and facsimile numbers of the manufacturer and
supplier of items of equipment installed together with catalogue list numbers.
Schedules of equipment, stating locations, duties, performance figures and
dates of manufacture. Provide a unique code number cross-referenced to the
record and diagrammatic drawings and schedules, including spare parts
schedule, for each item of equipment installed.
Operation procedures: Manufacturer’s technical literature as appropriate.
Maintenance procedures:
Manufacturers technical literature as appropriate. Register with manufacturer
as necessary. Retain copies delivered with equipment.
Detailed recommendations for preventative maintenance frequency and
procedures.
Safe trouble-shooting, disassembly, repair and reassembly, cleaning, and
alignment and adjustment procedures. Provide logical step-by-step sequence
of instructions for each procedure.
Schedule of spares recommended to be held on site, being those items
subject to wear or deterioration and which may involve the Principal in
extended deliveries when replacements are required. Include complete
nomenclature and model numbers, and local sources of supply.
Certificates:
Copies of suppliers warranties (or guarantees)
Copies of manufacturers warranties
Copies of Certificates from authorities.
Product certification.
Drawings: As built drawings.
Format: Use the same borders and title block as the contract drawings. The
Superintendent may supply transparencies of the contract drawings as the basis for
work-as-executed drawings
Maintenance: Maintenance and Operational manuals shall be submitted in triplicate.
Warranties, Guaranties and technical brochures shall be provided in the manuals.
The Contractor shall arrange all necessary meetings to handover the Maintenance and
Operational Manuals to the Principal. These meetings shall include the Contractor, the
Superintendent and the Principals representatives.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
65
2.8
Training of Principal’s Staff
The Contractor shall allow three working days for comprehensive education and training of
the nominated Principal’s personnel in the use and operation of all installed plant,
equipment and systems, including engineering services installation.
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate the education and training of the
Principal’s personnel. The training shall occur prior to the Date of Practical Completion
and all plant and equipment must, at the time of training, be operational and
commissioned.
2.9
Progress Photographs
The Contractor shall take colour digital photographs of progress of the works at fortnightly
intervals between each site meeting. At each site meeting the Contractor shall submit one
set of prints and the digital information on disk to the Superintendent.
The progress photographs shall be provided in A4 format and shall identify the project,
date, time, location and orientation. A minimum number of ten photographs nominally 100
x 150mm shall be provided. This shall be provided in A4 bound format.
2.10 Warranties
Prior to, and as a condition precedent to Practical Completion, any work subject to the
warranty as scheduled below, the Contractor shall deliver the relevant warranty.
Each warranty is to be in accordance with the proforma attached and following this clause.
The warranty must be effective from the date for Practical Completion.
Each warranty provided in respect of any work referred to in sub-clause (a) of this
clause will:
(i)
be a warranty for the period designated for that work; and
(ii)
be provided in writing duly executed by the supplier of the work, by the
Contractor, and where the work is supplied by the supplier to a subcontractor,
by that subcontractor.
The Contractor shall procure in respect of each warranty that all applicable stamp duty is
paid and that the warranty is duly stamped to denote such payment, before the warranty is
delivered to the Superintendent. In the event that in breach of this requirement any
warranty is delivered to the Superintendent which has not been duly stamped, the
Principal shall be at liberty to cause it to be properly stamped and the duty paid by the
Principal shall be recoverable as a debt due by the Contractor to the Principal.
Each warranty will provide a comprehensive statement of details, materials, components
and workmanship that are included in the warranty (refer relevant section of Specification)
whether such items are supplied and/or installed by the Contractor or his subcontractor or
by another party. Warranty of the whole shall imply warranty of each and every one of its
parts, whether supplied or installed by the warrantor or by others.
The following provisions shall apply with respect to every warranty:
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
66
(i)
The warranty shall not in any way relieve the warrantor from any liability under
any law or statute for the consequences of any negligence; and
(ii)
Notwithstanding any limitations expressed or agreed under the conditions of
the warranty, if any failure of or defect in the subject of the warranty is such
that, if allowed to continue, consequential damage to the Works or any part of
the Works can reasonably be expected to result and the warrantor, after
receiving notification of the failure or defect, does not proceed with reasonable
diligence to rectify the failure or defect, he shall be liable for the cost of
repairing or reinstating such damage as the Superintendent may assess as
having occurred after the time when action by the warrantor should have been
taken and every warranty shall be required to contain provisions to this effect.
No warranty shall be construed as or have the effect of relieving the Contractor of any of
his contractual obligations under the provisions of this Contract.
Schedule of Warranted Works
Item
Roofing – steel deck, sealants
Roofing –gutters and downpipes, sealants
Warranty
10 years
15 years
Roof Access systems
Doors
2 years
Stormwater drainage
10 years
Plastering& render
5 years
Painting
3 years
Structural
25 years
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
67
PROJECT NAME
FORM OF WARRANTY
THIS
AGREEMENT
is
made
…………………………………………20……
the
…..……………
day
of
between
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
… of
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………….…
(hereinafter called ‘the Warrantor), of the first part, and
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
….………… of
…………………………………………………………………………………………….………
………………
(hereinafter called ‘the Head Contractor’ which expression shall include his permitted
assigns) of the
second part.
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………….…
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
….………… of
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………….…
(hereinafter called ‘the Principal’ which expression shall include his successor in title) of
the third part.
WHEREAS:
a.
The
Head
Contractor
has
entered
into
a
Contract
dated
………………………………….20…..
with the Principal for the erection of a building and/or other works (hereinafter
called ‘the works’)
on
the
land
at:………………………………………………………………………………………………
b.
the said Works are to be carried out in accordance with the said Contract with
drawings
and Specifications prepared by Paul Morgan Architects, and the Engineering
consultants.
c.
the Warrantor has contracted with the Head Contractor of the Works, namely
…………………...
………………………………… (hereinafter called ‘the Sub-contract Works’).
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
68
d.
the Warrantor has agreed to give warranty and indemnity to the Contractor and to
the Principal
in
respect
of
the
sub-contract
Works
for
a
period
of
…………………………………… effective
from the date of Practical Completion.
IT IS HEREBY AGREED AS FOLLOWS:
1.
The Contractor warrants to the Head Contractor and also (as a separate
warranty) to the Principal that all materials supplied by the Warrantor shall be in
accordance with quality and/or standard not lower than the quality and/or
standard stipulated by the relevant drawings and Specification and to the extent
that quality and/or standard is not so stipulated, shall be of good materials and
workmanship fit for the purpose or purposes for which the same are required to
be supplied. This warranty shall be in addition to and shall not derogate from
any warranty implied by law.
2 a.
The Warrantor covenants with the Head Contractor and also (as separate
covenant) with the Proprietor to replace and/or make good to the reasonable
satisfaction of the Principal’s Architect but at the expense of the Warrantor, so
much of the sub-contract work as within the period stated on page 1 from the
Practical Completion of the Works shall be found to be of a lower quality or
standard than that referred to in Clause 1 or shall show deterioration of such
extent that in the opinion of the Architect it ought to be made good or replaced
in order to achieve fitness for the purpose or purposes for which the Works were
performed or supplied and whether on account of utility performance
appearance of otherwise provided however that this covenant shall not apply to
deterioration or damage caused solely by excessive movement of building
structure or by exceptional physical or other external cause or agency which is
beyond the control of the Warrantor and which it could not reasonably have
been expected to foresee or provide against.
b.
The Warrantor further covenants with the Head Contractor and also ( as a
separate covenant) with the Principal to meet the reasonable cost of any work
necessary to any part of the Works to enable the requirements of sub-clause
2(a) of this Warranty to be carried out and/or necessary to make good the
Works afterwards.
c.
The decision of the Superintendent as to
(i) any work or materials failing to comply with quality or standard as above
mentioned or otherwise failing to comply with the foregoing warranty
and/or
(ii) as to the extent of replacement and/or making good which shall be
necessary to properly remedy the defects and/or
(iii) as to the extent of any work required under sub-clause 2(b) of this Warranty
shall be notified in writing to the Warrantor and a copy of the notice shall
be given to the Head Contractor, and thereon shall be final and binding
upon the parties subject only to Clause 3 below.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
69
d.
The Warrantor further covenants that within a reasonable time after written
notification to the Warrantor of a decision of the Principal’s Architect as to
remedial work required as aforesaid, the Warrantor will replace and/or make
good the sub-contract works or parts thereof and/or meet the cost of any work
required by sub-clause 2(b) of this Warranty accordingly.
e.
Within seven days after being notified of a decision by the Architect under any
of the proceeding paragraphs, the Warrantor or the Head Contractor may give
notice of arbitration thereon and in that event the question shall be referred to
arbitration as hereinafter mentioned.
f.
If within the time aforesaid (and the Architect’s decision as to what is reasonable
time in any case shall be final and binding upon the parties) the Warrantor shall
fail to fully and properly carry out the said remedial work, the Head Contractor
and/or the Proprietor may carry out such work, or cause the same to be carried
out, and the Warrantor hereby agrees to indemnify and keep indemnified the
Head Contractor and the Principal against all the costs and expenses of and
incidental to the carrying out of the remedial work and also against any
consequent or subsequent loss or damage sustained by them or either of them
as a result of the Warrantor’s failure as aforesaid.
3.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that in the event of any dispute
arising with relation to any matter touching on or affecting those present to this
agreement, such dispute shall be referred by either party to the independent
arbitration of the President for the time being of the Victorian Chapter, Royal
Australian Institute of Architects or his nominee in accordance with and subject
to the provisions of the Arbitration Act of the State of Victoria or any Statutory
modification thereof at the time being in force.
4.
So far as shall be practicable the provisions of this document shall come into
operation as between the Warrantor and the Head Contractor as soon as it has
been executed by them, notwithstanding that it may not have been or may not
thereafter be executed by the Principal. Upon execution by all parties the
provisions shall become fully binding on them.
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
70
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have executed this Warranty on the dates
hereafter shown.
THE COMMON SEAL OF
or signed by the
said Warrantor
……………………….……………………………….
Execution
in the presence of
Date
of
………………………………………………………………………
Signed by the said
Principal’s representative ……………………….……………………………….
Execution
in the presence of
of
………………………………………………………………………
THE COMMON SEAL OF
or signed by the said
Head Contractor
……………………….……………………………….
Execution
in the presence of
Date
Date
……………………………………………………………………
Contract No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
71
of
2.11 Dilapidation Survey
The Contractor shall employ a suitably qualified and experienced consultant to
prepare a comprehensive dilapidation survey of the works area, including:






Concrete slabs
Balustrades
Surrounding roads/pavements
Existing building facades
Adjacent roofs
Central access building(lift/stairs)
The dilapidation survey is to include a written description and comprehensive
photographic record of existing conditions.
The Contractor shall submit three copies of the dilapidation survey to the
Superintendent. Additional copies shall be provided to each owner of their
nominated properties/building. The dilapidation survey shall be provided in A4
format and should include diagrams and drawings of the premises to accompany
and clarify the photographs and text.
Prior to the commencement of any work on site, the Contractor shall arrange for a
joint inspection of the premises by his nominated representative, the Superintendent
and the Principal.
The Contractor shall be responsible for gaining approval of the adjoining owners that
the dilapidation survey is a true and accurate record of the condition of the buildings.
If the dilapidation survey does not record the condition of the buildings or any part of
the buildings it shall be deemed that there are no defects or damage.
Any subsequent damage to these premises shall be made good by the Contractor at
his expense. Should the Contractor notice damage done by others he must
immediately notify the Superintendent.
The Contractor shall maintain periodic inspections to investigate any evidence of or
claims of damage to adjoining properties as a result of the execution of the Works.
Keep records of any investigations on site and make them available for inspection by
the Superintendent until Practical Completion of the Contract.
Maximum duration between inspections – four calendar weeks.
2.12 INSPECTIONS AND CERTIFICATES
Notices/Inspections/Certificates
The Contractor shall give the Superintendent and their consultant advisers sufficient
notice so that all required tests and inspections can be witnessed. The Contractor
shall not carry out any of the required tests or compliance inspections without
approval.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
72
In all cases where an inspection is to be made or a test to be undertaken by the
Superintendent or their consultants, or the Building Surveyor, or any Authority
having jurisdiction over the works shall be a minimum of 48 hours notice.
The Contractor shall manage and coordinate their works to ensure that this notice
can be provided in all instances.
Except for site tests and those by the building surveyor and statutory authorities the
Contractor shall carry out testing using agencies accredited by the National
Association of Testing Authorities (NATA) to test in the relevant field. The
Contractor shall cooperate as required with all testing authorities.
The Contractor shall submit reports showing the observations and results of tests
and compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the contract. These
reports shall be forwarded to the Superintendent within 2 working days of the tests
being undertaken. A copy of the submitted report and test certificates shall be
retained on site.
If tests and inspections are to be carried out on parts of the works, do not conceal
those parts and do not commence further work on those parts, until the tests and
inspections have been satisfactorily completed and compliance substantiated.
2.13 Building Surveyor
The Principal, before entering into the contract has lodged four sets of documents
with the following building surveyor:
Stan Tsantis, McKenzie Group
With the exception of information to be provided by the Contractor the building
permit is ready to be collected from the building surveyor.
The fees for the cost of regulatory advice up until the lodging of the four sets of
documents with the building surveyor, together with cost of the building permit have
been paid by the Principal. The Contractor shall pay all required fees and obtain
building certification for the work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the lodgement of all other required
documents and pay all fees and obtain all permits and approvals by other
authorities.
Section 33 of the Building Act 1995 requires that the Contractor for the building work
for which a permit has been issued under part 3 must notify the relevant building
surveyor without delay after completion of each mandatory notification stage of that
work. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to directly notify the nominated
building surveyor.
The mandatory notification stages are: (To be confirmed with building
surveyor)



public protection works
completion of framing
final inspections
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
73
There will be a number of inspections required under each of these mandatory
notification stages and the Contractor shall liaise with the nominated building
surveyor to manage and coordinate all inspections. This is a responsibility of the
Contractor and should be coordinated directly with the building surveyor and does
not require notification of the Superintendent.
Upon request from the Superintendent the Contractor shall furnish to the
Superintendent copies of all correspondence, inspections and notices between the
Contractor and the nominated building surveyor.
In addition the Contractor shall note that the Superintendent and their consultant
team shall make periodic inspections of the works to review conformity with the
contract documents. They are also required to make inspections of footings,
structure, samples, prototypes and the like. This is a separate process of inspection
from the statutory inspections required by the building surveyor. The Contractor is
advised in the contract documents of the items requiring inspection by the
Superintendent and the consultant team and they shall provide notification as
previously specified.
2.14 Inspection of Roads, Footpaths, Kerbs and Liability for Subsequent
Damage
Prior to commencement of work, the Contractor shall arrange for a joint site
inspection by his own representative and a representative of the Municipal Engineer
as appropriate, to list any existing damage to Roads, Footpaths, Kerbs, Channels,
Nature Strips, etc. Such a list shall be prepared in triplicate, endorsed by both
parties, dated, one copy retained by each party and one forwarded to the
Superintendent as soon as inspection is completed.
Failure by the Contractor to take such action will be accepted as notice that there
are no defects or damage.
Any subsequent damage to these installations shall be made good by the Contractor
at his expense. Should the Contractor notice damage done by others, he must
immediately notify the Superintendent.
If the Principal then recovers costs from those causing the damage the Contractor
will be credited to the extent. Such action by the Principal does not relieve the
Contractor of the primary responsibility of making good.
2.15 Essential Services
Requirement:
The following inspections and tests, where applicable are to be carried out during the
Defects Liability Period and thereafter for as long as the building is under the control
of the
Contractor:
Essential Services
to be inspected or
tested
Installation
standards/
level
of
Nature of inspection or test,
frequency
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
74
Paths of travel to
exits
performanc
e
BCA Section D
3 monthly inspections to confirm
travel paths are intact
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
75
2.16 PROJECT INFORMATION
Diagrammatic Layouts
The Contractor shall note that the layouts of service lines, plant and equipment as
shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only, except where dimensions are
provided. Before commencing work the Contractor shall obtain measurements and
other necessary information to identify their location.
In relation to service lines in the ground or concealed within the existing building
fabric the Contractor shall research all information available from:




relevant authorities having jurisdiction over the works
original construction documents
pit covers, inspection openings and access panels as shown and as can
be inspected on the site
other information made available by the Superintendent, the consultants
or the Principal
The Contractor shall allow for all necessary test pits, excavation, demolition and
research as necessary to accurately locate the services.
The Contractor shall take care when excavating and demolishing to locate service
lines in accordance with the procedures established in their project specific
Occupational Health and Safety Guidelines. The Contractor may encounter other
services whilst endeavouring to accurately locate service lines and their excavation
and demolition procedures shall be undertaken with extreme caution. The
Contractor shall include the costs of all procedures required to comply with the
Occupational Health and Safety Guidelines in their tender sum.
2.17 Design Intent
The works are to be carried out in the spirit and true intent and meaning of the
drawings and the specification, where the same may or may not be particularly
shown on the drawings or described in the specification, provided the same is
reasonably inferred from them. Should the Contractor find any discrepancy in the
drawings or between the drawings and the specification, they should immediately
notify the Superintendent who shall be the sole arbitor as to the course of action to
be followed.
2.18 Abbreviations
The contract documents use abbreviations as listed in Appendix A, Finishes
Schedule. These abbreviations are used on drawings and are defined/given
meaning in this Appendix.
2.19 Tolerances /Incidentals/Packing
The Contract includes all work incidental to the work specified herein and
necessitated by the condition of the building or materials, either as specified or as
discovered during the progress of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for
taking all sizes from the actual work.
The Contractor shall allow for all packing, trims, cover strips, incidental framing, and
the like or as necessary to provide a complete and operational building described in
the drawings and specifications.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
76
The Contractor must co-ordinate all tolerances and packing necessary to construct
the Works. Primary structural elements, secondary systems, facades and finishes
all have different tolerance requirements and the contractor must make due
allowance for packing, shims, adjustments and incidental framing required to meet
the tolerances defined in Australian Standards, Manufacturers recommendations, or
as stated below, whichever is the lesser. Maximum tolerances generally are:
Primary Structural Elements +10mm to – 10mm
Secondary Framing Elements+5mm to – 5mm
Facades / Finishes
+2mm to – 0mm
Floors
+2mm to – 2mm (maximum deviation of 3mm under a
3.0m straightedge)
2.20 Materials and Components
a)
Sources Policy
In accordance with Victorian Government Industry Development policy, maximise
local content (i.e. Australia or New Zealand sourced) within the principle of value for
money.
b)
Use of Victorian Rainforest Timbers Prohibited
It is prohibited in this Contract to use:
A)
Timber harvested from a Victorian cool temperate or warm temperate
rainforest as defined by the Department of Conservation and Natural
Resources; or
B)
Timber harvested from land adjacent to a rainforest, constituting a rainforest
buffer area as defined by the Department of Conservation and Natural
Resources.
c)
Proprietary Items
Definition: A proprietary item is an item identified by naming manufacturer, supplier,
installer, trade name, brand name, catalogue or reference number.
Where proprietary items have been included in contract documents, the Contract
sum shall be deemed to have included for the use of said items.
If alternatives are proposed, submit proposed alternatives and include available
technical information, reasons for proposed substitutions, cost and other required
information at the time of tender. However, tenders shall be prepared on the basis
of the items nominated. Alternatives shall only be proposed at the time of tender.
State whether use of proposed alternatives will require alteration to other parts of the
works and advise consequent costs.
Acceptance of alternatives: The Superintendent may reject alternatives proposed.
d)
Manufacturers’ or Suppliers’ Recommendations
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
77
The Contractor shall select, if no selection is given, and transport, deliver, store,
handle, protect, finish, adjust, prepare for use, and use manufactured items in
accordance with the current written instructions from the manufacturer or supplier.
The Contractor shall submit the instructions, and advise of conflicts with other
requirements.
Advise of activities that supplement, or are contrary to, manufacturer’s or suppliers’
written instructions.
e)
Sealed Containers
If materials or products are supplied by the manufacturer in closed or sealed
containers or packages, bring the materials or products to point of use in original
unbroken containers or packages.
f)
Tolerances
Enforce tolerances. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
g)
Consistency
For the whole quantity of each material or product use the same manufacturer or
source and provide consistent type, size, quality and appearance.
h)
Synthetic Mineral Fibre Products
Where the contract documents require the demolition or construction use of synthetic
mineral fibre products, the contractor shall, together with the Superintendent’s
Representative, determine, agree and confirm:
(a)
(b)
(c)
the type and scope of all works where the handling or use of such products is
involved;
the applicable exposure standards for atmospheric contaminants appropriate to
such synthetic mineral fibre products; and
acceptable procedures for the ordering, receipt, transport, storage and handling
of the specified products in all respects, inclusive of considerations of
occupational health and safety.
2.21 Synthetic Products
Where the Contract Documents require the demolition or construction use of
synthetic mineral fibre products, the Contractor shall determine:
(a)
(b)
(c)
the type and scope of all works where the handling or use of such products is
involved;
the applicable exposure standards for atmospheric contaminants appropriate to
such synthetic mineral fibre products; and
acceptable procedures for the ordering, receipt, transport, storage and handling
of the specified products in all respects, inclusive of considerations of
occupational health and safety.
and allow for these works in the Tender Sum.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
78
2.22 COMPLETION
Construction Validation
Construction Validation procedures must be performed by the Contractor to ensure
that the Works conform in all respects to the Contract Documents, relevant Australian
Standards and the functional and performance requirements of the Contract.
Construction Validation must be performed under operational conditions and only on
the completed Works.
To perform the procedures of validation, the Contractor shall undertake
comprehensive audits, tests and inspections to verify conformity of the Works, and
provide a written certification that the Works have been performed in accordance with
the Contract. Should the audit procedure identify that there are incomplete items or
outstanding defects, then these shall be rectified, reinspected and subsequent to
validation of the Works by the Contractor.
The validation process must be undertaken by the Site Manager, the Foreman and
key representatives of their subcontractors. The written verification requires all three
parties to sign the report as acknowledgement that the works are in conformity with
the contract documents.
The Contractor must establish and maintain documented procedures for inspection,
testing and validation to ensure that the requirements for the project are met. The
required inspection, testing and validation must be detailed in the Contractor’s Project
Quality Plan. At a minimum it must include an A4 validation sheet for every room and
space (example attached). The Contractor must carry out all final inspections and
testing in accordance with the Quality Plan and documented procedures to provide
evidence of the conformance of the finished Works. The Quality Plan for inspections
and testing must require that all specified inspections and tests have been carried out
and that the results meet the specified requirements.
No defects inspection by the Superintendent shall be undertaken Construction
Validation has been completed to the satisfaction of the Superintendent and:

the associated data and information has been made available to the
Superintendent;

all defects, incomplete works and non-conformities identified in the Contractor’s
validation process have been rectified by the Contractor.
The Contractor’s validation process must be documented in the Quality Plan in
sections which represent the main specification headings in this document. Evidence
must be provided that all suppliers, products, systems and services have been
inspected and/or tested. The records must show clearly whether the product has
passed or failed the inspections and/or tests according to defined acceptance criteria.
Where there is failure to pass any inspection and/or test, the procedures for control of
non-conforming products must apply.
The validation process should be undertaken prior to Practical Completion and the
certification provided to the Superintendent.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
79
The purpose of validation is to establish total conformity of the completed Works
under operational conditions and requires the auditing of all the component systems.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
80
CONSTRUCTION VALIDATION SHEET
Project:
…………………………………………………………………………………........................
..............................
Address:
…………………………………………………………………………………........................
..............................
Room No: ………………
Location:
…………………………………..............................................
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The Contractor herewith certifies that the work in this area has been
performed in accordance with the Contract Documents and relevant
Australian Standards. This area has been inspected and we have
verified that it has been completed, commissioned, balanced and tested
under operation conditions. We advise that this area is complete for
handover with the exception of the non-conformities identified below.
All equipment in this area is installed and commissioned to the extent
nominated in the Contract Documents including items identified under
the separate contracts clause in the specification.
To the extent required by the contract all loose furniture, joinery and
built-in cabinetry in this area has been completed and is installed.
Hardware has been installed in all doors and joinery, is operational and
has been eased? Keys to this area have been labelled and provided to
the Superintendent.
The mechanical works in this area have been commissioned, balanced,
and are full operational. They have been constructed in accordance with
the Contract Documents and relevant Australian Standards. The
mechanical works have been tested and we certify that they meet the
documented performance and operational criteria.
The electrical works in this area have been commissioned, balanced,
and are full operational. They have been constructed in accordance with
the Contract Documents and relevant Australian Standards. The
mechanical works have been tested and we certify that they meet the
documented performance and operational criteria.
The fire services in this area have been commissioned, balanced, and
are full operational. They have been constructed in accordance with the
Contract Documents and relevant Australian Standards. The mechanical
works have been tested and we certify that they meet the documented
performance and operational criteria.
The communications services in this area have been commissioned,
balanced, and are full operational. They have been constructed in
accordance with the Contract Documents and relevant Australian
Standards. The mechanical works have been tested and we certify that
they meet the documented performance and operational criteria.
N/A
N/A
N/A
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
81
9.
The security services in this area have been commissioned, balanced,
and are full operational. They have been constructed in accordance with
the Contract Documents and relevant Australian Standards. The
mechanical works have been tested and we certify that they meet the
documented performance and operational criteria.
10. The finishes in this area have been completed (including rectification of
finishes where affected by other trades and where defects have
occurred) and are in accordance with the Contract Documents.
11. We advise that following completion of the non conformities, we will
request a Defects Inspection from the Superintendent.
12. Incomplete works and non-conformities:
Signed
…………………………………………..
…………………………………………..
for (Contractor)
Site Manager
Date:
N/A
Foreman
…………………………………………..
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
82
2.23 Commissioning
The Contractor must undertake the process of construction validation after all building
and system components have been commissioned.
For all commissioning and testing, the Contractor must ensure the performance and
operation of all systems and each item of equipment specified. The Contractor must
ensure that systems are operating stably and reliably for the Principal’s operation and
that the as-built drawings and Operational Manuals have been provided.
The Contractor must ensure that each system to be tested is supported by the
required services, equipment and resources.
During the commissioning period make all adjustments and carry out all
changes necessary to meet the specified performance and to establish safe,
reliable and tested operational systems. Commission and test each system
and record all results.
2.24 Defects
Prior to Practical Completion defects inspections of the Works by the Superintendent
and the Consultants are required. These inspections are to assess the Works as
applicable for Practical Completion. The Contractor must organise and coordinate
defects inspections with the Superintendent and Consultant team and the
Superintendent/Consultants will prepare the defects lists. The defects lists are not a
finite list, and they do not relieve the Contractor of any contractual responsibilities
including scope, workmanship, compliance and accuracy.
The Contractor must provide the Superintendent 48 hours notice of when the Works
are ready for a Defects Inspection. The Contractor must undertake all items
described in “ Practical Completion of the Works” Clause 2.7.6 – prior to requesting
or requiring the Superintendent to undertake a Defects Inspection.
The purpose of the Defects Inspections is to allow the Consultants to assess the
Works to an extent to satisfy themselves that Commissioning and Construction
Validation has occurred.
The Superintendent will furnish a Defects List to the Contractor within 5 working days
of the inspection provided that all requirements described in “Practical Completion”
have previously been satisfactorily completed by the Contractor.
The Superintendent will prepare the Defects List and schedule into the following
categories:
Category 1.
Minor defects and minor omissions which may prejudice the convenient use of the
Works and must be rectified prior to Practical Completion. The rectification of
Category 1 is a condition precedent to the issuance of a Certificate for Practical
Completion.
Category 2.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
83
Minor defects and minor omissions which must be rectified within 15 working days of
the issuance of the Defects List(s).
The Contractor must complete the defects listed by the Superintendent in Category 2.
within 15 working days of receipt of each Defects List. The Tenderer must allow for
the Project Foreman to remain on site full-time until all defects on the list are
completed.
Should the Contractor fail to rectify the defects within the 15 working days, then the
Superintendent may elect to engage the services of others to complete the
outstanding defects. The costs associated with having these works performed by
others will be borne by the Contractor.
If rectification of defects is performed by others, due to the failure of the Contractor to
meet the provisions of this clause, the Contractor must continue to warrant the whole
of the Works including the defective work rectified by others.
Category 3.
Minor variations (not defects but deemed necessary to complete the Works) to be
undertaken in a timely manner.
2.25 Cleaning
a)
During Building Operations
The Contractor must make full provision for the daily removal of all rubbish, debris
and redundant materials to ensure the clean and orderly performance of the works.
All materials delivered for incorporation into the works shall be tidy and
stacked and stored in a safe manner.
Remove all plant and equipment no longer required from time to time as soon
as possible.
b)
On Completion
All of the following will be undertaken prior to the Works being occupied by the
Principal:
a)
General
Each area on completion shall be thoroughly and carefully cleaned out,
including scrubbing, polishing and dusting, as necessary, to leave in
perfect order and this includes all surfaces, including walls, floors and
ceilings.
b)
Glass, etc
Shall be cleaned by approved expert cleaners and all pint stains, putty smears
etc., removed without damage to glass, frames or surrounding surfaces.
c)
Finishes:
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
84
Provide careful cleaning off of all paint, cement, plaster, putty smears, etc.,
from internal and external wall, ceiling and floor finishes, as well as to
external surfaces.
d)
External:
Remove all debris from the confines of the entire site. Remove all debris,
nails, washers and all objects from the entire roof surfaces and gutters.
e)
Painting, colouring etc:
Shall be handed over in perfect order. Touchup, repaint, etc., as may be
required to remove any stain, marks or blemishes prior to the actual
occupation of the rooms concerned by the Proprietor.
f)
Grease:
All windows and doors and oil locks immediately prior to handing over.
g)
Keys:
Hand over keys, all properly labeled, together with a full schedule. Hand over
all Master Keys from the supplier direct to the Superintendent.
h)
Warranties:
Hand over all Warranties required by this Specification and in accordance with
Conditions of contract.
i)
Maintenance
The Contractor shall provide maintenance procedures for all items of plant
and equipment, operational components of the building and all finishes.
(Internal and external). The Contractor must provide a comprehensive
maintenance report for the principal’s ongoing building maintenance. It must
be provided within two weeks of the date of Practical Completion.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
85
3
ROOFER
3.1
General
Provide the whole of the building with a full weathertight roofing system of the type
noted complete with all necessary accessories, trim and roof plumbing, including
flashings, joint sealants, finishes and means of conveying roof water away from the
building.
Secondary steel framing:
Provide all required secondary steel framing required to support the work of this trade
not otherwise provided by the STRUCTURAL STEEL trade
Hold Points:
Do not commence work or proceed to the next stage of work before approval of the
required Hold Points. Required Hold Points before commencing on-site include:
-
Product Data.
Intermediate Hold Points include:
-
Field Testing (down-pipe leakage).
Certification requirements include:
-
Product Certification.
Conditions Precedent for Practical Completion include:
-
O&M Manual.
Warranties.
References and Relevant Standards:
Comply with the current edition of the relevant Standards.
Metal Roofing:
AS/NZS 1562
Design and installation of sheet roof and wall cladding.
SAA HB 39
Installation code for metal roof and wall cladding.
AS 3566
Self-drilling screws for the building and construction industries.
AS3500.3.2003
Plumbing and Drainage Stormwater Drainage
Rainwater goods:
AS/NZS 2179
Specification for rainwater goods, accessories and fasteners
AS/NZS 2179.1
Metal shape or sheet rainwater goods, and metal accessories
and fasteners
AS 2180
Metal rainwater goods - Selection and installation.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
86
AS3500.3.2003
Plumbing and Drainage Stormwater Drainage
Where Standards are nominated in the Product Data, the work shall comply with
such Standards. Submit copies of nominated Standards, if directed.
Health and safety:
Construction methods shall comply with legislative requirements and accepted
industry practice with regard to the health and safety of construction personnel.
The installed work shall comply with legislative requirements and accepted industry
practice with regard to the health and safety of users and maintenance personnel
responsible for the in service operation, cleaning and maintenance of the work.
Comply with the relevant legislative requirements and the regulations of the relevant
Authority.
Building Code:
Comply with the relevant parts of the Building Code.
*
BCA J1 Building fabric
*
BCA J3 Building sealing
Verify the Climate Zone before commencing.
3.2 Submissions and Guarantee
Submit Product Data for materials and products, including manufacturer’s
instructions, properties, test results, Engineering computations for thermal
performance, construction details and any options, as appropriate. Include Product
Data for adhesives, fixings and joint-sealants not indicated on the Drawings.
Upon practical installation of the roof by a Manufacturer’s Approved Contractor, a 10
year Watertight Installation Guarantee shall be issued covering all roofing products,
the site workmanship and the watertight installation of the product. The warranty shall
include particular reference to failure of, or due to, the following:




Usual and unusual weather and wind conditions.
Failure of system to exclude water and weather from inside the building.
Failure of system to deliver water to drainage system.
Structural integrity, including dislodgement due to wind.
Failure of finished surfaces including discoloration, delamination, cracking or
pitting

Deterioration or dislodgement of joint joint-sealants, gaskets and flashings,
including concealed and inaccessible items.

Deterioration, damage, perforation or staining due to contact or close
proximity with dissimilar metals or the environment generally.
Warranty conditions for roofing:
The warranty shall include particular reference to failure of, or due to, the following:

The installer shall use the correct products for the installed condition.

The installer shall be a specialist firm accredited by the manufacturer.

Excessive deterioration with correct cleaning and maintenance.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
87




Suitability of coating system for substrate type, exposure and use.
Ultra-violet light, atmospheric pollution and weathering.
Failure of coating to prevent corrosion or staining due to corrosion.
All lifting shall be with a suitable system of slings approved by the
manufacturer.
Warranty conditions for roof-mounted work:
The roofing warranty shall include particular reference to failure of, or due to, the
following:

Connections and penetrations related to services.

Connections and penetrations related to roof mounted walkways, ladders,
access points and the like.
The ROOFING trade shall coordinate with all trades for roof-mounted work, including
equipment
and metalwork, and take complete responsibility for the durability and water-tightness
of
the
roofing.
Warranty conditions for later penetrations:
The warranty shall include particular reference to failure of, or due to, the following:

Later fixings and penetrations through the roofing or membrane system when
carried out in accordance with the Product Data and the O&M Manual.
The Product Data and the O&M Manual shall include procedures for the later inservice
construction of penetrations and fixings through the roofing or membrane without
voiding the warranty.
Provide for the Proprietor a written unconditional warranty covering faulty
workmanship and materials in the roof construction for a minimum period defined in
Section 3 of this Specification.
3.3
Performance requirements
Loads:
The installed work, including fixings and framing, shall accommodate all permanent
and
temporary loads, individually and in combination, without failure, deflection, damage
to adjacent or applied work, or risk to human safety. Comply with the relevant
Standards.
AS/NZS 1170 Structural design actions
Maintenance loads:
The installed work shall accommodate loads and deflections due to maintenance
personnel, procedures and equipment in accordance with the relevant Standards.
AS/NZS 1170.1 Permanent, imposed and other actions
Accessible horizontal or near horizontal surfaces including parapets, canopies and
box gutters shall be considered to be trafficable and shall be capable of supporting
such loads without damage or distortion, failure of fixings, or loss of water-tightness.
Provide signage indicating maximum live loading capacity to trafficable surfaces.
Wind loads:
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
88
The installed work shall accommodate the wind loads applicable to the site in
accordance with the relevant Standards. AS/NZS 1170.2Wind actions.
Submit Shop Drawings and Engineering Computations of any additional bracing and
framing,
if
required. Verify Terrain Category before commencing. Roofing shall resist uplift
loads due to wind and air pressure.
Movements:
The installed work, including fixings and framing, shall accommodate all short and
long-term movements and deflections in the base-structure, substrates to which the
work is fixed, and within the work, including thermal movements, without failure or the
transfer of loads from the base-structure to the work of this trade.
Make provision for thermal expansion at fixings and for large expanses of roofing.
Make provision for differential movement between different adjacent materials.
Connections:
The installed work shall be connected to the base-structure or substrates in a neat,
substantial
manner by correctly selected and located connections which transfer the loads from
the
work
without displacement, distortion, or damage to the fixings, substrates or the adjacent
work.
Connections shall accommodate movement requirements.
Sharp edges:
There shall be no sharp edges or projections which could cause human injury
including injury to maintenance personnel. Metal edges and corners subject to
human contact, including unintentional contact, shall be rounded and smoothed to
prevent human injury (including when cut on site).
Corrosion:
Materials and products, including fixings and concealed components, shall be
corrosion resistant or protective coated to prevent corrosion.
Compatibility:
Adjacent materials and products shall be chemically and electrolytically compatible
with each other, substrates, and adjacent work, or shall be separated by suitable
spacers.
Adjacent
materials and products, including adhesives and joint-sealants, shall not stain or
contaminate, and shall not cause visual or structural defects in adjacent materials.
Sealing junctions:
Seal joints and junctions to adjacent work where required to maintain integrity of fire,
smoke, acoustic and moisture barriers. Coordinate with trades for adjacent work as
required. All insulation, vapour barriers and sarking to building envelope shall be
continuous , unbroken, and properly sealed at all edges, junctions and penetrations,
and shall be vapour-proof and moisture-proof. Overlap, tape and seal all joints,
perimeters and junctions as applicable and repair all breaks, gaps and
discontinuities. Give sufficient notice so the Superintendent may inspect installed
work before covering over.
Weather protection:
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
89
The installed work shall be weather-tight and water-tight, and shall exclude water and
moisture from entering the inside of the building in all weather and rain-fall
conditions. The installed work shall discharge all water and moisture, including
leakage and condensation, to the exterior of the building or into the drainage system.
Thermal insulation:
The installed work shall provide continuous thermal insulation to minimise heat gain
or loss from outside in accordance with the Building Code requirements and the
relevant Standards.
Emergency drainage and back-up systems:
Provide emergency overflow and relief systems to prevent flooding in the event of
blockage or malfunction.
Comply with the relevant Standards for Overflow Devices - Box Gutters.
SAA/SNZ HB 114
Guidelines for design of eaves and box gutters
AS/NZS 3500.3
Stormwater drainage
Submit details of proposed overflow and relief systems. Include at least one
emergency overflow for each section of roofing gutter, and overflow weirs between
high-points of adjoining gutters.
Perforated baffles to roof drainage:
Provide perforated baffles to roof gutters, down-pipe entries and drains to prevent
ingress of hail, air-borne leaves and other debris which may cause blockages and
resultant flooding. The expression ‘perforated baffles’ shall include the meanings ‘leaf
guards’ and ‘hail guards’.
Maintenance access equipment:
Coordinate and cooperate with FALL-ARREST SYSTEMS trade for installation of lifeline equipment, procedures and loads. Receive and build-in components from other
trades as required. Provide required fixings. Make penetrations, install components
to the correct tolerances, and make good where maintenance access equipment
requires fixings through the work of this trade. Indicate details on Shop Drawings.
Services reticulation:
Coordinate and build-in reticulated services passing through the work. All surface
penetrations shall be properly flashed and sealed.
Framing and bracing:
Provide sufficient framing and bracing to ensure the work is rigid and safe under all
loading and height conditions, including later applied work by other trades, and at
openings, terminations and junctions. Coordinate with related trades as required. All
framing and bracing shall be integrated with the work and concealed. Verify types
and loads of applied work before commencing.
Submit Engineering Computations if directed.
Installation tolerances:
Installation tolerances generally shall not exceed:
*
Position on plan, or vertical surface: +/- 5 mm.
*
Deviation in level (horizontal): Not more than 1 in 1000 (maximum 5 mm).
*
Deviation in plumb (vertical): Not more than 1 in 1000 (maximum 5 mm).
*
Edge straightness: +/- 2 mm per metre length (maximum 5 mm).
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
90
Installation tolerances shall not be cumulative and shall not include base-structure,
substrate or fabrication tolerances. Installation tolerances for substrate framing shall
be within the limits for the required tolerances of the finished applied sheeting.
Vermin:
The installed work shall prevent access and concealed breeding places for vermin.
Provide suitable corrosion-resistant mesh and baffles scribed to fit adjacent work, as
required. Baffles may include purpose made closed cell polyurethane foam to match
roof profiles.
Maintenance and services access:
Provide suitable hatches, panels and covers for maintenance and cleaning and for
access to existing services. Include suitable locking mechanisms where required for
security. Parapets and related horizontal surfaces to cladding and roofing shall be
regarded as trafficable, and shall accommodate live loads of maintenance personnel
and equipment.
External hatches, panels and covers:
External hatches, panels and covers shall be water-tight and weather-tight. Include
surrounding upstands and flashings, as required.
Parapets:
Parapets, cappings and related horizontal or near horizontal surfaces shall not shed
surface water or moisture onto adjacent visible cladding or wall surfaces. Such
horizontal surfaces shall be sloped to drain surface water or moisture away from
visible cladding surfaces and into the roof drainage system. Refer Render
specification.
Overhanging edges:
Provide drip moulds or grooves to all overhanging surfaces and profiles to shed
water and prevent migration and tracking of surface water to adjacent surfaces. Drip
moulds should be not less than 10 x 10 mm.
Testing:
Before installation - factory-fabricated ‘siphonic’ box gutters:
Carry out hydrostatic testing of all factory-fabricated box gutters before delivery. Test
period shall not be less than two hours. Rectify any leaks and re-test.
After installation:
Carry out hydrostatic testing of rainwater goods after installation.
The test period shall not be less than two hours. Rectify any leaks and re-test. The
testing shall include:

All box gutters and sumps located over internal rooms.

All downpipes and sumps carried out by this trade.
Coordinate with the HYDRAULIC SERVICES trade as required.
3.4 Siphonic Roof Drainage System- Design & Construct
(Syfon Systems or similar approved)
Generally:
The entire Siphonic roof drainage system, inclusive of design, prefabrication, supply
and installation shall be a Design and Construct contract carried out by a nominated
specialist siphonic contractor with a proven track record in siphonic roof drainage.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
91
Contact:
Ph: 1300 1SYFON
E-mail: [email protected] or [email protected]
Siphonic Design Parameters:
The design for the Siphonic roof drainage system will be in accordance with
AS3500.3.2003 for all roof areas.
The design will incorporate a 100% Primary Siphonic system relevant to the local
Rainfall Intensities (RFI) for either a Q20 (1:20 year RFI) for Eaves Gutters or
Q100 (1:100 year RFI) for Box Gutters and be protected by an Overflow System
(Siphonic or conventional) capable of performing to the same design criteria, that
being 100% capacity.
The combination of the Primary and Overflow systems to achieve a 100% capacity is
not acceptable to AS 3500.3.2003.
The design process will address the Siphonic prime times, Gutter Flow and fill times
utilizing unsteady siphonic modelling and spatially varied flow programs to ensure the
Overflows will not work during the design storm.
The calculations for the size and position of roof gutter siphonic inlets, horizontal and
vertical pipe work, including bends, branches, junctions and their connections to any
associated underground pipe work will be prepared by an approved siphonic
specialist. These calculations are to be based on detailed architectural and hydraulic
engineering drawings of the project together with the local rainfall intensities as
mentioned above.
The pipework system shall be sized to convey the design roof water flow from the
syfonic inlets through the system to the point(s) of discharge via the most efficient
possible direction. The minimum velocity shall be 1.0 m/s for self-cleansing
purposes. The maximum negative pressure in the system shall not exceed 8.0m
water column – (-800 mbar )
Siphonic Pipework:
All pipes and fittings will be manufactured predominantly from High Density
Polyethylene (HDPE), with pressure ratings of PN4(SDR33) or PN6.3 (SDR26).
The Pipe will also carry Watermark level 2 approvals and be manufactured in
accordance with AS 4130. Stainless Steel 304 and 316 pipes are also permitted,
however the usage of non - pressure UPVC pipe is not permitted.
All HDPE pipework and fitting joints, prepared during the fabrication phase, will be
butt fusion joints, utilising approved butt fusion welding equipment under factory
controlled conditions.
All site joints will be either butt fusion welds utilising approved butt fusion welding
equipment or Electro-fusion sleeves installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer`s instructions or Lyster welds done by accredited welders.
Pipe joining can be either butt weld or electro fusion installed strictly in accordance
with the Manufacturers instruction.
Siphonic Inlets:
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
92
Inlets supplied by the Siphonic contractor will be installed into the gutter by the
roofing contractor or the concrete decks by the builder.
All siphonic inlets for the collection and discharge of the surface water from the roof
will be Siphonic Roof Inlets incorporating leafguards when installed in box gutters or
load bearing trafficable grates when installed in carpark decks. Inlets will be square
in shape with a threaded connection at the base.
Siphonic inlet bodies are to be manufactured from either HDPE (High Density
Polyethylene) or 316 stainless steel and formed from a single sheet of material
inclusive of the inlet spigot. The inlet body is to include a fixing flange for connection
into box gutters or to the load-bearing grate and fixed generally in accordance with
AS2179.
Connection of the siphonic inlet to the pipework system will be with a male DIN
threaded HDPE coupling to the siphonic inlet female coupling or equivalent. Any
fixings that require holes to be made in the inlet body are not permitted.
Siphonic inlet baffles will be designed to restrict the entry of air to the system and will
be made of a durable material. The leafguard will be fitted to the gutter siphonic
inlets and will be designed to restrict the entry of debris into the system without
unduly restricting the flow. The leafguard will be made of a durable material.
All inlets are self-priming, avoiding any build up of water within the gutter or over the
slab.
Siphonic Support System:
The support system for the HDPE will generally be a rail and channel system
securely fixed to the main building structure. Pipes and fittings will be securely
suspended from the suspension rail by means of purpose made and fixed anchor
pipe clamps.
Pipe clamps will be fixed so as to restrict the effects of thermal expansion and
contraction of the pipework and any possible water hammer that may occur, extra
restraint shall be provided at all changes of direction in the main lines to prevent any
movement of the pipe.
Pipe clamps will be fitted at each side of branch connections and at no more than 10
times the pipe diameter on the collection mains. Vertical pipe work will be rigidly fixed
to the building structure with pipe clamps not more than ten times the pipe diameter.
The collecting mains and downpipes will be supported generally in accordance with
the intent of AS2180 and other relevant Australian Standards.
Siphonic Installation:
The whole of the installation will be installed only by fully trained and qualified
personnel employed directly by the Siphonic roof drainage contractor who complies
with a National EBA. All installers will be registered plumbers.
Siphonic Acoustic Treatment:
Install acoustic treatment to piping as and where shown on the drawings all in
accordance with the Acoustic Engineers requirements.
Siphonic Connection to Stormwater collection point:
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
93
The completed siphonic system shall be connected to stormwater according to
Hydraulic Engineers Documentation and installed by the Civil Contractor.
‘
3.5 Materials
The Tender shall provide and install the following roofing and walling materials or
equal approved equivalent:
a.
Metal Deck Profiles
Refer Finishes Schedule Appendix A
b.
Safety Mesh
Roofsafe/Roofguard. Galvanised to full extent of roofing, provide roof spacers
and/or a suitable and safe roofmesh system to allow for the installation of
insulation thickness as specified.
c.
Cappings/Flashings
Generally: 0.8 BMT Colorbond to suit the roofing material and
prevent galvanic corrosion on any part of the roof or rainwater goods.
Colour is to match adjacent roof sheeting.
d.
Gutters and Siphonic pipes
Siphonic Roof Drainage System’ (or similar approved alternative) Box gutters
maximum size 600W x 150D Grade 316, 0.8mm thick stainless steel / 1.6 BMT
where fully welded.
All box gutters to be equal in size. Provide Stainless steel gutter inlets and
debris guards to manufacturer’s design and recommendation.
Gutter Supports according to manufacturer’s recommendation. Allow for
continuous 18mm Marine plywood base as a minimum.
f.
Downpipes/Spreaders
Siphonic Roof Drainage System (or similar approved alternative) HDPE
pipework to manufacturer’s recommendation and design.
g.
Downpipe clips
Siphonic Roof Drainage System (or similar approved alternative) to include
hangers and unistrut continuous rail to manufacturer’s recommendation and
design
h.
Sumps
Siphonic Roof Drainage System (or similar approved alternative) to
manufacturer’s recommendation and design.
i.
Rainwater Heads
N/A. There shall be no Rainwater heads used on this project.
j.
Overflow, inlets and outlets
‘Siphonic Roof Drainage System (or similar approved alternative) SS overflow
inlets to manufacturer’s recommendation and design.
k.
Fixings
The roof sheets
recommendations.
shall
be
fixed
accordance
with
manufacturer’s
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
94
l.
Expansion joints to Roof and Gutters
Flat expansion joints shall be to manufacturer’s recommendations and design,
according to Australian Standards as described in this section.
3.6
Metal Roofing
a)
Insulation and Sarking
N/A
b)
Galvanised Safety Mesh
Lay galvanised mesh across purlins, stretched to 60mm sag. Fix to purlins as
per manufacturer's specifications. Allow for insulation thickness to be installed
as specified.
c)
Fixing
Lay decking in single lengths to each slope and fix in accordance with the
Manufacturer's manual. Exposed fixings must have colour matched EPDM
seals and approved by Superintendent. Fixings in marine and industrial
locations shall be Corrosion Resistance Class 4 (AS 3566).
Use starting/finishing strips at both sides of installation and button punch
interlocking ribs at centres specified by manufacturer. Provide tape at sheet
overlap – refer flashings below.
Form folded stop ends at tops of slopes and turn down ends of sheets into
gutters.
Cut and cap where roofing changes slope. Caps to be snug fit over roofing, do
not button punch.
Where the profile is to be laid to a pitch below the minimum recommended
pitch, the side laps must be continuously silicone sealed and side stitched to
manufacturer’s instructions.
Where there are no cross-falls, the laying sequence shall ensure that side laps
face away from the direction of prevailing weather.
3.7 Box Gutters
Form box gutters from 1.6 316 Stainless steel with minimum fall of 30mm. Width and
depth shall be as indicated on drawings. Provide 50 x 6 thick SS gutter straps
secured to structure at 600 centres maximum to suit falls. Fabricate to profiles
shown in Architectural and ‘Syfonic’ drawings. Provide 18mm waterproof ply
gutterboards for full width of gutters beneath all box gutters. Form over purlin and
masonry anchor to blockwork/ or bolt to steel frame / or secure to studwork. Refer
any discrepancies to Superintendent for clarification prior to fabrication.
3.8
Flashings to Roof
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
95
a)
Generally
Lap and secure all galvanized flashings. Make butt joints over a 75mm wide backing
strip of the same material. Flashing material shall be 0.6mm thick.
b)
Expansion Joints
Fold flashings back 40mm each side of joint leaving a 10mm gap. Interleave an
expansion cap of the same material with the folds and welt the whole to the profile of
the flashing. Set joint in mastic.
Provide expansion joints in all flashings at not greater than 6000mm.
c)
Base Flashings
Shall have horizontal cover of 150mm vertically. Where on metal deck turn up ends
of decking with watertight joints.
d)
Cover Flashing (Spandek)
Shall overlap the vertical upstand of the base flashing by 100mm minimum.
Cover flashings against brick and concrete walls shall be turned into sawcut
reglets 12mm minimum. Silicone seal flashing reglet. Wedge at 200mm
maximum centres with compatible materials.
e)
Flashings around pipes, Penetrations through roofs
The upstand around the pipe shall be covered by 'Dektite' seals of the appropriate
size as supplied by 'John Deks Pty Ltd' (or similar approved). Seals shall be installed
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Dektite soaker flashings (or similar
approved) to all penetrations. Ensure the compatibility of all seals and flashings with
roof materials.
3.9
Roof Access Walkway/Fall Arrest/Anchorage Points
Roof access comprises of roof access platforms, static fall arrest lines and anchor
points. The Contractor shall supply and install roof access platforms, static fall arrest
lines and anchor points as indicated on drawings and the specification in Appendix B.
Note: the products indicated in Appendix B are recommended only, alternatives
which conform with this specification may be approved by the Superintendent.
Extent of walkway system is indicated on drawings. All walkway systems shall
conform to AS1657-1992 and all relevant statutory Codes of Practice. Roof walkway
shall be supplied and installed complete with all components and fixings.
Contractor shall provide all connections, start/finish plates and L connections all as
necessary to complete the works.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
96
4
4.1
PAINTER
General
The work included in this section of the specification comprises the supply and
installation of all painting for the Works, together with all consequential and/or
incidental work which may be or become necessary though not specified or shown in
detail. The Contractor must supply and install all painting for the Works unless
specifically noted otherwise.
This section of the Specification must be read in conjunction with all other contract
documents.
Hold Points:
Do not commence work or proceed to the next stage of work before approval of the
required
Hold Points. Required Hold Points before commencing on-site include:
 Control Samples.
 Product Data.
Intermediate Hold Points include:
 First Completed Example.
 Field Testing (for adhesion and dry film thickness).
Conditions Precedent for Practical Completion include:
 O&M Manual.
 Warranties.
Other Hold points include:
 Verification of colour selections.
4.2
Standards
The Contractor must comply with all relevant Australian Standards and any current
and relevant Product Specification Sheets, Data Sheets and Material Safety Data
Sheets.
Relevant Standards:
Comply with the current edition of the relevant Standards.
AS/NZS
1580 Paints and related materials - Methods of test.
AS 1627
Metal finishing - Preparation and pretreatment of surfaces.
AS 2310
Glossary of paint and painting terms.
AS/NZS 2311 Guide to the painting of buildings.
AS 2700
Colour standards for general purposes.
AS 3730
Guide to the properties of paints for buildings.
Where Standards are nominated in the Product Data, the work shall comply with
such Standards. Submit copies of nominated Standards, if directed.
4.3
Materials and Labour
The work to be done under this Contract must include all labour and materials,
equipment and services, necessary for and incidental to, the painting of all work
throughout the building.
The Contractor must examine all other sections of the Specification, and must
thoroughly familiarise themselves with all their provisions regarding the painting and
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
97
understand which are left unfinished, by requirement of the other sections of the
Specification.
All materials shall be of the type specified and/or scheduled. They shall conform to
all current relevant standards issued by the Standards Association of Australia, and
shall be delivered to site in unopened cans or packets. No site tinting is permitted.
Paint materials shall be manufactured by Dulux Australia no other brands will be
permitted. The Contractor must furnish evidence of this requirement if requested by
the Superintendent.
The Contractor must obtain all relevant Material Safety Data Sheets showing the
health and safety precautions to be taken during application of Dulux products and is
responsible for implementing those precautions.
Manufacturer and batches:
All products in each coating system shall be from one manufacturer. Do not combine
products from different manufacturers. Products used in each installation area and
finish type shall be from the same production batch.
Grade of paint:
Where the manufacturer makes more than one grade of any coating product, use the
highest grade ('premium' grade), whether the product is indicated by name or not.
Do not use 'trade' grade products, including 'premium trade' grade products.
The use of 'trade' grade products in any part of the work may be grounds for
rejection, and may require repainting of the whole area or item, at the sole discretion
of the Superintendent.
Ultra-violet exposure:
Paint and coating products subject to direct and reflected sunlight, including internal
locations, shall be ultra-violet resistant types.
Back-balancing of surface finishes:
Seal the reverse sides of sheet products (back-balancing) with equivalent properties
to the front surface to minimise the risk of warping due to changes in moisture
content.
Doors:
All four edges of timber doors shall be painted, unless otherwise approved.
Coordinate with the DOORS & HARDWARE trade.
Compatibility with previous coatings:
Coating products shall be compatible with previous coatings or primers, if any, and
with the substrates.
Inspect previous coatings and substrates, and ensure that proposed coatings are
compatible. Verify compatibility before commencing.
Notify the Superintendent of any unusual conditions which may require a change to
the coating system or preparation procedures.
Number of coats:
Opaque coatings:For opaque coatings, provide not less than TWO separate coats in addition to primer
or undercoat.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
98
Substrate colours and surface variations shall not be visible through finished opaque
coatings. Provide additional coats if required, to ensure:
 Sealing of porous substrates.
 Required film thickness.
 Consistent surface texture.
 Satisfactory opacity.
Coating thickness:
Coating thickness shall be sufficient to eliminate visible texture in the substrate.
Do not use paints to fill substrate voids and honeycombing. Fill and otherwise
remove surface defects before application of paints and coatings.
Adhesion testing (Coatings):
After application:Carry out adhesion testing of applied coatings in accordance with the relevant
Standards.
AS/NZS 1580
Paints and related materials - Methods of test.
AS 1580.408.4
Adhesion cross-cut.
Frequency of testing shall be sufficient to ensure a representative record of
installation quality and conditions. As a minimum guide, carry out three tests per
installation condition or area.
Dry film thickness testing (Coatings):
After application:Carry out on-site dry film thickness (DFT) testing of applied coatings in accordance
with the relevant Standards.
AS/NZS 1580
Paints and related materials - Methods of test.
AS 3894
Site testing of protective coatings.
AS/NZS 3894.3
Determination of dry film thickness.
Frequency of testing shall be sufficient to ensure a representative record of
installation quality and conditions. As a minimum guide, carry out three tests per
installation condition or area.
Concrete pH testing:
Before installation:Carry out on-site pH testing of concrete and cementitious substrates before
commencing application of paint and coatings.
Do not apply paint and coatings where the pH > 10.
Carry out suitable procedures to lower the surface pH where required. Do not apply
acids or other compounds which may be harmful to concrete and cementitious
substrates.
Frequency of testing shall be sufficient to ensure a representative record of
installation quality and conditions. As a minimum guide, carry out three tests per
installation condition or area.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
99
4.4
Storage and Disposal
The Contractor must provide an area in which to prepare and store the paint
materials. The space must be kept neat and clean.
Place cloths, waste or other materials that might constitute a fire hazard in suitable
metal containers, remove or destroy at end of each day's work. Remove all waste
matter from the site in accordance with Authority Requirements. Dispose of all
unused construction chemicals in a correct, safe and legal manner.
Construction chemicals include site applied paints, solvents, paint strippers and the
like. Unused construction chemicals shall be stored separately and removed from the
site to a legal disposal location or returned to the original supplier using suitable
closed waste containers and vehicles.
Submit a detailed Methods Statement indicating the complete chain of supply and
disposal, including names and addresses of all original suppliers of chemicals and
receivers of waste. Include all relevant Materials Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Do not place unused construction chemicals in general waste disposal containers
unless approved in writing. Do not leave, conceal bury or otherwise dispose of
unused chemicals on site or adjacent to the site.
Any areas or locations where unused construction where chemicals are found, may
be remediated by third parties engaged by the Superintendent at the
Superintendent’s sole option. The Contractor shall pay for the cost of all such
remediation, including the costs of all consultants engaged to manage the
remediation, and including the additional costs of the Superintendent. Remediation
may include remediation required to any affected adjacent property.
4.5
Colours
It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure consistent colour coverage. Adequate
stocks of material should be delivered to site to complete a specified area at one
time. If more than one container of tinted colour is to be used, they shall be secured
to guard against possible colour variations. Where large areas are to be coated, premixed factory tinted material must be ordered well in advance of application
schedule.
External durability of colour will be assessed as per AS2700. Various colours may
not have warrantable external performance and therefore the colour schedule should
be referred to Dulux (by the Contractor) prior to application.
Colours shall be selected and shall be specially mixed or milled where necessary by
the manufacturer. (No extra will be allowed where colours have to be specially
milled).
Provide and keep on the job large colour chips of selected colours. Sample chips will
be used for purposes of comparison and colours which do not match the samples will
be rejected.
4.6
Execution of Work
Concrete, plaster and masonry substrates:
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
100
Fill indentations with suitable grout or filler and sand smooth. Seal generally or spot
seal to ensure that general and localised absorption rates are constant. Remove
concrete, grout or mortar splashes. Clean off and remove dust and loose particles.
Where porous substrates have dried, dampen if required to prevent excessive
absorption. Remove all traces of concrete curing compound residue. Do not apply
paint and coatings to cementitious substrates where the pH > 10.
Generally:
Prepare and clean substrates as required to ensure the correct adhesion, finish and
durability of the applied work in accordance with accepted industry practice, Product
Data and relevant Standards, as applicable, without damage to the substrates or
adjacent work. Substrates shall be sufficiently dry and clean, without dust or loose
material, previous coatings, oil or other substances harmful to the proper adhesion,
quality or durability of the applied work. Rectify non-complying substrates by suitable
procedures. Notify any unusual or doubtful substrate conditions to the
Superintendent. Coordinate and ensure that substrates by other trades are
completed before commencing applied work. Failure to do so may require
rectification or replacement of applied work.
Fill cracks, cavities and depressions, and remove projections and high-points.
Substrates for smooth coatings and finishes shall be sanded and sealed to ensure
uniformity of the applied work.
Moisture content:
Substrates shall have the required moisture content before installation of applied
work.
Carry out moisture testing before commencing to verify correct moisture content.
For non-complying substrates, carry out suitable natural or mechanical drying
procedures to accelerate drying or where correct substrate moisture levels cannot
otherwise be achieved provide suitable approved permanent moisture sealers or
barriers.
Submit details of proposed moisture sealers or barriers. Repeat moisture testing until
substrates comply.
PREPARATION OF TIMBER SUBSTRATES
Prepare timber substrates for applied coatings in accordance with the Product Data
and relevant Standards to ensure finished work matches Control Samples.
AS 2311
The painting of buildings.
Ensure uniform overall finished appearance.
Establish optimum procedures by practical trials before commencing and record
details. Submit Control Samples. Following approval, do not vary procedures for
remainder of the work.
Timber substrates:
Timber substrates to be finish coated shall be free of blemishes and defects. Fill
open grain, indentations, holes, surface imperfections, and joints, including joints
between veneer pieces, with durable, colour matched fillers compatible with coating.
Solvent clean any deposits of oil and grease. Fine sand timber substrates before
application. Sand smooth after primer or sealer coat and before each subsequent
coat. Ensure each coat is cured and hardened before sanding.
Remove all factory applied 'pre-priming' back to bare timber before priming or
undercoating. Filled areas, other than filling of open grain, shall be spot-primed and
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
101
sanded before application of undercoat. Knots, pitch streaks and sap spots shall be
spot sealed before application of primer. Sand back and seal branding marks.
Moisture content of timber shall be less than 15% before first coating application.
Paint both sides and all four edges of doors
Painting must not be commenced before the work of all trades has been substantially
completed and the area concerned thoroughly cleaned out. Clean conditions shall
be maintained during interior decoration. The Contractor must programme the works
to meet this requirement.
The Contractor must prepare and neatly maintain proper records, in accordance with
AS3894 of Application Conditions of Product Use, and upon completion of the
Contractor’s work or at such other time as may be directed by the Superintendent,
the Contractor shall hand over the files containing such records. These records must
include, but not be limited to the following:




Application conditions
Coating identifications
Application data
For products to protect steel, the Contractor shall record
–
abrasive glass cleaning procedure
–
profile/anchor pattern
–
wet film thickness
–
dry film thickness
Some procedures associated with the surface preparation and paint application are
hazardous. Care must be exercised and work carried out in accordance with the
appropriate Regulatory Authority legislation. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to
ensure that all occupational health and safety issues are addressed including eye
protection, respirators, noise, handling, welding, confined spaces and ventilation.
3.7
Protection/Unpainted Surfaces
The Contractor must provide protection by masking all surfaces adjacent to the area
being coated and removing this protection upon completion of the application. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any loss of damage which may be caused to
adjacent surfaces or property while the work is being carried out.
The Contractor must provide and lay adequate dust sheets and protect floors and
other surfaces, remove all surface hardware, switching plates, light fixtures and the
like, before painting and replace in condition as found. Coatings must not be applied
in the presence of dust.
The following surfaces shall NOT normally be painted except as specifically noted:
 Copper
 Internal non-ferrous piping
 Stainless Steel
3.8
Paint and Finishing Systems
Painting must be a minimum of 3 coats and sufficient to achieve opacity levels
(greater than 3 coats) to the satisfaction of the Superintendent and the Manufacturer.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
102
Generally:
Paints shall be complete approved coating systems to match Control Samples,
suitable for the substrates, intended function and conditions, in accordance with the
Product Data and relevant Standards. Submit Product Data and Control Samples.
Paints used on concrete, masonry or plaster surfaces shall be 'lime-proof'.
Number of coats:
Provide minimum two top-coats generally in addition to any required primer and
under-coats. Provide additional coats if required by Product Data or for appearance.
The number of coats shall be increased if required for consistent texture and opacity.
Verify scope and extent of work before commencing.
Tinting:
Tinting for each application area shall be prepared in one production batch where
practicable, thoroughly mixed to ensure even colour. Colour tinting shall be carried
out off-site with accurate equipment. Do not mix tints on-site, unless otherwise
approved.
Thinning:
Do not thin, dilute or adulterate proprietary paint products other than where required
by the Product Data and otherwise approved.
Where indicated as reduced colour percentage, required colour shall be achieved by
adjustment to tinting concentration.
Colour and gloss:
There shall be no colour variation within each application area. The Superintendent
may direct a change of gloss level before delivery of paint to site. Colours will be
advised before commencing.
TEXTURED COATINGS (ACRYLIC RENDER)
Textured coatings shall be approved proprietary pre-mixed acrylic products to match
Control Samples, suitable for the substrates, intended function and conditions, in
accordance with the Product Data and relevant Standards. AS/NZS 4548 Guide to
long life coatings for concrete and masonry.
Submit Product Data and Control Samples. Textured coatings to external surfaces
shall be water and mould resistant. Textured coatings shall be three-coat type with
primer coat, build coat and sealer coat, unless otherwise approved.
The Contractor shall note that primary and secondary steelwork must be delivered to
Site with protective coatings as defined elsewhere in this Specification.
Interior spaces and areas:
Unless otherwise indicated, paint systems and extent of work shall be as follows:
Generally: Walls - Plasterboard: Not applicable.
 Ceilings - Plasterboard: Not applicable.
Door-frames:
 Door-frames - Aluminium: Not applicable.
 Door-frames - Steel: Gloss acrylic - Primer and two coats.
 Door-frames - Timber: Gloss acrylic - Primer, undercoat and two coats.
Doors:
 Doors - Aluminium: Not applicable.
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
103
 Doors - Not applicable.
Exterior surfaces and fixtures:
Unless otherwise indicated, paint systems and extent of work shall be as follows:
Exterior concrete, masonry and cement rendered walls: Where indicated as painted - Low sheen acrylic - Sealer binder and two coats (UV
resistant).
 Where indicated as texture coated - Three coats of proprietary texture (UV
resistant).
Exterior door-frames:
 Door-frames - Aluminium: Not applicable.
 Door-frames - Steel: Gloss acrylic - Primer and two coats (UV resistant).
 Door-frames - Timber: Gloss acrylic - Primer, undercoat and two coats (UV
resistant).
Exterior doors:
 Doors - Aluminium: Not applicable.
 Doors - Timber flush panel: Gloss acrylic - Primer, undercoat and two coats (UV
resistant).
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
104
5. Specification Appendices A - G
Tender No: 1746
Title: Construction of the South Melbourne Market Roof over Market
PORT PHILLIP CITY COUNCIL – amended and reproduced under copyright Licence 1103-c062
105
City of Port Phillip South Melbourne Market Roof
10.10
APPENDIX
A
MATERIALS & PRODUCTS SCHEDULE
CONTENTS
05 Roofer
06 PAINTING (SITE APPLIED)
CONTACT NUMBERS
PRODUCT SELECTION
PMA
1 2 2 2 City of Port Phillip South Melbourne Market Roof
FOR CONSTRUCTION
Code
Legend
Indicative Location
SECTION 01300
MATERIALS & PRODUCTS SCHEDULE
Detail / Proprietary Description
Rev
Rev
BH - Balustrades and handrails
Code
Legend
Indicative Location
Detail / Proprietary Description
BH-01
Balustrades & Handrails
Ramp
* DESCRIPTION
* STANCHION (POST):
* Stanchion material: 60mm dia steel CHS 3.6mm
wall thickness
* Stanchion finish: Galvanised
* Stanchion other:
* BALUSTRADE (INFILL)
* Balustrade material: Chainwire 32mm diamond
pattern 3.35mm thick incl PVC
* Balustrade finish: PVC coated - colour TBA
* Balustrade other:
* HANDRAIL:
* Handrail material: 48.3mm dia steel CHS
2.3mm wall thickness
* Handrail finish: Galvanised
* Handrail other:
* OTHER:
* Fixings: Steel Bracket fixing to wall to comply
with AS1428.1
B
Bollards - Heavy duty
-Disabled car park bays.
-Surrounding DB as per
Electrical spec.
BOLLARDS - HEAVY DUTY
* Manufacturer: Impact Security Products Pty Ltd
* Product Ref: SS80B (surface mounted)/SS80R
(insitu)
* Description: Galvanised bollard, 900mm high
with base plate
* Finish: Galvanised
TAC
Tactile Indictors
Refer plans
TACTILE INDICATORS
* Manufacturer: TredRight
* Product Ref: TredRight PolyPad
* Description: Polypad Tactile indicator, R11
rating, Attachment to substrate is permanent with
TredRight quick dry epoxy adhesive. PolyPad is to be
installed according to TredRight specifications, or by
a TredRight accredited installer. To be installed and
comply with Australian Standards.
* Finish: Plastic, grey(to match existing)
*Size: To match existing.
05
Roofer
Code
Legend
Indicative Location
Detail / Proprietary Description
RF-01
Roof Cladding (Metal) –
Colour 1
Roof and walls
* Metal cladding
* Acceptable product: Lysaght
* Profile: Klip-Lok 700
* Finish / Coating: Colorbond
* Colour: Shale Grey
* Colorbond Grade: Standard
* Total Coat Thickness:
* Base Metal: 0.35mm.
RF-02
Roof Cladding
(Translucent) –
Colour 2
Roof and Walls
* Polycarbonate cladding
* Acceptable product: Ampelite Wonderglass
* Profile: Kliplok 700
* Finish / Coating: polycarbonate GC
* Colour: Opal
Indicative Location
Detail / Proprietary Description
Rev
GT - Gutters
Code
PMA
Legend
Rev
SMM roof 01300-Materials and Products Schedule – Page 1 of 4
City of Port Phillip South Melbourne Market Roof
FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 01300
MATERIALS & PRODUCTS SCHEDULE
Code
Legend
Indicative Location
Detail / Proprietary Description
BG-01
Gutters
General roof area
* Box gutters
* Material: sheet metal
* Finish: Colorbond
* Colour: Shale Grey
* Colorbond Grade: Standard
* Minimum size: 650 x 150mm
* Minimum thicknmess:0.80mm thick
* Other:
06
Rev
PAINTING (SITE APPLIED)
PA - Paint (Acrylic)
Code
Legend
Indicative Location
Detail / Proprietary Description
PA-01
Paint – Protective coating
All exposed Structural
steel (excluding purlins).
Generally: columns,
trusses, rafters, all steel
cleats
* Two part Acrylic Polysiloxane
* Acceptable product: Interfine 979 Polysiloxane
by International Protective Coatings
* Type: Acrylic
* Gloss level: Gloss
* Colour: TBA
* Other: Install paint and prepare surface
according to manufacturer’s recommendations
with Interzinc 52 primer (or similar manufacturer
approved)
Rev
PA-RD1
Paint – Road marking
Line markings and road
safety markings
* Thermo Paint.
All paint removal and linemarking to Vic Roads
Standards
CS-01
Shadowclad Coating
System
WC-02
EAST ELEVATION
*One coat Boscoat Prime all UV transparent
primer containing a fungicide.
*Top coat with Boscoat Cladcoat semi-transparent
acrylic system.
*Colour:TBA
* Other: Install system and prepare surface
according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
CONTACT NUMBERS
Company
International Protective Coatings
Telephone
03 8336 8444
Contact
Mobile
PRODUCT SELECTION
The naming of particular products in the Schedules indicates products of acceptable quality and
design intent which may be approved, but does not mean exclusive preference for such products.
Equivalent products may be used. Submit details of proposed products for approval by the
Superintendent before commencing
PMA
SMM roof 01300-Materials and Products Schedule – Page 2 of 4
City of Port Phillip South Melbourne Market Roof
FOR CONSTRUCTION
Code
Legend
Indicative Location
SECTION 01300
MATERIALS & PRODUCTS SCHEDULE
Detail / Proprietary Description
Rev
DOCUMENT STATUS
Date
Issued
Issue
No
Issued for
28-10-2011
B
Tender
6-12-11
C
Tender revision
Changes in RED
MB
MB
19-12-11
D
Tender Revision
Additions in Red
MT
PS
PMA
Comments
Issued by
PS
Approved By
PS
SMM roof 01300-Materials and Products Schedule – Page 3 of 4
Date 29th July 2011.
PROPOSAL NO. 7480
Mr Michael Bouteloup
Paul Morgan Architects
Level 10, 221 Queen Street
MELBOURNE VIC. 3000.
TEL NO: 9605 4100
FAX NO: 9602 5673
EMAIL:
[email protected]
Good Afternoon Michael
Indicative Cost Allowance For Supply and Installation Of Roof Access System At
SOUTH MELBOURNE MARKET
YORK STREET, SOUTH MELBOURNE
We thank you for the opportunity to submit this indicative project costing to you.
Along with yourselves, we are committed to improving safety, specialising in permanent
access and fall protection systems for workmen working at heights. Sayfa Systems design,
manufacture and distribute quality compliant and user friendly systems, installed by accredited
installation specialists with whom we will assist in making contact with yourselves.
Based on our assessment of your project, we are pleased to provide you with our suggested
solution in accordance with the OH&S regulations and standard industry practice.
Please refer to the scope of works and your system layout plan showing our recommended
positioning of your system/componentry.
We are keen to provide the Sayfa system on this project and will ensure complete product
assistance and after sales service to you and your nominated system installer at any stage of
your project. Should you want to discuss any alternatives, we would be more than happy to
do so.
Yours sincerely,
MICHAEL SOTH
Estimator
SOUTH MELBOURNE MARKET
PROPOSAL NO: 7480
3
SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA
System Design
Date
29/07/11
Stage

Planning
Specification
Project Co-ordinator
Paul Morgan Architect
Written
Drawn


By
Sayfa Systems
Based on:




Standard industry practice based on Drawing No: CD.A220 Rev. B
Documented system layout as shown on Drawing No: Rev.
Defined specification by building designer based on Drawing No: Rev.
To be confirmed with System Designer
Compliant with relevant Australian Standards
 YES
 NO – see details below
Roof Access
Roof access required via:










Existing roof access in place
Existing roof access in place but needs upgrading
Ladder Support Bracket for use with portable ladders
Fixed cage protected access ladder(s)
Fixed fall arrest line access ladder(s)
Fixed mini access ladder(s)
Fixed access ladder leading to roof hatch. Note: Roof access hatch by others.
Fold down ladder with internal ceiling access and roof hatch. Note: Roof access hatch by others.
To be confirmed with System Designer
Other
Fall Protection
Roof fall protection provided to cover:







All fall edges in excess of 2.0M high
Unprotected gutter edges only
Roof mounted plant/equipment
Skylights
Gutter and general roof maintenance access
To be confirmed with System Designer
Other
Using the following componentry:







Guardrail
Fibre Walkway
Aluminium Walkway
Anchorage points
Static lines
Flat skylight protectors
Raised skylight protectors
SOUTH MELBOURNE MARKET
PROPOSAL NO: 7480
4
PROJECT NOTES
GENERAL NOTES:

All prices exclude GST.

This is an indicative design layout only and will need to be confirmed at time of order by the
nominated system installer.

Prices(s) are subject to a site inspection by the nominated system installer at time of
installation.

Any changes to be made to the original indicative design may result in a variation to this
indicative costing allowance.

System layouts have been based on architectural roof plans which do not always show
proposed hydraulic and mechanical layouts. The system layout and componentry selection
may need to be altered which may result in a variation to this proposal.

Based on current regulations, Sayfa Systems recommends fall protection to all fall edges
exceeding 2.0M in height.

Worksafe classifies skylights as fall hazards, therefore the investment of skylight protectors is
strongly recommended by Sayfa Systems.

On completion of the system installation, a user manual will be provided for your
information and ongoing system usage.
PROPOSAL VALIDITY:
INSTALLATION LEAD TIME:
PAYMENT TERMS:
90 days
To be confirmed with nominated system installer.
To be confirmed with nominated system installer.
ACCESS THE SAYFA WAY
DATE: 29/07/2011
ROOF ACCESS & FALL PROTECTION SPECIFICATION
Project Name:
System Design Ref. No:
Design Co-Ordinator:
Tel No:
Email:
South Melbourne Market
7480
Michael Soth
03 8727 9000
[email protected]
GENERAL NOTES
Supply and install proprietary Roof Access, Fall Protection (and Abseil Systems), in accordance with
Sayfa Systems installation guidelines (System Design Ref. No. 7480).
Exact component locations, support structure integrity, suitability and fixing method to be assessed and
determined by a competent person prior to commencement of system installation.
SCHEDULE OF COMPONENTS
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Sayfa AP130.10
Sayfa SL200
Sayfa SL200
Sayfa SL200
Sayfa SL1.096
Sayfa SL1.136
Sayfa SL200
Sayfa SL227
Sayfa LD1.135
Sayfa LD402
Sayfa SD975
3SIXTY Top Mount Fall Arrest Anchor Points
27.0M TRAVEL8 Top Mount Static Line System (2 extra Intermediates)
32.0M TRAVEL8 Top Mount Static Line System (3 extra Intermediates)
65.0M TRAVEL8 Top Mount Static Line System (2 extra Intermediates)
90.0M TRAVEL8 Top Mount Static Line System
132.0M TRAVEL8 Top Mount Static Line System
TRAVEL8 Top Mount Static Line System >90◦ Corner
PILOT Horizontal Static Line Shuttle
1.0M KATT Mini Access Ladder with Angled Handrails
KATT Ladder Support Bracket
SPEKTRA System Information Signboard
Recommended Accessories
2
1
x
x
Sayfa HR040
Sayfa HR048
EDGE Std Harness Kits
EDGE Lockable Harness Equipment Cabinet
DATE: 29/07/2011
2
SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA
System Design
Date
29/07/11
Stage

Planning
Specification
Project Co-ordinator
Paul Morgan Architect
Written
Drawn


By
Sayfa Systems
Based on:




Standard industry practice based on Drawing No: CD.A220 Rev. B
Documented system layout as shown on Drawing No: Rev.
Defined specification by building designer based on Drawing No: Rev.
To be confirmed with System Designer
Compliant with relevant Australian Standards
 YES
 NO – see details below
Roof Access
Roof access required via:










Existing roof access in place
Existing roof access in place but needs upgrading
Ladder Support Bracket for use with portable ladders
Fixed cage protected access ladder(s)
Fixed fall arrest line access ladder(s)
Fixed mini access ladder(s)
Fixed access ladder leading to roof hatch. Note: Roof access hatch by others.
Fold down ladder with internal ceiling access and roof hatch
To be confirmed with System Designer
Other
Fall Protection
Roof fall protection provided to cover:







All fall edges in excess of 2.0M high
Unprotected gutter edges only
Roof mounted plant/equipment
Skylights
Gutter and general roof maintenance access
To be confirmed with System Designer
Other
Using the following componentry:







Guardrail
Fibre Walkway
Aluminium Walkway
Anchorage points
Static lines
Flat skylight protectors
Raised skylight protectors
3
DATE: 29/07/2011
STANDARDS
Supply and installation of proprietary Access and Fall Protection System to comply generally in
accordance with the following:
AS/NZS1891.1:2009 Industrial fall arrest systems and devices/harnesses and ancillary equipment
AS/NZS1891.2:2001 Industrial fall arrest systems and devices/horizontal lifeline & rail systems
AS/NZS1891.3:1997 Industrial fall arrest systems and devices/fall arrest devices
AS/NZS1891.4:2009 Industrial fall arrest systems and devices/selection, use and maintenance
AS1657:1992
Fixed platforms, walkways, stairways and ladders/design, construction,
installation
INSTALLATION
Installation of Roof Access, Fall Protection and Abseil Systems must be carried out by an Accredited
Sayfa Installer compliant with relevant Australian Standards and WorkCover Codes of
Practice/Guidelines and OH & S Legislation. The Accredited Sayfa Installer must have current Sayfa
Accreditation Certificate and the relevant insurance protection.
Note: Any changes made to the original system design must be authorised by Sayfa Systems –
Design Department prior to commencement of the system installation.
CERTIFICATION
On completion of installation, certification must be carried out by an Accredited Sayfa Installer in
accordance with Sayfa's installation guidelines.
A Handover Manual must be provided on completion of installation including:
Product Specifications
System Layout Plan – showing positioning of all Roof Access / Fall Protection equipment installed
Certificate – stating installed system is safe to be used
Detailed description of safe operation of the installed system
Annual Recertification Schedule
Product Warranties
Working at Heights Management Template
-
MAINTENANCE
All Fall Arrest Systems and equipment require periodical maintenance by competent personnel in
accordance with Sayfa's specifications and requirements of Australian Standard AS/NZS1891.4:2009
[Section 9].
MANUFACTURED & DISTRIBUTED BY:
Sayfa Systems
T/1300 301 755
F/1300 881 092
E/[email protected]
W/www.sayfa.com.au
INDICATIVE LAYOUT ONLY
(To be finalised with S.O.W. Confirmation)
7480
Date:29/07/2011
Prop:
car park not to be
occupied
preferred
site
loading
public access
required (vehicles)
on all market open
days.
Contractor site.
Note: mainTain 150
carbays for public
access
(incl.3x access
bays) on all
market opening
days (refer
preliminaries) as a
minimum
13 bays
Available for
contractor use;
maintain public &
market access to
car park on all
market open days.
public
access
maintain all
traffic flow on
surrounding
streets on all
market open days
public access required (vehicles
on all market open days
maintain market staff & supplier
access on all market open days
appendix pursuant to clause 24 site: contractor’s site extents.
SUMMARY .................................................................... i
1
INTRODUCTION ....................................................... 1
2
METHODOLOGY........................................................ 2
3
ASBESTOS REGISTERS .............................................. 3
4
RISK ASSESSMENT / RECOMMENDATIONS ..................... 4
5
REFERENCES .......................................................... 6
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
I – Building List
II – Certificates of Analysis
III – Photographs
IV – Asbestos Registers
C l ien t: C i t y o f P o r t P h i l l i p
J ob No : J 0 8 7 1
P er fo rme d B y : A a r o n Z a n u s s i , O c c u p a t i o n a l H y g i e n i s t
CITY OF PORT PHILLIP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ASBESTOS AUDIT REVIEW
December 2010
Re v ie wed B y : A n d r e w S t e w a r t , S e n i o r O c c u p a t i o n a l H y g i e n i s t
N:\Clients\CityofPortPhillip\J0871 - Asbestos Audits 2010\Audit Report\City of Port Phillip D5 Audit Report.doc
Jeremy Trotman + Associates Pty Ltd
139 Ormond Rd Elwood VIC 3184
Ph (03) 9531 0588 Fax (03) 9525 6155
Email [email protected] Web www.jta.net.au
ABN 78 007 071 383
+ OHS Risk Assessments
+ Noise Equipment Sales
+ OHS Policy Manuals
+ Confined Spaces
+ Plant Safety
+ Noise Equipment Calibration
+ On-Site Health Checks
+ Dangerous Goods
+ Indoor Air Quality
+ Ergonomics
+ OHS Compliance Audits
+ Noise Equipment Hire
+ OHS Procedures
+ Manual Handling
+ OHS Training
+ Asbestos Risk Assessments
+ On-Site Audiometric Testing
+ OHS Management Systems
+ Hazardous Substances
+ Noise Assessments
Division 5 Asbestos Audit Review
City of Port Phillip
SUMMARY
During August 2010 – November 2010, JTA Risk Management performed an Asbestos Audit Review
of nominated City of Port Phillip buildings.
The Asbestos Audit Review has been performed in accordance with the requirements of Part 4.3,
Division 5 of the Victorian Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 2007.
This Asbestos Audit incorporated:
•
A site inspection to confirm, as far as practicable, the location and condition of asbestos
containing materials identified in the existing asbestos registers previously compiled by JTA
Risk Management.
•
A site inspection and the identification, as far as practicable, of the location and type of
asbestos containing materials within buildings with no existing asbestos registers.
•
An assessment of the friability and condition of identified asbestos containing materials.
•
Labelling of selected asbestos containing materials.
•
Compilation of Asbestos Registers.
•
Provision of information to assist in complying with the relevant requirements of Part 4.3 of the
Victorian Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 2007.
An Asbestos Register for each building has been prepared and are included as Appendix IV of the
Asbestos Audit Review report.
All identified or suspected asbestos containing materials were found to be in reasonable condition
and are not considered to represent an asbestos exposure risk to building occupants while not
subject to physical disturbance. Accordingly, removal, enclosure or sealing is not currently
required, provided that the materials are left undisturbed and maintained in their current condition.
While no current asbestos exposure risk was identified, to minimise any future potential asbestos
exposure risk as far as is practicable, removal of the following asbestos materials is recommended:
•
•
•
•
Building Asset ID LIB238 – Emerald Hill Library, 195-207 Bank St, South Melbourne Meterboard cabinet – Millboard lining debris.
Building Asset ID S&R162 – Elwood Angling Club, 3 Elwood Foreshore, Elwood - Disused
asbestos cement gutters stored above toilet/showers.
Building Asset ID S&R383 – Port Melbourne Football Club – Main Scoreboard, 525 Williamstown
Road, Port Melbourne - South side ground asbestos cement debris.
Building Asset ID OPS502 – South Melbourne Town Hall, 208 Bank Street, South Melbourne Disused asbestos cement flue - west side of ceiling space & asbestos cement debris - ceiling
space near roof access door.
Refer to Appendix III for photos of the above materials.
Additional information and recommendations to assist in complying with the relevant requirements
of Part 4.3 of the Victorian Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 2007 are included in the
report.
i
Division 5 Asbestos Audit Review
City of Port Phillip
1
INTRODUCTION
During August 2010 – November 2010, JTA Risk Management performed an Asbestos Audit Review
of nominated City of Port Phillip buildings. The audit review was commissioned by Jim McClean of
the City of Port Phillip.
The Asbestos Audit Review has been performed in accordance with the requirements of Part 4.3,
Division 5 of the Victorian Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 2007.
This Asbestos Audit Review incorporated:
•
A site inspection to confirm, as far as practicable, the location and condition of asbestos
containing materials identified in the existing asbestos registers previously compiled by JTA
Risk Management.
•
A site inspection and the identification, as far as practicable, of the location and type of
asbestos containing materials within buildings with no existing asbestos registers.
•
An assessment of the friability and condition of identified asbestos containing materials.
•
Labelling of selected asbestos containing materials.
•
Compilation of Asbestos Registers.
•
Provision of information to assist in complying with the relevant requirements of Part 4.3 of the
Victorian Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 2007.
A list of all buildings included in the Asbestos Audit, sorted by building asset ID, is presented in
Appendix I.
Disclaimer: JTA Risk Management has prepared this report exclusively for the use of the named
client. JTA believe that the information in this report is correct, and that any opinions, conclusions
or recommendations are reasonably held or made at the time of writing. However, JTA do not
warrant their accuracy, and disclaim all responsibility for any loss or damage which may be
suffered by any person, directly or indirectly from the use of this report. This report shall be read
in its entirety and shall only be reproduced in full.
Page 1
Division 5 Asbestos Audit Review
City of Port Phillip
2
METHODOLOGY
The site inspection involved a visual inspection of accessible areas, rooms and surfaces throughout
the building(s). The site inspection was restricted to areas / materials that:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
were accessible without contravention of relevant legislation or Codes of Practice.
were accessible without significant demolition of finishes or structures.
did not pose a safety risk from operational plant or electrocution.
were readily accessible via a ladder and/or did not pose a height safety risk.
did not require dismantling of equipment.
were not disruptive to the normal operations of the building.
were considered practicable to assess.
Direct visual inspections were conducted where practicable.
Inspection for materials in cavities, hidden under or behind other surfaces or coverings was only
carried out where there was a significant probability of asbestos containing materials being
present, and where the inspection could be conducted safety and without significant visible
damage.
This Asbestos Audit Review did not include the identification of other hazardous building materials
or dangerous goods / hazardous substances used, stored or manufactured within the buildings.
The presence and extent of asbestos materials has been determined from a combination of
representative sampling and inspection, and professional judgement based on the materials age
and appearance. Materials of similar appearance and nature have been assumed to have a similar
asbestos content.
Where required, analysis of materials suspected of containing asbestos was carried out by an
independent NATA accredited laboratory. Certificates of analysis of samples are presented in
Appendix II. Samples referred to from previous reports were collected and sent off for analysis by
JTA Risk Management during previous audits.
During the site inspections, asbestos warning labels were fixed, where practicable, to the following
asbestos containing materials:
•
•
•
•
friable materials
electrical switchboards
fire doors
redundant materials
Where previous labelling had been removed or dislodged, new labels were fixed.
Page 2
Division 5 Asbestos Audit Review
City of Port Phillip
3
ASBESTOS REGISTERS
An Asbestos Register for each building has been prepared and are included as Appendix IV of this
report.
The type and location of individual asbestos materials and audit date is provided in the Asbestos
Register.
When asbestos materials have been found to be in poor condition, their condition has been noted
within the asbestos register. When found in good condition, not requiring any remedial attention,
the condition of the asbestos material has not been commented on in the asbestos register.
Friable asbestos materials have been noted within the register.
containing materials are non friable.
Where not noted, asbestos
Photographs of selected asbestos containing materials considered to require attention to minimise
any future potential asbestos exposure risk as far as is practicable are presented as photos in
Appendix III.
Page 3
Division 5 Asbestos Audit Review
City of Port Phillip
4
RISK ASSESSMENT / RECOMMENDATIONS
The following information and recommendations are provided to assist in minimising risks
associated with the identified or suspected asbestos containing materials, and in complying with
relevant requirements of Part 4.3 of the Victorian Occupational Health and Safety Regulations
2007. Information regarding all regulatory requirements are not included, and it is recommended
that the person who manages or controls the workplace is familiar with the relevant sections of the
Regulations to ensure that they are fully aware of their obligations.
4.1
Risk Assessment & Control
For the purpose of this report, Asbestos Exposure Risk has been defined as the "likelihood of
exposure to airborne asbestos fibre exceeding one half of the exposure standard of 0.1 fibres/ml".
In assessing the asbestos exposure risk associated with the identified or suspected asbestos
containing materials, the following factors have been considered:
•
•
•
•
•
location.
friability.
condition.
potential for future disturbance.
asbestos content.
The identified or suspected asbestos containing materials were found to be in reasonable condition
and are not considered to represent an asbestos exposure risk to building occupants while not
subject to physical disturbance. Accordingly, removal, enclosure or sealing is not currently
required, provided that the materials are left undisturbed and maintained in their current condition.
While no current asbestos exposure risk was identified, to minimise any future potential asbestos
exposure risk as far as is practicable, removal of the following asbestos materials is recommended:
•
•
•
•
Building Asset ID LIB238 – Emerald Hill Library, 195-207 Bank St, South Melbourne Meterboard cabinet – Millboard lining debris.
Building Asset ID S&R162 – Elwood Angling Club, 3 Elwood Foreshore, Elwood - Disused
asbestos cement gutters stored above toilet/showers.
Building Asset ID S&R383 – Port Melbourne Football Club – Main Scoreboard, 525 Williamstown
Road, Port Melbourne - South side ground asbestos cement debris.
Building Asset ID OPS502 – South Melbourne Town Hall, 208 Bank Street, South Melbourne Disused asbestos cement flue - west side of ceiling space & asbestos cement debris - ceiling
space near roof access door.
Refer to Appendix III for photos of the above materials.
4.2
Inaccessible Areas
While every practicable effort has been made to identify all asbestos containing materials,
additional materials may be present in areas that were inaccessible during the site inspection.
Such areas may include, but are not limited to: ceiling spaces, underfloor areas, enclosed wall
cavities, under floor coverings, inside plant and equipment.
Inaccessible areas that are considered likely to contain asbestos containing materials have been
highlighted in the Asbestos Register.
Other inaccessible areas may also contain asbestos
containing materials.
A further assessment of currently inaccessible areas should be performed if such areas are likely to
be accessed or affected by any future works.
Page 4
City Port Phillip - Asset Strategic Plans
Building
Asset ID
ADDRESS
SUBURB
DESCRIPTION
APPROX AREA
AGE
2300
1880
Aged Facilities
AGE304
179-197 Napier Street
South
Melbourne
Napier Street Hostel
Art Facilities
ART001
26 Acland Street
St Kilda
Linden Art Gallery
882
1880
ART220
11 Shakespeare Grove
St Kilda
St Kilda Bowling Club Artists Studio, - Formerly:
City Of St Kilda Bowling Club / St Kilda Community
Garden Pavillion
648
1988
ART289
1-35 Graham Street
Albert Park
Gasworks -Bldg 1 Sculpture Studio
312
1940
ART290
1-35 Graham Street
Albert Park
Gasworks -Bldg 2 Arts & Crafts
105
1940
ART291
1-35 Graham Street
Albert Park
Gasworks -Bldg 3 Ceramics Studio
110
1940
ART292
1-35 Graham Street
Albert Park
Gasworks -Bldg 4 Textile Studios *3
250
1940
ART293
1-35 Graham Street
Albert Park
Gasworks -Bldg 5 Gatehouse Building
205
1940
ART294
1-35 Graham Street
Albert Park
Gasworks -Bldg 6 Anthill Office/ café
336
1940
ART295
1-35 Graham Street
Albert Park
Gasworks -Bldg 7 Theatre Hall & New Area
383
1940
ART296
1-35 Graham Street
Albert Park
Gasworks -Bldg 9 Office
98
1940/2004
ART297
1-35 Graham Street
Albert Park
Gasworks -Bldg 11 Red Brick
223
1940
ART298
147 Liardet Street
Port
Melbourne
Regional Aars Dep't(Old Port Melb Library)- Gas
Works bldg 10 dark room (above Coles)
24
1940
ART541
1-35 Graham Street
Albert Park
Gasworks -Public Toilet
44
1940
506
1986
Children's Services
CHS008
71-79 Argyle Street
St Kilda
North St Kilda Child Care Centre
CHS105
51 Broadway
Elwood
Elwood Maternal & Child Health Centre (formerly:
Burnett Gray Child Welfare Centre)
CHS160
17 Eildon Road
St Kilda
Eildon Road Children's Centre (Formerly: West St
Kilda Child Care Centre)
423
1925
CHS219
31B Scott Street
Elwood
Scott Street Child Care Centre
242
1930
CHS222
46 Tennyson Street
Elwood
Elwood Children's Centre
325
1920
CHS224
39 The Avenue
Balaclava
The Avenue Child Care Centre
270
1880/1990
CHS234
8 York Street
St Kilda
195
1970
CHS257
5-11 Carter Street
Albert Park
317
1985/1993
CHS280
18 Dundas Place
Albert Park
Albert Park Preschool Centre, Albert Park Dental
Clinic, & Albert Park Maternal & Child Health Centre
see comments
1940
CHS283
97 Eastern Road
South
Melbourne
Lillian Cannam Kindergarten
345.4
1929
CHS330
106 Clark Street
Port
Melbourne
Clark Street Child Care Centre
500
1970
CHS331
7 Cumberland Road
Port
Melbourne
Ada Mary A'Bechett Children's Centre & Garden City
Maternal &Child Health Centre
615.6
1970
CHS510
171 Chapel Street
St Kilda
St Kilda Children's Centre & Maternal &Child Health
Centre
839
1971
York Street Kindergarten and Occasional Care
(Formerly: West St Kilda Kindergarten & West St
Kilda Maternal &Child Health Centre )
South Melbourne Child Care Cooperative formerly:
Carter Street Neighbourhood House (No Longer
Managed by Council)
1952
Howell Facilities Pty Ltd - 9/12/2010
City Port Phillip - Asset Strategic Plans
Building
Asset ID
ADDRESS
SUBURB
DESCRIPTION
CHS511
400 Clarendon Street
South
Melbourne
Chiropractic Clinic (note this is Crown land - the
Clinic section is under 15 year lease that expires
1/12/06
CHS511
404-412 Clarendon Street
South
Melbourne
Clarendon Street Children's Centre Cooperative
APPROX AREA
AGE
567.38
1920
567.38
1920
Commercial Facilities
CML168
15 Elwood Foreshore
Elwood
Food Preparation Building
48
1971/1994
CML179
6 Jacka Boulevard
St Kilda
Kiosk
53
1989
CML182
26 Jacka Boulevard
St Kilda
Kiosk
22
1987
CML183
30 Jacka Boulevard
St Kilda
Stokehouse Restaurant
926
1930/1995
CML195
42-54A Marine Pde
St Kilda
St Kilda Marina - Workshop
237
1969
CML208
29A Ormond Esplanade
Elwood
Elwood Kiosk
17
1950
CML254
175B Beaconsfield Parade, Opp
Mills Street
Middle Park
Sand Bar & Change Rooms
244
1982
CML254
Beaconsfield Pde (at Le Kiosk)
South
Melbourne
Brick & Painted Rendered Brick
CML256
129 Beaconsfield Parade
Albert Park
Kerferds Restaurant (exterior)
130
1940/1990
CML348
174 Nott Street
Port
Melbourne
Liquor Store
367
1940 1930
CML384393
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:22 Glass
House & Seeding Shed
105
1940
CML384393
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:23 Glass
House & Seeding Shed
45
1940
CML384393
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:25 Potting
Shed
90
1940
CML384393
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:27 Turf Shed
21
1940
CML384393
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:29 Garden
Shed
50
1940
CML384393
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:31 Shade
House
320
1940
CML518
42 Jacka Boulevard-Donovans
Restaurant
St Kilda
Bathing Pavillion & WC (Concrete panels & rendered
concrete, painted)
102
1928/1995
CML518
38-40 Jacka Boulevard
St Kilda
Donovan's Restaurant
543
1928/1995
Balaclava
Alma Park - Storage Block/Toilet
31
1950
Demolished 150-200 Dandenong Road
1982
Demolished
225A-B Beaconsfield Parade,
Opp Armstrong Street
Middle Park
Middle Park Life Saving Clubrooms
208
1980
Demolished
225A-B Beaconsfield Parade,
Opp Armstrong Street
Middle Park
Kiosk WC's & Change Rooms
268
1980
Demolished
White Reserve, The Boulevard - Port
Port Melbourne
Melbourne
Smooth besser bricks, unpainted
1970
Demolished
225A-B Beaconsfield Parade,
Opp Armstrong Street
South
Melbourne
Middle Park Life Saving -Bluestone Toilet
1980
Demolished 70 White Street
South
Melbourne
DJ's Dinner(Shop)
Demolished 56-78 White Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Transfer Station- Glasshouse
Demolished 8 Jacka Boulevard
St Kilda
Pier Entry Shed / St Kilda Pier Entry- Shelter
87
1950
2
1930
91
1987
Howell Facilities Pty Ltd - 9/12/2010
City Port Phillip - Asset Strategic Plans
Building
Asset ID
ADDRESS
SUBURB
DESCRIPTION
APPROX AREA
AGE
528
1962
Demolished 331A Beaconsfield Parade
St Kilda
Surf Life Saving Victoria
Demolished 20 Jacka Boulevard
St Kilda
Kiosk
31
1987
Demolished 36 Jacka Boulevard
St Kilda
Kiosk
72
1928/1995
230
1930
see comments
1986
Community Centres
Alma Road Community House & Maternal & Child
Health Centre (House - Brick Multifronted) also the
public toilet at this address to be done.
Betty Day Centre(Senior Citizens Club) - (Regional
Meals Kitchen-This is the office location of the
Council Meals Service-entrance is via Bath Street)
CCE005
200 Alma Rd
St Kilda
CCE006
67-69 Argyle Street
St Kilda
CCE092
38-40 Blessington Street
St Kilda
Cora Graves Centre
312
1890 -1904
CCE093
55A Blessington Street
St Kilda
Port Phillip Eco Centre
112
1967
CCE159
5-7 Duke Street
St Kilda
St Kilda Youth Services(SKYS) -Formerly: Theo's
Youth Centre
158
1915
CCE279
224 Danks Street
Albert Park
Mary Kehoe Centre
417
1880
CCE284
14A Ferrars Place
South
Melbourne
RSL Hall
472
1924
CCE299
1-5 Howe Crescent
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Elderly Citizens Club
512.6
1948
CCE301
180-204 Montague Street
South
Melbourne
Sol Green Community Centre
317
1970
CCE305
62-74 Pickles Street
South
Melbourne
Conservation Volunteers (Formerly Pickles Street
School)
800
1890
CCE307
254-256 Richardson Street
Albert Park
Middle Park Community Hall, Middle Park Library,
Middle Park Kindergarten, & Middle Park Maternal
&Child Health Centre
see comments
1970
CCE329
10 Centre Avenue
Port
Melbourne
Fisherman's Bend Community Centre
371.6
1940
CCE333
219 Esplanade East
Port
Melbourne
Port Melbourne Centre & Trugo Club In Edwards
Park
103
1930
CCE338
81 Liardet Street
Port
Melbourne
Port Phillip Community Centre / Southport (Used by
a range of groups)
1940
CCE339
85 Liardet Street
Port
Melbourne
COMMUNITY OFFICE
1940
CCE347
154 Liardet Street
Port
Melbourne
Liardet Community Centre & Dwelling (Currently
under renovation 2003 - 2004)
535
1964/2004
CCE359
1 Tucker Avenue
Port
Melbourne
Garden City Reserve - Sandridge Centre & Trugo
Club - Wood Shed
121
1940
CCE519
63B Ormond Esplanade
Elwood
Elwood Foreshore Community Centre
215
1994
CCE521
87 Tennyson St, Elwood
Elwood
Timber weatherboard, painted
CCE521
85-87 Tennyson Street
Elwood
Elwood St Kilda Neighbourhood Learning Centre
1860
291
1860
13
1930
425
1930
2465
1930
Council Operational
OPS311&OP
56-78 White Street
S530
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Transfer Station- Control Office
OPS313&OP
56-78 White Street
S531
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Transfer Station- Transfer Station
OPS314
69-81 White Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Depot- Workshop
OPS315 &
OPS514
69-81 White Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Depot- Indoor Store
539
1930
OPS316
69-81 White Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Depot- Open Shed
346
1930
Howell Facilities Pty Ltd - 9/12/2010
City Port Phillip - Asset Strategic Plans
Building
Asset ID
ADDRESS
SUBURB
DESCRIPTION
APPROX AREA
AGE
OPS317
69-81 White Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Depot - Canopy
631
1930
OPS318
69-81 White Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Depot- Office
649
1980
OPS321
333 Bay Street
Port
Melbourne
Port Melbourne Library, Townhall, Clock Tower,
MCHC, & WC
2021
1880/2003
OPS390394 & CML
384-393 &
523 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Works Depot & Skinks - Indigenous Nursery
1200
1940
OPS500
99A Carlisle Street
St Kilda
St Kilda Town Hall- (Town Hall)
756
1880
OPS500
99A Carlisle Street
St Kilda
St Kilda Town Hall- Existing Building
3904
1880
OPS500
99A Carlisle Street
St Kilda
St Kilda Town Hall- Storage Basement
1190
1880
OPS501
200-202 Bank Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - Ground Floor
497
1875
OPS501
200-202 Bank Street
South
Melbourne
Office - 1st Floor
497
1875
OPS502
208-220 Bank Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Town Hall- Office
3054
1875
OPS502
208-220 Bank Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Town Hall-Main Hall
771
1875
OPS502
208-220 Bank Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Town Hall- Gallery
98
1875
OPS502
208-220 Bank Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Town Hall- Supper Room
303
1875
OPS502
208-220 Bank Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Town Hall-- Engineers
268
1875
OPS502
208-220 Bank Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Town Hall- Other
524
1875
OPS506
147 Liardet Street
Port
Melbourne
Old Port Melbourne Library
930
1940
2314
1973
418
1857
Libraries
LIB148
150 Carlisle Street
St Kilda
St Kilda Library
LIB238
195-207 Bank Street
South
Melbourne
Emerald Hill Library / Save Albert Park (Office)
Markets
MKT505
1/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
MKT505
116-136 Cecil Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Market- Part A
8026
1960
MKT505
116-136 Cecil Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Market- Part B
1495
1960
MKT505
116-136 Cecil Street
South
Melbourne
South Melbourne Market- Part C
1500
1960
MKT505
2/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
MKT505
3/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
MKT505
4-5/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
MKT505
10/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
MKT505
11/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
1960
Howell Facilities Pty Ltd - 9/12/2010
City Port Phillip - Asset Strategic Plans
Building
Asset ID
ADDRESS
SUBURB
DESCRIPTION
APPROX AREA
AGE
MKT505
13/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
MKT505
6/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
MKT505
7/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
MKT505
8/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
MKT505
9/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
MKT505
14/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
MKT505
15/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
MKT505
16/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
MKT505
17/322-326 Coventry Street
South
Melbourne
Shop - food court and tenancy
1960
Parks & Gardens
P&G081
329A Beaconsfield Parade
St Kilda
Catani Gardens -Rotunda
51
1988
P&G096
55A Blessington Street
St Kilda
St Kilda Botanical Gardens- Change rooms
60
1970
P&G099
55A Blessington Street
St Kilda
St Kilda Botanical Gardens- Toolshed
46
1980
P&G103
55A Blessington Street
St Kilda
St Kilda Botanical Gardens- Conservatory
353
1989
P&G176
351 Inkerman Street
Balaclava
Hewison Rresrve & Store - key avail
14
1950
P&G189
1 Lower Esplanade
St Kilda
Catani Clock Tower/ Upper Esplanade Clocktower
200
1900
P&G288
3/1A St Vincent Place (340-348
Ferrars Street)
South
Melbourne
St Vincent Gardens- Part 4 (Shelter Shed Bldg F)
18.15
1970
P&G326
70 Beach Street
Port
Melbourne
Rotunda /Bandstand
70
1950
P&G353
105 Raglan Street
Port
Melbourne
Sangster Reserve: Brick Store (Rates & Utility)
45
1940
PTS084
Cummings Reserve (south end),
Beaconsfield Pde at Cowderoy
St Kilda
St intersection
Concrete bricks
PTS154
150-200 Dandenong Road
Balaclava
Alma Park - WC Block
PTS156
Cnr Chapel St & Dandenong Rd
(southeast cnr.)
St Kilda
Besser brick, rough
PTS190
1 Lower Esplanade-on slope to
Upper Esplanade
St Kilda
WC-Rendered concrete, painted
PTS192
42-54A Marine Pde
St Kilda
PTS327
70 Beach Street
PTS334
Public Toilets
1960
20
1970
1970
279
1930
St Kilda Marina - WC
70
1969
Port
Melbourne
Women WC (Red brick)
60
1950
219 Esplanade East
Port
Melbourne
Toilet Block in Edwards Park
50
1930
PTS402
70 Beach Street
Port
Melbourne
Men WC (Red brick)
60
1950
PTS411
Eastern Rd, South Melbourne
South
Melbourne
Bagged brickwork, painted (replaced by portable
toilet)
1950
PTS414
Bowen Crescent, South
Melbourne
South
Melbourne
Bluestone
1980
Howell Facilities Pty Ltd - 9/12/2010
City Port Phillip - Asset Strategic Plans
Building
Asset ID
ADDRESS
SUBURB
DESCRIPTION
PTS421
9A Ormond Esplanade
Elwood
Point Ormond Reserve-WC Block Opp Bluff Ave
PTS425
200 Alma Rd
St Kilda
concrete painted - at the same location as child
centre under Community centre
APPROX AREA
AGE
32
1950
1930
Sports & Recreation
S&R 169173
Rear 63-71 Grey Street
St Kilda
Grey Street Reserve- Pavillion
56
1984
S&R 169174
Rear 63-71 Grey Street
St Kilda
Grey Street Reserve- Plant Nursery
50
1989
S&R085
332A Beaconsfield Parade
St Kilda
Kiosk
28
1960
S&R153
150-200 Dandenong Road
Balaclava
Alma Park -Change rooms & WC
70
1950
S&R162
3 Elwood Foreshore
Elwood
Elwood Angling Clubhouse
902
1950
S&R184
34 Jacka Boulevard
St Kilda
St Kilda Life Saving Club & William Crawford
Pavillion
370
1976
S&R212
69A Ormond Esplanade
Elwood
Elwood Tennis Club Pavillion
62
1983
S&R216217
135A Ormond Esplanade
Elwood
Elwood Croquet Club Pavillion (Bowling Club)
65
1970
S&R216217
135A Ormond Esplanade
Elwood
Elwood Croquet Club - 6 Timber Shelter
12
1970
S&R253
129B Beaconsfield Parade, Opp
Kerferd Road
Albert Park
Albert Park Yachting & Angling Club
450
1930
S&R286
3/1A St Vincent Place (340-348
Ferrars Street)
South
Melbourne
St Vincent Gardens- Part 2 (Storage- Bldgs B,D,K)
41.93
1970
S&R286
PTS516
3/1A St Vincent Place (340-348
Ferrars Street)
South
Melbourne
St Vincent Gardens- Part 3 (M&F WC'S BldgsE,H,J)
62.07
1970
S&R303
211A Dorcas Street
South
Melbourne
Skinners Adventure Playground (Vacant Site
Housing Adventure Playground & Playground Office)
open 3.30-5.30
105
1940
S&R349
351-351A Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
JL Murphy Reserve Pavillions/ WC'S
612
1940/2003
S&R356
130 Spring Street West
Port
Melbourne
Port Melbourne Bowling Club
328
1940
S&R357
240 The Boulevard
Port
Melbourne
Sandridge Life Saving Club
250
1970
S&R358
240 The Boulevard
Port
Melbourne
Dressing Sheds
128
1970
S&R363
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:8 Mens Toilets
34
1940
S&R363
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg: 9 Women’s
Toilets
34
1940
S&R363
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:7 Grandstand Refurbished
268
1940
S&R363
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:15 Mens
Convenience
22
1940
S&R363
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg: 13 Women’s
Convenience
11
1940
S&R365
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg: Ticket Box
7
1940
S&R365
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:4 Turntiles
3
1940
S&R365
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:12 Kiosk
23
1940
S&R365
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:19 Turnstiles
(Williamstown Road)
10
1940
Howell Facilities Pty Ltd - 9/12/2010
City Port Phillip - Asset Strategic Plans
Building
Asset ID
ADDRESS
SUBURB
DESCRIPTION
APPROX AREA
AGE
2
1940
S&R365
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:17 Ticket Box
S&R368
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:5 Dressing
Rooms & Toilets
420
1940
S&R368
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:6 Storeroom,
Press box
143
1940
S&R369
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:1Grandstand
(CAP 1264)
1264
1940
S&R370
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:30 Office
Amenities Block
220
1940
S&R371 &
S&R 372
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:24 Office &
Equipment Store
14
1940
S&R373
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:14 Equipment
Store
16
1940
S&R373
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:26 Garage
100
1940
S&R373
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:28 Equipment
Shed
135
1940
S&R375
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg: Toilets
23
1940
S&R378
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:16 Kiosk
13
1940
S&R380
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg::18 Turnstiles
(Ingles Street)
10
1940
S&R381
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:10 Turnstiles
(Inner)
18.5
1940
S&R382
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:20
Men/Women WC (Ingles Street)
91
1940
S&R383
525 Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:21 Scoreboard
(Ingles Street)
33
1940
S&R504
72A Beaconsfield Parade, Opp
Withers Street
Albert Park
South Melbourne Life Saving Club & Kiosk - William
Crawford Pavillion
555
1950
S&R504
Beaconsfield Pde at Withers St
(Sth Melb. Life Saving Club)
South
Melbourne
Red brick
S&R507
351-351A Williamstown Road
Port
Melbourne
JL Murphy Reserve- Port Melb Soccer Club Pavillion
S&R508
83-85 Swallow Street
Port
Melbourne
Morris Reserve - WC
S&R508
83-85 Swallow Street
Port
Melbourne
Morris Reserve - Port Melbourne Tennis Club
Pavillion
S&R509
Elwood Lifesaving Club
Elwood
Grey besser brick
S&R509
11 Elwood Foreshore
Elwood
Elwood Life Saving Club
270
1971 / 2004
S&R509
9 Elwood Foreshore
Elwood
John R Conebere Pavillion
456
1971 / 2004
S&R509
15 Elwood Foreshore
Elwood
Sails On The Bay Restaurant
302
1971/1994/20
04
S&R515
St Vincent Gardens (South)
South
Melbourne
Brick, painted - part of tennis club
1950
S&R520
Elwood Park, 105A Ormond
Esplanade
Elwood
Grey bessar brick
1979
S&R520
105A Ormond Esplanade
Elwood
Elwood Park & Pavillion
S&R522
Dunstan Pde - Port Melbourne
Port
Melbourne
Julier Reserve -Brick
S&R522
140 Dunstan Parade
Port
Melbourne
RF Julier Reserve - Gymnasium
1950
800
1940
50
1940
132.6
1940
1971
527
1979
1940
157.5
1940
Howell Facilities Pty Ltd - 9/12/2010
City Port Phillip - Asset Strategic Plans
Building
Asset ID
ADDRESS
SUBURB
DESCRIPTION
APPROX AREA
AGE
S&R523
180 Esplanade West
Port
Melbourne
Lagoon Reserve -Brick Toilet
S&R523
180 Esplanade West
Port
Melbourne
Lagoon Reserve- Sports Pavillion
S&R524
Blessington Street
St Kilda
Peanut Farm Reserve - Brick
S&R524
12A Blessington Street
St Kilda
Peanut Far, Pavillion, Reserve & Renfrey Gardens
490
1981
S&R527
38 Beach Street
Port
Melbourne
Port Melbourne Yacht Club
160
1950/1990
Port
Melbourne
Port Melb Cricket/Football Club-Bldg:11 Changebox
(Inner)
3
1940
Not located 525 Williamstown Road
1930
103
1930
1981
Howell Facilities Pty Ltd - 9/12/2010
Asbestos Register
City of Port Phillip
Building Description:
Site Address:
South Melbourne Market
Cecil Street, South Melbourne
Location
Asbestos Material
Inspection Date: 8/09/2010
Sample
Number
Comment
Stalls
Floor covering
Concrete, ceramic tiles
Floor covering - Stall 210
Non-asbestos vinyl tiles
Walls
Masonite, metal, particle board, plaster
See 200505.12 Cement sheet. No asbestos detected.
Taken from Stall 190. Previous report. 1
See 200505.13 Cement sheet. No asbestos detected.
Taken from hut adjacent to Stall 173.
Previous report.1
Masonite, particle board, metal,
fibreglass, plaster
Ceiling
Stalls 115/116
Floor covering
Non-asbestos black & white vinyl tiles
General
Floor
Concrete
Walls
Metal, brick, concrete
Ceiling / Roof
Metal, concrete
Roof Top Car Park
Stairs entry awning
Non-asbestos cement sheet
Loading Bay Driveway
Walls to rear of shops
Non-asbestos cement sheet
Tenancies - Deli Section
Walls
Walls under ceramic tiles
Ceramic tiles
Cement sheet
Asbestos cement sheet may be present
Market Office adjacent Stall 116
External wall
Imitation timber cement sheet
planks
Possible asbestos
Office internal
No asbestos containing materials
located
Food Hall
No asbestos containing materials
located. Opened 1992.
Deli Aisles
No asbestos materials located.
Refurbished 2005.
Restaurants along Cecil Street
No asbestos materials located.
Refurbished 2005.
1. Part 5 Asbestos Materials Report - Howell Facilities: City of Port Phillip. Prepared by JTA Risk Management between March
and May 2005.
Markets - MKT505
1
Paul Morgan Architects
Specification for South
Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Tender Issue
May 2011
Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
31/26867/197021
General requirements
4
1.1
General
4
1.2
Responsibilities
4
1.3
Products
16
1.4
Execution
17
1.5
Selections
33
Wiring and Accessories
34
2.2
Wiring systems
35
2.3
Cable support and duct systems
42
2.4
Earthing
49
2.5
Accessories
50
Switchboards
53
3.2
Design
55
3.3
Switchboard Construction
57
3.4
Switchboard Components
64
3.5
Execution
72
3.6
Completion
73
3.7
Installations
74
3.8
Training of Operation and Maintenance Staff
74
3.9
Selections
75
Lighting
76
4.1
General
76
4.2
Products
78
4.3
Lighting Control System
82
4.4
Execution
86
4.5
Wiring
86
4.6
Completion
87
4.7
Maintenance
88
Emergency Evacuation Lighting
91
5.1
General
91
5.2
Products
92
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
5.3
6.
31/26867/197021
Execution
92
Photovoltaic
94
6.1
General
94
6.2
Scope of Work
94
6.3
Accreditation
95
6.4
Licences
96
6.5
Technical Data
96
6.6
Citipower
96
6.7
Site’s Electricity Retailer
96
6.8
PV System Requirement
97
6.9
Modules
97
6.10 PV Array Arrangement
98
6.11 PV Mounting Frame
98
6.12 Inverter
98
6.13 Communication System
100
6.14 Moulded Case and Miniature Circuit Breakers
101
6.15 Power Cables
101
6.16 Electrical Installation Requirements
102
6.17 DC Cabling Installation
102
6.18 AC Cabling Installation
103
6.19 Wiring
103
6.20 Conduits
103
6.21 Cable Trays
103
6.22 Colour Code
104
6.23 Marking and Labelling
104
6.24 Single-Line Diagrams
105
6.25 Shut-Down Procedure
105
6.26 Citipower Requirements
105
6.27 Testing and Commissioning
106
6.28 Records
106
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
1.
General requirements
1.1
General
This specification is written to cover all associated electrical works for the development of roof over the
car park area at South Melbourne Market, South Melbourne Victoria. It comprises of the supply &
installation of electrical and photovoltaic services.
The works covered by this section of the specification includes the supply of all labour and materials for
the supply, fabrication, manufacture, setting out, installation, testing and commissioning, 12 months
maintenance and warranty of all materials, equipment and workmanship necessary during the defects
liability period for the electrical services as described in the drawings and specification.
The contractor shall complete the works making full allowance for all minor and incidental items
necessary for the proper functioning of the whole system, even though not specifically detailed or
mentioned in the contract documentation.
1.2
Responsibilities
The works for the project under this Specification include, but are not limited to;
1.2.1
Existing Buildings and Services
All works carried out are to be coordinated with the services for the existing market. Supply is to be
maintained to these buildings at all times unless approved by South Melbourne Market Authority and
disruption to supplies requires prior consent from South Melbourne Market for non-operable hours that
do not impact on day to day market operation.
1.2.2
Main Switchboard & Distribution boards
Provision of sub-mains cabling from existing main switchboard in underground existing HD uPVC
electrical conduit using existing electrical pit and existing cable tray where possible.
Provision of using new external pillar IP66 36-pole distribution board at car park level, new internal
solar IP66 96-pole distribution board including all required switchgear, cabling and associated
equipment.
Provision of new submain cables to new distribution boards DB-Roof on car park level and DB-Solar
on ground level. Cables to reticulate in existing underground conduits and cable trays where possible.
Arrange on trays to cables de-rating.
Provision of new distribution boards DB-Roof and DB-Solar including all related switchgear and
control gear.
DB’s to be equipped as shown on the single line diagrams including spare RCBOs and pole fillers.
RCD’s are to be installed on all lighting, general power and other circuits in accordance with
AS/NZS3000:2007.
DB ‘s and inverter rack to be provided with pad-lockable isolators as per AS4777 to isolate the PV
installation during routine maintenance.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Provision of new MCCB for boards.
Bi-directional meter in accordance with Citipower requirements.
DB’s are to be built to accommodate the required amount of switchgear for lighting control and other
systems. All control mechanisms to be concluded behind escutcheon plate.
DB-Roof to be located close to the column adjacent to the back of the lift shaft facing west. DB to be
IP66, heavy duty padlockable door swing handle, pillar height at 1.6 meter bolted to the concrete slab
with all the incoming cable through the bottom gland. Provision for crash bollard surrounding the DB.
All sub-mains or photovoltaic cables exposed to the elements shall be protected by cable tray covers
or suitably sized flexible conduits to prevent degradation or sheath properties due to UV radiation.
Provision of electronically type DB-schedules to be mounted inside door compartment.
1.2.3
Lighting System
Supply and installation of luminaires as shown on drawings including all required rod suspension
systems and mechanical components required to suit the intent of the design.
The lighting systems required shall comply with the following:
o
AS/NZS 1680
o
Building Code of Australia 2010 Section J
Provision of car park entry ramp and general car park lighting systems including all associated cabling
and cable support systems to control input/output devices.
Override switch is to be labelled to indicate clearly the correct functionality of the switch.
Provision of lighting control systems for car park entry ramp and general car park area.
All fluorescent lamps (4000K) shall be controlled with high frequency dali dimmable electronic control
gear or as otherwise stated.
1.2.4
Lighting Control System
Car park entry ramp and general car park area shall be automatically controlled by a Dynalite lighting
control system with all components networked on a building wide Dynet network. All associated
controller relay modules, clocks and Dynet power supply will be din-railed mounted in the DB-Roof in a
dedicated IP66 enclosure.
Car Park Entry Ramp
Ramp lighting shall be switched and dimmed from photoelectric cell and time clock mounted onto the
column at 2.7 meter height. Illuminance level has to be maintained at 800 lux at the initial 15 metre entry
during daytime. Subsequent 4 metre, the illuminance level has to be maintained at 160 lux during
daytime. At night, the illuminance level has to be maintained at 160 lux. Switching of these fittings shall
be achieved using Dali controller modules installed in DB-Roof. Manual/Off/Auto switch will be
connected to the lighting control system to enable for maintenance or security use. Dimming is to be
confirmed with the principal during commissioning and the lighting levels calibrated to their satisfaction.
General Car Park
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Car park lighting shall be switched and dimmed from multi-layer PIR/photoelectric cells mounted onto the
column at 3 metre height. Illuminance level has to be maintained at 40 lux across all car park spaces
including disable parking during day and night time. Switching of these fittings shall be achieved using
Dali controller modules installed in DB-Roof. Manual/Off/Auto switch will be connected to the lighting
control system to enable for maintenance or security use. Dimming is to be confirmed with the principal
during commissioning and the lighting levels calibrated to their satisfaction.
1.2.5
Emergency and EXIT Lighting System
The Electrical Contractor is to provide a stand alone emergency and exit lighting system, complete
with maintenance and AS2293 test switch within the distribution board in roof distribution board with
appropriate labelling.
Test and certify system and provide log book in accordance with AS2293 Part 1&2.
1.2.6
Cable Ladders, Trays and Conduits
Supply and install all communications, power and cable trays dedicated for the photovoltaic installation,
cable supports to suit distribution system as shown on plans and diagrams and include the following:
Cable tray within column riser and roof space as shown on drawings.
Conduits to enclose external wiring, surface run wiring, underground wiring and embedded final subcircuit wiring.
Install conduits as shown on the plans complete with suitable draw wires left within to facilitate pulling
of future cables.
Cable trays in existing market areas to be coordinated with existing structure and furnishings.
Under no circumstances shall conduits be surface mounted without prior confirmation from electrical
engineer. Segregation of trays as per AS/NZS 3000 and AS/ACIF S009.
1.2.7
Photovoltaic (PV)
Provision of all materials, labour, transport, tools, plant, applications, payment of fees and everything
else necessary for the design, supply, installation, commission and maintenance of one hundred and fifty
(150) photovoltaic (PV) grid-connected rooftop systems. This work includes:
Complete design of the grid-connected PV systems on the roofs of the buildings as documented in
this Contract;
PV systems supply including mounting frames and labelling system, installation and commissioning;
Application and design documentation required to satisfy Citipower requirements for connection of
the PV systems to its network including provision of suitable authority approved bi-directional meter
to monitor generation from PV installation and deduction from utility supply demand.
All necessary mechanical and electrical installations associated with the installation of the PV
systems including permanent and temporary safety and access equipment access to all working
areas affected by the works.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
1.2.8
Associated Works
All excavation, trenching, backfilling, chasing and cable support systems associated with carrying out
the electrical works are to be provided by the contractor.
1.2.9
Standards
General
Electrical systems: To AS/NZS 3000, AS/NZS 3008.1.1 and AS/NZS 4777.
Degrees of protection (IP code): To AS/NZS 60529.
1.2.10
Referenced documents
Contractual relationships
General: Responsibilities and duties of the principal, contractor and contract administrator are not altered
by requirements in the documents referenced in this specification.
Current editions
General: Use referenced documents which are the editions, with amendments, current 1 month before
the closing date for tenders, except where other editions or amendments are required by statutory
authorities.
Site copies: Keep a copy of the following Standards on site: AS/NZS 2293.1, AS/NZS 2293.2, AS/NZS
3000, AS 3008:1.1, AS/NZS 4777 and AS 3100.
1.2.11
Interpretation
Abbreviations
General: For the purposes of this contract the abbreviations given below apply.
AS: Australian Standard.
BCA: Building Code of Australia.
NATA: National Association of Testing Authorities.
NZS: New Zealand Standard.
SS: Stainless steel.
Definitions
General: For the purposes of this contract the definitions given below apply.
Attendance: ‘Attendance’, ‘provide attendance’ and similar expressions mean ‘give assistance for
examination and testing’.
Contract or project administrator: ‘Contract administrator’ or ‘project administrator’ has the same
meaning as ‘architect’ or ‘superintendent’ and is the person appointed by the ‘owner’ or ‘principal’
under the contract.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Design life: The period of time for which it as assumed, in the design, that an asset will be able to
perform its intended purpose with only anticipated maintenance but no major repair or replacement
being necessary.
Documented: ‘Documented’, ‘as documented’ and similar terms mean contained in the contract
documents.
Economic life: The period of time from the acquisition of an asset to when the asset, while still
physically capable of fulfilling its function and with only anticipated maintenance, ceases to be the
lowest cost alternative for satisfying that function.
Geotechnical site investigation: The process of evaluating the geotechnical characteristics of the site
in the context of existing or proposed construction.
Give notice: ‘Give notice’, ‘submit’, ‘advise’, ‘inform’ and similar expressions mean ‘give notice
(submit, advise, inform) in writing to the contract administrator’.
High level interface (HLI): Systems transfer information in a digital format using an open system
interface.
Hold point: The activity cannot proceed without the approval of the contract administrator.
If required: A conditional specification term for work which may be shown in the documents or be a
legislative requirement.
Industrial: IP56 to AS/NZS 60529.
Inspect or inspection (by contract administrator): ‘Inspect’ or ‘inspection’ (in reference to the contract
administrator) means a review for general conformance with design intent and does not in any way
relieve other parties for compliance with their obligations, the specifications and drawings.
IP: ‘IP’, ‘IP code’, ‘IP rating’ and similar expression have the same meaning as ‘IP Code’ in AS 60529.
Low level interface (LLI): Systems transfer information via terminals and voltage free contacts.
Maintenance period: Synonymous with ‘Defects liability period’.
Obtain: ‘Obtain’, ‘seek’ and similar expressions mean ‘obtain (seek) in writing from the contract
administrator’.
Professional engineer: A person who is listed on the National Professional Engineers Register
(NPER) in the relevant discipline at the relevant time.
Metallic-coated steel: Includes zinc-coated steel, zinc/iron alloy-coated steel, and aluminium/zinccoated steel.
Pipe: Includes pipe and tube.
Principal: ‘Principal’ has the same meaning as ‘owner’, ‘client’ and ‘proprietor’ and is the party to
whom the Contractor is legally bound to construct the works.
Proprietary: ‘Proprietary’ mean identifiable by naming manufacturer, supplier, installer, trade name,
brand name, catalogue or reference number.
Provide: ‘Provide’ and similar expressions mean ‘supply and install’. Installation shall include
development of the design beyond that documented.
Registered testing authority:
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
o
An organisation registered by the National Association of Testing Authorities (NATA) to
test in the relevant field; or
o
An organisation outside Australia registered by an authority recognised by NATA
through a mutual recognition agreement; or
o
An organisation recognised as being a Registered Testing Authority under legislation at
the time the test was undertaken.
Required: Means required by the documents, the local council or statutory authorities.
Samples: Includes samples, prototypes and sample panels.
Supply: ‘Supply’, ‘furnish’ and similar expressions mean ‘supply only’.
Tests:
o
Pre-completion tests: Tests carried out before completion tests.
o
Type tests: Tests carried out on an item identical with a production item, before delivery
to the site.
o
Production tests: Tests carried out on a purchased item, before delivery to the site.
o
Site tests: Tests carried out on site.
o
Completion tests: Tests carried out on completed installations or systems before the
date for practical completion, to demonstrate that the installation or system, including
components, controls and equipment, operates correctly, safely and efficiently, and
meets performance and other requirements. The superintendent may direct that
completion tests be carried out after the date for practical completion.
Tolerance: The permitted difference between the upper limit and the lower limit of dimension, value or
quantity.
Verification: Provision of evidence or proof that a performance requirement has been met or a default
exists.
Weatherproof: IPX6 to AS/NZS 60529.
Witness points: Provides an opportunity to attend an activity but does not involve an obligation. The
activity can proceed without approval from the contract administrator.
1.2.12
Contract documents
Services diagrammatic layouts
General: Layouts of service lines, plant and equipment shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only,
except where figured dimensions are provided or calculable.
Before commencing work:
Obtain measurements and other necessary information.
Coordinate the design and installation in conjunction with all trades.
Levels
General: Spot levels take precedence over contour lines and ground profile lines.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
1.2.13
Drawings and manuals for existing services
General
General: No warranty is given as to the completeness or accuracy of drawings and/or manuals of
existing services.
1.2.14
Notice
Inspection
Concealment: If notice of inspection is required in respect of parts of the works that are to be concealed,
advise when the inspection can be made before concealment.
Minimum notice for inspections to be made: 5 working days.
Submissions
Program: Allow in the construction program for at least the following times for response to submissions
and each required re-submission:
Shop drawings: 10 working days.
Samples and prototypes: 10 working days.
Manufacturers’ or suppliers’ recommendations: 5 working days.
Product data: 10 working days.
Product / design substitution or modification: 10 working days.
Proposed products schedules: If major products are not specified as proprietary items, submit a schedule
of those proposed for use within 3 weeks of site possession.
Tests
General: Give notice of the time and place of nominated tests.
Minimum notice for witnessing of tests to be made: 5 working days.
1.2.15
Inspection
Attendance
General: Provide attendance for inspection and tests.
1.2.16
Submissions
Approval for submissions: Contract administrator.
Authorities
Authorities’ approvals: Submit documents showing approval by the authorities whose requirements apply
to the work.
Correspondence: Submit copies of correspondence and notes of meetings with authorities whose
requirements apply to the work.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Electronic submissions
File format: Drawings: Both AutoCAD 2004.dwg or later version using an agreed layering and drawing
convention and Adobe PDF Version 7 or later version. Text documents: Indexed PDF Version 7 or later.
Hard copy submissions
Quantity:
Bound documents: 4 sets as paper prints.
Loose documents larger than A3: 4 copies.
Loose documents up to and including A3: One copy.
Standard contract drawing size: A3
Errors
General: If a submission contains errors, make a new or amended submission as appropriate, indicating
changes made since the previous submission.
Identification
General: Identify the project, contractor, subcontractor or supplier, manufacturer, applicable product,
model number and options, as appropriate and include pertinent contract document references. Include
service connection requirements and product certification. Identify proposals for non-compliance with
project requirements, and characteristics which may be detrimental to successful performance of the
completed work.
Inspection and testing plan
General: Submit an inspection and testing plan which is consistent with the construction program.
Include particulars of test stages and procedures.
Test reports: Submit written reports on nominated tests.
Materials and components
Product certification: If products must conform to product certification schemes, submit evidence of
conformance.
Product data: For proprietary equipment, submit the manufacturer’s product data as follows:
Technical specifications and drawings.
Type-test reports.
Performance and rating tables.
Recommendations for installation and maintenance.
Additional product data for services equipment:
31/26867/197021
o
Model name, designation and number.
o
Country of origin and manufacture.
o
Capacity of all system elements.
o
Size, including required clearances for installation.
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
o
Materials used in the construction.
Proposed product schedules: If major products are not specified as proprietary items, submit a schedule
of those proposed for use within 2 weeks of site possession.
Substitution
Performance: Equal or greater to that specified.
Alternatives: If alternatives to the documented products, methods or systems are proposed, submit
sufficient information to permit evaluation of the proposed alternatives including the following:
Samples.
Essential technical information, in English.
Reasons for the proposed substitutions.
Statement of the extent of revisions to the contract documents.
Statement of the extent of revisions to the construction program.
Statement of cost implications including costs outside the contract.
Statement of consequent alterations to other parts of the works.
Some substitutions will require recalculation of the design to confirm BCA compliance. Allow to perform
the recalculation and submit to the Building Surveyor for approval.
Costs: Pay the cost of submissions and of evaluations and tests of proposed alternatives, whether
subsequently accepted as a variation or not. The costs shall be calculated at the current charge-out rates
of the relevant consultant(s).
Evidence: If the documented products or systems is unavailable within the time constraints of the
construction programme submit evidence, from the supplier.
Criteria: If the substitution covers unavailability or is for any other reason, submit evidence that the
substitution:
Is of net enhanced value to the Proprietor.
Is consistent with the contract documents and is as effectual as the identified proprietary item.
Samples
Submission: Submit nominated samples.
Incorporation of samples: If it is intended to incorporate samples into the works, submit proposals.
Incorporate samples in the works which have been endorsed for incorporation. Do not incorporate other
samples.
Retention of samples: Keep endorsed samples in good condition on site, until practical completion.
Shop drawings
General: If required, submit dimensioned drawings showing details of the fabrication and installation of
services and equipment, including relationship to building structure and other services, cable type and
size, and marking details.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Diagrammatic layouts: Coordinate work shown diagrammatically in the contract documents, and submit
dimensioned set-out drawings.
Submission medium: Electronic and hard copy.
Timing: Submit shop drawings for examination prior to ordering or production, including prototypes. In
general, do not manufacture, assemble or supply any item or component which is the subject of shop
drawings until the applicable stamped drawings are returned.
Rejection: If a document is rejected, submit a new or amended document as directed.
Shop drawing schedule: Before starting shop drawings, submit a detailed schedule and program for
submission of all shop drawings required to be provided during the course of the works. The schedule
shall be co-ordinated with the general construction program and shall be amended as necessary to
accommodate any changes to the general program and be re-submitted. Allow sufficient time for any or
all re-examinations and resubmissions in the event of incorrect or inadequate drawings.
Information: Provide at least the following:
(Initially) proposed submission dates of each shop drawing;
(During the course of the works) the actual submission dates;
Dates of submission of drawings for examination.
Examined drawings.
Drawings to be amended.
Dates of resubmission of amended drawings.
Updates: Update and resubmit the schedule with every submission and re-submission of shop drawings,
using the amendment number A, B, C, etc. to identify revisions.
Timing and delays: Ensure that all shop drawings are submitted at such times as to permit examination
(or amendment, resubmission and re-examination) and the subsequent ordering, fabrication or
manufacture to commence in accordance with the construction program. Delays caused by late
submission of shop drawings or submission of inadequate or incomplete shop drawings will not be
accepted as justification for variations to the contract or extensions of time.
Submission dates: To give effect to the preceding requirement, prepare and submit within 5 days after
date of acceptance of tender, a schedule of submission dates for all shop drawings required or specified
under the subcontract. The submission program shall be arranged to submit shop drawings in a
regulated manner so that large numbers of drawings are not presented at the one time and to facilitate
the examination process.
Dimensioning: All elements shall be drawn dimensionally related to all structural elements which they
abut or to which they are connected and showing dimensional relationships to the column grids. Verify all
relevant dimensions and dimension drawings so that the items or components fit accurately into the
required positions.
Services: Indicate in all shop drawings where services occur, i.e. in or on walls, partitions, joinery,
furniture and workstations, or where above-ceiling acoustic baffling or walls are penetrated by services,
showing methods of reticulating services and positions of services entries and outlets, access panels and
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
all other similar situations. Co-ordinate and accurately locate services’ entry and outlet points in
conjunction with the structure before finalising drawings.
Formatting: All shop drawings shall have a title block, title, sequential drawing number, amendment
column, date of amendments and issue, scale and north point. All details shall be fully dimensioned,
annotated, including manufacturers’ names and catalogue numbers where appropriate, cross referenced
and titled and their locations shown on the general arrangement plans. Drawings shall be on the same
size drawing sheets and of similar format to the Contract drawings.
Examination by consultants: Within the period specified after receipt of a document, the contract
administrator will advise whether the document is suitable or unsuitable and will return the document,
provided that any comments of any nature made by consultants will be made in good faith as an
assistance to the Contractor. The consultants will not be responsible for dimensions, quantities,
calculations or methods of manufacture, nor will the consultants warrant that all information is shown.
Completion: After all amendments have been carried out to the satisfaction of the contract administrator,
provide the numbers of hard copy prints specified and PDF files, for the use of the contract administrator
and consultants.
Permission to use: Shall imply only that the Contractor’s interpretations of the relevant requirements of
the Contract are generally acceptable but shall in no way relieve the Contractor of its obligations to
construct and complete the works correctly and accurately and in accordance with the Contract
documents.
Availability: Keep copies of all current and superseded shop drawings on site for the use of the contract
administrator. Keep current shop drawings up to date and together in sets. Store superseded drawings
systematically and separately from current drawings to facilitate convenient reference and to ensure that
superseded drawings are not referenced in error.
Drawings
These drawings form part of the specification:
31-26867-E001 – Legend, Notes and Drawing Index
31-26867-E002 – Carpark Lighting Layout
31-26867-E003 – Ground Floor Power Layout
31-26867-E004 – Schematic Diagram - Electrical
31-26867-E005 – Carpark Power Layout
31-26867-E006 – Roof PV Panels Layout
31-26867-E007 – Schematic Diagram – Photovoltaic System
31-26867-E008 – Schematic Diagram – Dynalite System
General: Minimum A1 drawing size.
Standard: To AS 1100 Parts 101 and 301, AS 1102 Parts 101, 102, 103, 106, 107, 108, and 111 as
applicable.
Building work drawings: Submit detailed dimensioned drawings showing all:
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Access doors and panels.
Conduits to be cast in slabs.
Holding down bolts and other anchorage and/or fixings required complete with loads to be imposed
on the structure during installation and operation.
Openings, penetrations and block-outs.
Pipe sleeves.
Plinths, kerbs and bases.
Required external openings.
Services coordination: Ensure coordination with other building and service elements. Show adjusted
positions on the shop and record drawings.
Space requirements: Check space requirements of equipment and services indicated diagrammatically in
the contract documents and submit a report on consequent variations to the design.
Execution details
General: Before starting the respective portions of the installation, submit the following:
Embedded services: Proposed method for embedding services in concrete walls or floors or chasing
into concrete or masonry walls.
Fixing of services: Typical details of locations, types and methods of fixing of services to structure.
Inaccessible services: If services will be enclosed and not accessible after completion, submit
proposals for location of service runs and fittings.
Marking and labelling
General: Before marking and labelling submit:
Samples of the proposed labels.
A schedule showing, for each item or type of item:
o
A description of the item or type of item sufficient to identify it.
o
The proposed text of the marking or label
o
The proposed location of the marking or label.
Building penetrations
General: If it is proposed to penetrate or fix to the following, submit details of the methods proposed to
maintain the required structural, fire and other properties:
Structural building elements including external walls, fire walls, fire doors and access panels, other
tested and rated assemblies or elements, floor slabs and beams.
Membrane elements including damp-proof courses, waterproofing membranes and roof coverings. If
penetrating membranes, provide a waterproof seal between the membrane and the penetrating
component.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Technical data
Data to be submitted: Include at least the following information in technical submissions:
Assumptions.
Calculations.
Certification of compliance with the applicable code or standard.
Design basis and performance parameters.
Drawings.
Installation and maintenance requirements.
Manufacturers’ technical literature.
Risk assessment.
Samples where relevant.
Sketch, single line diagram, flowchart.
Technical data schedules corresponding to the equipment schedules in the contract documents. If
there is a discrepancy between the two, substantiate the change.
Certification
Submit certification that the plant and equipment submitted meets all requirements and capacities of the
contract documents except for departures that are identified in the submission.
The marking-up, permission to use or endorsement of submitted drawings or equipment details does not
in any way constitute an instruction nor does it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the errors,
omissions or compliance with the requirements of the Contract.
1.3
Products
1.3.1
Tests
Attendance
General: Provide attendance on tests.
Testing authorities
General: Except for site tests, have tests carried out by a Registered testing authority and submit test
reports.
Reports: Submit copies of test reports, including certificates for type tests, showing the observations
and results of tests and conformance or non-conformance with requirements.
Site tests: Use instruments calibrated by authorities accredited by a Registered testing authority.
Currency for test reports: Test reports shall conform with the current editions of referenced documents as
described under Referenced documents. Manufacturers or suppliers shall monitor standards’ changes
affecting their products and initiate the appropriate actions to maintain the conformance of their products
with current test reports. Notwithstanding this requirement, any change to a product or a component
subject to a test report (whether supplied individually or as part of a product) must be advised for
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
assessment prior to its incorporation in the project. Test reports that are dated 6 or more years prior to
the submission date will not be accepted.
1.3.2
Materials and components
Consistency
General: For each material or product use the same manufacturer or source and provide consistent type,
size, quality and appearance.
Accessories: All accessories and outlets located in close proximity are to be of the same manufacture,
size and material and, unless otherwise detailed, of the same colour.
1.3.3
Proprietary items
Manufacturers’ or suppliers’ recommendations
Proprietary items: Provide, including select, if no selection is given, and transport, deliver, store, handle,
protect, finish, adjust, prepare for use, and provide manufactured items in accordance with the current
written recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer or supplier.
Proprietary systems/assemblies: Assemble, install or fix to substrate in accordance with the current
written recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer or supplier.
Project modifications: Advise of activities that supplement, or are contrary to, manufacturer’s or suppliers’
written recommendations and instructions.
Product certification: If products must comply with product certification schemes, provide them in
accordance with the certification requirements.
Identified proprietary items
Implication: Identification of a proprietary item does not necessarily imply exclusive preference for the
item so identified, but indicates the necessary properties of the item.
Sealed containers
General: If materials or products are supplied by the manufacturer in closed or sealed containers or
packages, bring the materials or products to point of use in the original containers or packages.
Sources policy
General: Use products manufactured in Australian or New Zealand, and comprising materials and
components manufactured in Australia and New Zealand, unless no such products satisfy project
requirements.
1.4
Execution
1.4.1
Performance
General
Performance criteria: Meet the performance criteria as specified in the relevant worksections.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
1.4.2
Fixing
General
Suitability: If equipment and services are not suitable for fixing to non-structural building elements, fix
directly to structure and trim around penetrations in non-structural elements.
Fasteners
Use proprietary fasteners capable or transmitting the loads imposed, and sufficient to ensure the rigidity
of the assembly.
1.4.3
Demolition
General
General: Decommission, isolate, demolish and remove from the site all existing redundant cables and
equipment including minor associated components that become redundant as a result of the demolition.
Undertake the work consistent with minimising damage to surfaces which would need to be made good.
Breaking down: Disassemble or cut up equipment where necessary to allow removal.
Salvaged materials: Salvage all components associated with the listed items. Minimise damage during
removal and deliver to the locations scheduled.
Demolished materials classes
Ownership and implementation: Comply with the Demolished materials classes table.
Demolished materials classes table
Class
Requirement
Salvaged items for reuse in the works
Recover without damage items identified in the Salvaged Principal/Proprietor
items for re-use in the works schedule
Salvaged items for
delivery to the principal
Recover without damage items identified in the Salvaged Principal/Proprietor
items for delivery to principal schedule.
Demolished for removal Remove from the site demolished materials identified in
the Demolish for removal schedule. Do not burn or bury
on site
Ownership
Contractor
Transit: Prevent spillage of demolishing materials in
transit
Re-used components
General: Clean re-used components and test for compliance with current Australian Standards before
returning to service. Provide results of compliance tests.
Existing to remain: Where existing wiring, conduits, fittings, equipment, apparatus and the like are
encountered, obstructed or damaged in the course of the work, and they are to remain, repair, divert,
relocate as required to achieve a concealed installation generally. Where diversion of wiring requires the
use of junction boxes, conceal such junction boxes but ensure that they are readily accessible. The
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
installation works shall be to the satisfaction of the responsible electrical inspector in the case of HV and
LV power wiring and associated fittings, and to approval in other cases, all without cost variation to the
contract.
1.4.4
Services connections
Connections
General: Connect to statutory authorities’ services or service points. Excavate to locate and expose
connection points. On completion reinstate the surfaces and facilities that have been disturbed.
Statutory authorities’ requirements
General: If the authorities elect to perform or supply part of the works, make the necessary
arrangements. Install equipment supplied, but not installed, by the authorities.
1.4.5
Installation
General
Fixing: If non-structural building elements are not suitable for fixing equipment and services to, fix directly
to structure and trim around holes or penetrations in non-structural elements.
Installation: Install equipment and services plumb, fix securely and organise reticulated services neatly.
Allow for movement in both structure and services.
Concealment: Conceal all cables, ducts, trays, pipes etc unless installed in plant spaces, ceilings, riser
cupboards, etc or unless otherwise detailed.
Lifting: Provide heavy items of equipment with permanent fixtures for lifting as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Suspended ground floors: Keep all parts of services under suspended ground floors > 150 mm clear of
the ground surface. Make sure services do not impede access.
Arrangement: Arrange services so that services running together are parallel with each other and with
adjacent building elements.
Cable systems
Systems: Provide the following:
Accessible concealed spaces: Thermoplastic insulated and sheathed cables.
Inaccessible concealed spaces: Cable in UPVC conduit.
Plant rooms: Cable in heavy duty UPVC conduit, or on tray or in duct.
Plastered or rendered surfaces: Cable in UPVC conduit.
Stud walls without bulk insulation: Thermoplastic insulated and sheathed cables.
Walls filled with bulk thermal insulation: Cables in PVC conduit.
Installation of accessories
General: Install accessories in conformance with the Installation of accessories table.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Location: Final location of all outlets and equipment to be confirmed on site prior to installation.
Default mounting heights to centre of accessory plate subject to the architect’s on-site direction or
details:
Outlets
300 mm
Switches and controls
1100 mm
Flush mounting: Provide flush mounted accessories except in plant rooms.
Common face plates: Mount adjacent flush mounted accessories under a common faceplate.
Restricted location: Do not install wall boxes across junctions of wall finishes.
Surface mounting: Proprietary mounting blocks.
Installation of accessories table
Wall construction
Installation and concealed cabling facilities
Rendered masonry partition
Flush wall box with conduit chased into wall
Double sided face brick partition
Vertically mounted flush wall box with conduit concealed in
cut bricks
Face brick external cavity wall
Flush wall box with thermoplastic insulated cables in conduit
run in cavity and tied against inner brick surface, or
thermoplastic sheathed cables run in cavity
Stud partition
Rewirable
Installation of ceiling mounted appliances
Connections: Appliances: Provide flush mounted outlets on the ceiling next to support brackets.
Connections: Fixed equipment: Provide concealed permanent connections.
Fixing: For equipment and appliances heavier than 30 kg provide support through the suspended ceiling
to the building structure. Brace appliances that have excessive bending moments, are heavy or vibrate,
to prevent horizontal movement. If non-conventional ceilings are used their ability to support appliances
and equipment must be confirmed with the supplier.
Differential movement
General: If the geotechnical site investigation report predicts differential movements between buildings
and the ground in which conduits are buried, provide movement control joints in the conduits.
- Location: Adjacent to the conduit supports which are closest to the perimeter of the building.
- Arrangement: Arrange conduits to minimise the number of movement control joints.
- Magnitude: Accommodate the predicted movements.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Holes and chases
General: If holes and chases are required in masonry walls, provide proposals to demonstrate that the
structural integrity of the wall is maintained. Do not chase walls nominated as fire rated or acoustic.
Parallel chases or recesses on opposite faces of a wall shall not be closer than 600 mm to each other.
Chasing of blockwork: Only in core-filled hollow blocks or in solid blocks which are not designated as
structural or where there are restrictions on chasing, etc. intended to limit sound transmission (e.g. BCA)
and shall be to the Concrete blockwork chasing table.
Concrete blockwork chasing table
Block thickness (mm)
Depth of chase (maximum mm)
190
35
140
25
90
20
Penetrations
Fire rated building elements: Seal penetrations with a system conforming to AS 4072.1.
Non-fire rated building elements: Seal penetrations around conduits and sleeves. Seal around cables
within sleeves. If the building element is acoustically rated, maintain the rating.
Sleeves
General: If piping or conduit penetrates building elements, provide metal or UPVC sleeves formed from
pipe sections as follows:
Movement: Arrange to permit normal pipe or conduit movement.
Diameter (for non fire-rated building elements): Sufficient to provide an annular space around the pipe
or pipe insulation of at least 12 mm.
Prime paint ferrous surfaces.
Terminations:
o
If cover plates are fitted: Flush with the finished building surface.
o
In fire-rated and acoustic-rated building elements: 50 mm beyond finished building
surface.
o
In floors draining to floor wastes: 50 mm above finished floor.
o
Elsewhere: 5 mm beyond finished building surface.
Termite management: To AS 3660.1.
Thickness:
31/26867/197021
o
Metal:
o
UPVC:
1 mm.
3 mm.
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Sleeves for cables
General: For penetrations of cables not enclosed in conduit through ground floor slabs, beams and
external walls provide sleeves formed from UPVC pipe sections.
MIMS cables: Provide sleeves for penetrations through masonry.
1.4.6
Concrete plinths
Construction
General: Provide plinths under all equipment located on concrete floor slabs as follows:
Concrete: Grade N20.
Finish: Steel float flush with the surround.
Reinforcement: Single layer of F62 fabric.
Surround: Provide galvanized steel surround at least 75 mm high and 1.6 mm thick. Fix to the floor
with masonry anchors. Fill with concrete.
1.4.7
Plant and equipment access
General
Services and equipment: Locate and arrange all services and equipment so that:
Failure of plant and equipment (including leaks) does not create a hazard for the building occupants.
Failure of plant and equipment (including leaks) cause a minimum or no damage to the building, its
finishes and contents.
Inspection and maintenance operations can be arranged to minimise inconvenience and disruption to
building occupants or damage to the building structure or finishes.
Services and equipment are readily accessible for inspection and maintenance and arranged so that
inspection and maintenance can be carried out in a safe and efficient manner. Include the following:
Conform to the relevant requirements of AS 1470, AS 1657, AS/NZS 1892.1 and AS/NZS 2865.
If parts of the plant require regular inspection and maintenance either locate plant so it is safely
accessible from floor level or provide permanent access platforms and ladders.
In false ceilings locate items of equipment that require inspection and maintenance above tiled parts
where possible. If this is not possible (for example if above set plaster or other inaccessible ceilings)
provide access panels. Arrange services and plant locations to reduce the number of access panels.
Coordinate with other trades to use common access panels where feasible.
Modify manufacturer’s standard equipment when necessary to provide the plant access in the
contract documents.
1.4.8
Painting and finishes
General
General: If exposed to view (including in plant rooms) paint new services and equipment.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Surfaces painted or finished off-site: Conform to Metals and prefinishes.
Exceptions: Do not paint chromium or nickel plating, anodised aluminium, GRP, stainless steel, nonmetallic flexible materials and normally lubricated machined surfaces. Surfaces with finishes applied offsite need not be re-painted on-site provided the corrosion resistance of the finish is not less than that of
the respective finish in the On-site paint systems table.
Standard
General: Conform to the recommendations of AS/NZS 2311 Sections 3, 6 and 7 or AS/NZS 2312
Sections 5, 8 and 10, as applicable.
Specifications: Conform to the On-site paint systems table.
Oil and petrol resistant finishes
General: If the finished surface may be subject to oil and/or petrol provide APAS-0024/1 for the 2nd and
3rd coats in the On-site paint systems table.
Paint application
Coats: Apply the first coat immediately after substrate preparation and before contamination of the
substrate can occur. Ensure each coat of paint or clear finish is uniform in colour, gloss, thickness and
texture and free of runs, sags, blisters or other discontinuities.
Combinations: Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system.
Protection: Remove fixtures before starting to paint and refix in position undamaged on completion.
1.4.9
Marking and labelling
General
General: Mark services and equipment to provide a ready means of identification.
Locations exposed to weather: Provide durable materials.
Pipes, conduits and ducts: Identify and label to AS 1345.
Cables: Label at each end to indicate the origin and destination of the cable.
Consistency: Label and mark equipment using a consistent scheme across all services elements of the
project.
Operating and maintenance manuals: Provide marking an labelling text identical to the text and
terminology used in operating and maintenance manuals.
Accessories
Label isolating switches and outlets to identify circuit origin.
Labels and notices
General: Select from the following materials:
Cast metal.
For indoor applications only, engraved two-colour laminated plastic.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Proprietary pre-printed self-adhesive flexible plastic labels.
Stainless steel or brass
1 mm thick with black filled engraved lettering.
Outlets and isolating switches with removable cover plates – manufacturer’s standard.
Emergency functions: To AS 1319.
Colours: Generally in conformance with AS 1345 as appropriate, otherwise black lettering on white
background except as follows.
Danger, warning labels: White lettering on red background.
Main switch and caution labels: Red lettering on white background.
Edges: If labels exceed 1.5 mm thickness, radius or bevel the edges.
Fixing: Fix labels securely using screws, rivets, proprietary self-adhesive labels or double-sided adhesive
tape.
If labels are mounted in extruded aluminium sections, use rivets or countersunk screws to fix the
extrusions.
Use aluminium or monel rivets for aluminium labels.
Label locations: Locate labels so that they are easily seen and are either attached to, below or next to
the item being marked. For accessories with readily removable cover plates, locate behind cover plates.
Label text: To correspond to terminology and identifying number of the respective item as shown on the
record drawings and documents.
Lettering heights:
Danger, warning and caution notices:
Equipment labels within cabinets:
10 mm for main heading,
3.5 mm.
Identifying labels on outside of cabinets:
Isolating switches:
5 mm.
5 mm.
Switchboards, main assembly designation:
Switchboards, outgoing functional units:
25 mm.
8 mm.
Switchboards, sub assembly designations:
Other locations:
5 mm for remainder.
15 mm.
3 mm.
Operable devices: Mark to provide a ready means of identification. Include the following:
Controls.
Indicators, gauges, meters and the like.
Isolating switches.
Outlets.
Underground cable routes
Survey: Accurately record the routes of underground cables before backfilling. Include on the record
drawings.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Location marking: Accurately mark the location of underground cables with route markers consisting of a
marker plate set flush in a concrete base.
Markers: Place markers at each joint, route junction, change of direction, termination and building entry
point and in straight runs at intervals of not more than 100 m.
Marker bases: 200 mm diameter x 200 mm deep, minimum concrete.
Direction marking: Show the direction of the cable run by means of direction arrows on the marker plate.
Indicate distance to the next marker.
Plates: Brass, minimum size 75 x 75 x 1 mm thick.
Plate fixing: Waterproof adhesive and 4 brass or stainless steel countersunk screws.
Marker height: Set the marker plate flush with paved surfaces, and 25 mm above other surfaces.
Marker tape: Where electric bricks or covers are not provided over underground wiring, provide a
150 mm wide yellow or orange marker tape bearing the words ‘WARNING – electric cable buried below’,
laid in the trench 150 mm below ground level.
1.4.10
Operation and maintenance manuals
General
General: Submit operation and maintenance manuals for installations.
Authors and compilers: Personnel experienced in the maintenance and operation of equipment and
systems installed, and with editorial ability.
Referenced documents: If referenced documents or technical worksections require that manuals be
submitted, include corresponding material in the operation and maintenance manuals.
Subdivision: By installation or system, depending on project size.
Date for draft submission: 2 weeks prior to commencement of training or 4 weeks prior to the date for
practical completion, whichever is earlier, for consultant review and familiarisation by the principal’s staff.
Include provisional record drawings, preliminary performance data and temporary insertions for items
which cannot be finalised until the installation is tested and commissioned.
Progressive: For equipment put into service during construction and operated by principal, submit
manuals within 2 weeks after acceptance.
Date for final submission: Within 2 weeks after practical completion. Incorporate feedback from reviews
and from training of the principal’s staff, including additional data and instruction determined. Revise and
resubmit electronic copies and submit updated CD similarly.
Contents
General: Include the following:
Certificates:
31/26867/197021
o
Certificates from authorities.
o
Copies of manufacturers’ warranties.
o
Product certification.
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Directory: Names, addresses, and telephone and facsimile numbers of principal consultant,
subconsultants, contractor, subcontractors and names of responsible parties.
Drawings:
o
Record drawings, full size.
o
Drawings and technical data: As necessary for the efficient operation and maintenance
of the installation.
Equipment descriptions:
o
Name, address and telephone and facsimile numbers of the manufacturer and supplier
of items of equipment installed, together with catalogue list numbers.
Schedules (system by system) of equipment, stating locations, duties, performance figures and dates
of manufacture. Provide a unique code number cross-referenced to the record and diagrammatic
drawings and schedules, including spare parts schedule, for each item of equipment installed.
Switchboard and communications frame/patchpanel schedules.
Maintenance procedures:
o
Detailed recommendations for preventative maintenance frequency and procedures.
o
Manufacturer’s technical literature as appropriate. Register with manufacturer as
necessary. Retain copies delivered with equipment.
o
Safe trouble-shooting, disassembly, repair and reassembly, cleaning, alignment and
adjustment, balancing and checking procedures. Provide logical step-by-step sequence
of instructions for each procedure.
o
Schedule of spares recommended to be held on site, being those items subject to wear
or deterioration and which may involve the principal in extended deliveries when
replacements are required. Include complete nomenclature and model numbers, and
local sources of supply.
Operation procedures:
o
Manufacturers’ technical literature as appropriate.
o
Table of contents: For each volume. Title to match cover.
o
Installation description: General description of the installation.
o
Systems descriptions: Technical description of the systems installed, written to ensure
that the principal’s staff fully understand the scope and facilities provided. Identify
function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
Systems performance: Technical description of the mode of operation of the systems installed.
Environmental performance: To recognise, guide and encourage building users to achieve the
efficiencies and environmental performance envisaged, provide a simple guide covering an overview
of the services and the energy and environmental strategy, monitoring, targeting, expansion,
refurbishment and occupant considerations and requirements.
Equipment descriptions:
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
o
Manufacturers’ technical literature for equipment installed, assembled specifically for the
project, excluding irrelevant matter. Mark each product data sheet to clearly identify
specific products and component parts used in the installation, and data applicable to
the installation.
o
Supplements to product data to illustrate relations of component parts. Include typed text
as necessary.
Operation procedures:
o
Safe starting up, running in, operating and shutting down procedures for systems
installed. Include logical step-by-step sequence of instructions for each procedure.
o
Control sequences and flow diagrams for systems installed.
Legend for colour-coded services.
Schedules of fixed and variable equipment settings established during commissioning and
maintenance.
Maintenance procedures:
o
Schedule of normal consumable items, local sources of supply, and expected
replacement intervals up to a running time of 40 000 hours. Include lubricant and
lubrication schedules for equipment.
o
Instructions for use of tools and testing equipment.
Emergency procedures, including telephone numbers for emergency services, and procedures for
fault finding.
Material safety data sheets (MSDS).
Maintenance records:
Documentation to AS 1851 clause 18.2.5.
Certificates:
o
Copies of test certificates for the installation and equipment used in the installation.
o
Test reports.
o
Certificates of Electrical Safety.
Drawings:
o
Single line diagrams.
o
Service route layouts.
o
Switchgear and controlgear assembly circuit schedules including electrical service
characteristics, controls and communications.
Format – electronic copies
Printing: Provide material that can be legibly printed on A4 size paper.
Scope: Provide the same material as documented for hardcopy in electronic format.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Format: All drawings, text and documents shall be converted to and produced in a single, indexed (with
page numbers referenced) PDF file (Version 7.0 or later) on CD. Where manufacturers’ or other
documentation is not available in electronic format, scan the images at minimum resolution 200dpi and
combine in a single file with the other details.
Quantity: Refer to Electronic submissions.
Format – hard copy
General: A4 size loose leaf, in commercial quality, 4 ring binders with hard covers, each indexed, divided
and titled. Include the following features:
Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title ‘OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL’,
to spine. Identify title of project, volume number, volume subject matter, and date of issue.
Dividers: Durable divider for each separate element, with typed description of system and major
equipment components. Clearly print short titles under laminated plastic tabs.
Drawings: Fold drawings to A4 size and accommodate them in the binders so that they may be
unfolded without being detached from the rings. Provide with reinforced punched binder tabs.
Pagination: Number pages.
Ring size: 50 mm maximum, with compressor bars.
Text: Manufacturers’ printed data, including associated diagrams, or typewritten, single-sided on bond
paper, in clear concise English.
Number of copies: 4.
1.4.11
Record drawings
General
General: Submit record drawings. Show the ‘as installed’ locations of building elements, plant and
equipment. Include ‘as installed’ amendments to shop drawings. Show off-the-grid dimensions where
applicable.
Date for submission: Within 2 weeks after practical completion.
Content: Show dimensions, types and location of the services in relation to permanent site features and
other underground services. Show the spatial relationship to building structure and other services.
Include all changes made during commissioning and the maintenance period.
Drawings: Include all documented shop drawings.
Extensions and/or changes to existing: If a drawing shows extensions and/or alterations to existing
installations, include sufficient of the existing installation to make the drawing comprehensible without
reference to drawings of the original installation.
Accuracy
Documents: Incorporate all modifications made during the progress of the work and testing period. Show
any provisions for the future.
Endorsement: Sign and date all record drawings. Keep one set of shop drawings on site at all times
expressly for the purpose of marking changes made during the progress of the works.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Drawing layout
General: Use the same borders and title block as the contract drawings.
Quantity and format
General: Refer to Submissions.
1.4.12
Tools and spare parts
Tools and spare parts schedule
General: At least 8 weeks before the date for practical completion, submit a schedule of tools, portable
instruments and spare parts necessary for maintenance of the installation. For each item state the
recommended quantity and the manufacturer’s current price. Include the following in the prices:
Checking receipt, marking and numbering in accordance with the spare parts schedule.
Packaging and delivery to site.
Painting, greasing and packing to prevent deterioration during storage.
Referencing equipment schedules in the operation and maintenance manuals.
Suitable means of identifying, storing and securing the tools and instruments. Include instructions for
use.
Spares
General: Provide spare parts listed in the appropriate worksections.
Replacement: Replace spare parts consumed during the maintenance period.
1.4.13
Commissioning
Circuit protection
General: Confirm that circuit protective devices are sized and adjusted to protect installed circuits.
Controls
General: Calibrate, set and adjust control instruments, control systems and safety controls.
Environmental performance
General: Calibrate, set, tune and adjust environmental and energy control systems.
Notice
General: Give notice for inspection to be made of the commissioning of the installation.
Reports
General: Submit reports indicating observations and results of tests and compliance or non-compliance
with requirements.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
1.4.14
Cleaning
General
General: Before practical completion, clean throughout, including all exterior and interior surfaces except
those totally and permanently concealed from view.
Practical completion: At practical completion, clean the following:
Insides of switchgear and controlgear assemblies.
Luminaires.
Switchgear and contactors, and other electrical contacts. Adjust as necessary.
Labels: Remove all labels not required for maintenance.
1.4.15
Completion
Samples
General: Remove unincorporated samples on completion.
Warranties
General: Name the Principal as warrantee in conformance with the Warranty schedule. Register with
manufacturers as necessary. Retain copies delivered with components and equipment.
Commencement: Commence warranty periods at practical completion or at acceptance of installation, if
acceptance is not concurrent with practical completion.
Approval of installer: If installation is not by manufacturer, and product warranty is conditional on the
manufacturer’s approval of the installer, submit the manufacturer’s written approval of the installing firm.
1.4.16
Completion tests
General
General: Test the works under the contract to demonstrate compliance with the specified performance
requirements.
Functional checks
General: Carry out functional and operational checks on energised equipment and circuits and make
adjustments for the correct operation of safety devices.
Proprietary equipment
General: Submit type test reports confirming compliance of proprietary equipment.
Thermographic surveys
General :Undertake a thermographic survey of all busbars, equipment, terminations and connections in
all switchboards.
Specialist: Tests shall be performed by an independent specialist.
Timing: Perform testing just prior to practical completion when all loads are connected and again just
prior to the end of the maintenance period.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Reports: Submit photographic evidence of any hot spots detected with a comprehensive report which
includes ambient and load conditions under test. Rectify any defects found and re-survey prior to
submitting final reports.
Sound pressure level measurements
Correction for background noise: To AS/NZS 2107 Table B1.
External: To AS 1055.1.
Internal: To AS/NZS 2107.
Measurement positions: If a test position is designated only by reference to a room or space, do not take
measurements less than 1 m from the floor, ground or walls.
Sound pressure level analysis: Measure the sound pressure level and the background sound pressure
level over the full range of octave band centre frequencies from 31.5 Hz to 8 kHz at the designated
positions.
Sound pressure levels: Measure the A-weighted sound pressure levels and the A-weighted background
sound pressure levels at the designated positions.
Test instruments
General: Use instruments calibrated by a registered testing authority.
1.4.17
Training
General
Duration: Instruction to be available for the whole of the commissioning and running-in periods.
Format: Conduct training at agreed times, at system or equipment location. Also provide seminar
instruction to cover all major components comprising a minimum of 8 hours tuition covering both
operational and maintenance aspects of the installations.
Operation and maintenance manuals: Use items and procedures listed in the final draft operation and
maintenance manuals as the basis for instruction. Review contents in detail with the principal’s staff.
Certification: Provide written certification of attendance and participation in training for each attendee.
Provide register of certificates issued.
Demonstrators
General: Use only qualified manufacturer’s representatives who are knowledgeable about the
installations.
Maintenance
General: Explain and demonstrate to the principal’s staff the purpose, function and maintenance of the
installations.
Operation
General: Explain and demonstrate to the principal’s staff the purpose, function and operation of the
installations.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
1.4.18
Maintenance
General
General: During the maintenance and defects liability periods, carry out periodic inspections and
maintenance work as recommended by manufacturers of supplied equipment, and promptly rectify faults.
Emergencies: Attend emergency calls promptly.
Minimum maintenance: Carry out the following maintenance procedures during and at the end of the
maintenance period:
Replacement of faulty lamps and accessories – monthly.
Switchgear operation – bi-annually.
Operation, setting and calibration checks of all controls – bi-annually.
Submain cabling excessive temperature checks – quarterly.
Thermographic survey – annually.
Replacement of faulty speakers, strobes, WIPs and connectors – bi-monthly.
EWIS as per AS 1851 and include testing of the voice instruction to evacuate the fire-affected floor
and the phase delays for voice instruction to other floors.
Annual test of interconnection of all fire and safety systems for correct operation under automatic
alarm (not simulation).
Emergency control organisation and procedures – undertake annual simulation of evacuation
procedures, review fire warden procedures and confirm to persons with disabilities who use the
buildings the operation of the lifts under fire mode.
Operation, setting and calibration checks of all controls – bi-annually.
Maintenance program
General: Submit details of maintenance procedures and program, relating to installed plant and
equipment, 6 weeks before the date for practical completion. Indicate dates of service visits. State
contact telephone numbers of service operators and describe arrangements for emergency calls.
Maintenance records
General: Submit, in binders which match the manuals, loose leaf log book pages designed for recording
completion activities including operational and maintenance procedures, materials used, test results,
comments for future maintenance actions and notes covering the condition of the installation. Include
completed log book pages recording the operational and maintenance activities performed up to the time
of practical completion.
Certificates: Include test and approval certificates.
Certification: On satisfactory completion of the installation, submit certificates stating that each
installation is operating correctly.
Number of pages: The greater of 100 pages or enough pages for the maintenance period and a further
12 months.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Referenced documents: If referenced documents or technical worksection s require that log books or
records be submitted, include this material in the maintenance records.
Service visits: Record comments on the functioning of the systems, work carried out, items requiring
corrective action, adjustments made and name of service operator. Obtain the signature of the principal’s
designated representative.
Reviews
Allow for quarterly reviews of the commissioning during the defects’ period and a final recommission after
12 months of operation.
Site control
General: Report to the principal’s designated representative on arriving at and before leaving the site.
1.5
Selections
1.5.1
Warranty schedule
Warranty
Form
Period
Balance of works – new
equipment and installations
Balance of works – existing
equipment and installations
Parts and labour
1 year
Parts and labour
1 year
1.5.2
Electrical systems schedule
Electrical systems required
Low voltage power systems
Cable support and duct systems
Switchboards – proprietary
Switchboard components
Lighting
Luminaires
Emergency evacuation lighting systems
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
2.
Wiring and Accessories
2.1.1
Cross references
General
General: Conform to the General requirements (electrical) worksection.
Associated worksections
Associated worksections: Conform to the following:
Switchboards.
Power factor correction.
Lighting.
2.1.2
Standards
General
General: AS/NZS 3000.
Electrical equipment: To AS/NZS 3100.
Selection of cables: To AS/NZS 3008.1.1.
Distribution cables: To AS/NZS 4961.
Cable trunking systems: To AS/NZS 4296.
Conduits and fittings for electrical installations: AS/NZS 3750.9
Testing
Standard: To AS/NZS 3017.
2.1.3
Interpretations
Abbreviations
General: For the purposes of this worksection the abbreviations given below apply.
HDPE: High Density Poly Ethylene
HDPVC: High Density Poly Vinyl Chloride
MIMS: Mineral-insulated metal-sheathed.
PVC: Poly Vinyl Chloride
XLPE: Cross Linked Poly Ethylene
Definitions
General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given below apply.
Extra-low voltage: Not exceeding 50 V a.c. or 120 V ripple-free d.c.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Low-voltage: Exceeding extra-low voltage, but not exceeding 1000 V a.c. or 1500 V d.c.
High voltage: Exceeding low-voltage.
2.1.4
Submissions
Mains and sub-main cable routes on the current architectural background coordinated with ceilings,
structure and other services.
General: Submit shop drawings showing the following:
Cable tray and trunking routes.
Layout of cable supports and enclosures on the current architectural background coordinated with the
structure and other services.
Layout of underground conduits, pits and drainage trenches.
Invert levels for underground conduits.
Depth of burial for cables and conduits.
In situ pits.
Provision for expansion and ground movement.
Fabricated columns.
Footing for columns.
Technical data
General: Submit technical data for the following:
Ducted wiring enclosure systems.
Cable support systems.
Proprietary pits.
Proprietary columns.
Power cable ratings calculations
General: If cable sizes are not given, submit calculations of current ratings and voltage drop.
Standard: To AS/NZS 3008.1.1.
Samples
Submit samples of lighting switchplates, outlet boxes, wall mounted accessories, PIR/PE cells.
2.2
Wiring systems
General
Selection: Provide wiring systems appropriate to the installation conditions and the function of the load.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
2.2.1
Power cables Selections
Standard
PVC and XLPE cables: To AS/NZS 5000.1.
Cable
General: Select multi-stranded copper cable generally, except for mineral insulated metal sheathed
(MIMS).
Minimum size:
Lighting sub-circuits: 6 mm 2.
Power sub-circuits: 2.5 mm2 (4 mm² (in conduits) in walls with bulk insulation).
Sub-mains: 35 mm2.
Voltage drop: Select final subcircuit cables within the voltage drop parameters dictated by the route
length and load.
Fault loop impedance: Select final subcircuit cables selected to satisfy the requirements for automatic
disconnection under short circuit and earth fault/touch voltage conditions.
Underground residential distribution systems: Select cables according to AS/NZS 4026.
Distribution cables: To AS/NZS 4961.
Cable sizes: If cable sizes are not given, submit calculations of current ratings and voltage drop.
Ratings: Install single-core and multi-core PVC/PVC, XLPE/PVC, MIMS and fire-resistant polymer
insulated and sheathed cable mains/submains to achieve ratings not less than the following for the
conductors nominated:
multi-core cable to the unenclosed-in-air ratings of Tables 12, 13 and 14 Column 2 AS 3008.1.1;
single-core cables to the unenclosed-in-air ratings of Tables 6 and 7 Column 4 and Table 8 Column 3
AS 3008.1.1;
single-core cables to the underground duct ratings of Tables 6 and 7 Column 16 and Table 8 Column
9 AS 3008.1.1;
bare single-core MICS cables to the unenclosed-in-air ratings of Table 18 Column 6.
Where the required setting or rating of protection devices for discrimination and coordination
necessitates higher cable ratings than those indicated or calculated on the basis of installation and
voltage drop requirements, provide the higher rated cables without cost variation to the contract.
Conductor colours
General: For fixed wiring, provide coloured conductor insulation. If this is not practicable, slide at least
150 mm of close fitting coloured sleeving on to each conductor at the termination points.
Active conductors in single phase circuits: Red.
Active conductors in polyphase circuits:
A phase: Red.
B phase: White.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
C phase: Blue.
2.2.2
Power cables
General
Standard: Classifications to AS/NZS 3013.
Handling cables: Report damage to cable insulation, serving or sheathing.
Stress: Ensure that installation methods do not exceed the cable’s pulling tension. Use cable rollers for
cable installed on tray/ladders or in underground enclosures.
Straight-through joints: Unless unavoidable due to length or difficult installation conditions, run cables
without intermediate straight-through joints.
Cable joints: Locate in accessible positions in junction boxes.
Extra-low voltage circuits: Individual wiring of extra-low voltage circuits: Tie together at regular intervals.
Tagging
General: Identify multicore cables and trefoil groups at each end with stamped non-ferrous tags clipped
around each cable or trefoil group.
Marking
General: Identify the origin of all wiring by means of legible indelible marking.
2.2.3
Mineral insulated metal sheathed cable (mims)
General
General: Maintain manufacturer’s seals until joint or termination is made. Remove moisture by heating
cable ends.
Seals
Temporary seals: Fit temporary seals to the open ends of cables cut and not immediately used.
Terminations: Fit termination seals at ends of cable runs as soon as the cable has been cut to length,
stripped back, and the moisture driven out.
Through joints: Same fire-rating as the cable.
Sheath earthing
General: If MIMS cables enter metal enclosures, earth sheaths to non-ferrous plates secured to the
enclosures. Where sheaths terminate at plates, fully insulate, colour code, and fix the conductors to the
enclosures.
Bonding
General: Bond metal sheaths of single core cables in multi-phase circuits with proprietary earth bonding
clips or clamps.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Separation
General: Separate MIMS cables from tough plastic sheathed (TPS) cables and UPVC conduits by at
least 25 mm.
Eddy currents
General: Arrange single core cable entries into non-ferrous metal gland plates to minimise eddy currents.
Vibration
Connections with vibrating equipment: Loop cables in a complete circle next to the point of connection.
MIMS cable terminations
MIMS cable systems: Test the insulation resistance as follows:
At the time of termination.
24 hours later.
2.2.4
Fire-rated (other than mims)
Protection
General: If exposed to mechanical damage, provide protection to AS/NZS 3013.
2.2.5
Copper conductor terminations
General
General: Other than for small accessory and luminaire terminals, terminate copper conductors to
equipment, with compression-type lugs of the correct size for the conductor. Compress using the correct
tool or solder.
Within assemblies and equipment
General: Loom and tie together conductors from within the same cable or conduit from the terminal block
to the point of cable sheath or conduit termination. Neatly bend each conductor to enter directly into the
terminal tunnel or terminal stud section, allowing sufficient slack for easy disconnection and
reconnection.
Alternative: Run cables in UPVC cable duct with fitted cover.
Identification: Provide durable numbered ferrules fitted to each core, and permanently marked with
numbers, letters or both to suit the connection diagrams.
Spare cores: Identify spare cores and terminate into spare terminals, if available. Otherwise, neatly
insulate and neatly bind the spare cores to the terminated cores.
2.2.6
Aluminium conductor terminations
General
Do not use aluminium conductors generally. Where existing conductors are to be retained comply with
the following.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Conductor surface preparation: Remove oxide as follows:
Wire brushing surfaces to be connected.
Immediately applying oxidation inhibiting abrasive grease containing zinc or similar particles.
Thoroughly cover the surfaces and work the grease between the strands of stranded conductors.
Fittings: Unless joint contact surfaces are factory tinned or factory pre-filled with oxidation inhibiting
abrasive grease, prepare as for conductors.
Aluminium-to-aluminium jointing
Compression method:
Provide aluminium or aluminium alloy crimp lugs or ferrules selected to suit the size and shape of the
conductors.
Use compression dies selected to suit lugs or ferrules, with hexagonal dies for stranded conductors
and indent dies for solid conductors.
Fill lugs or ferrules with oxidation inhibiting abrasive grease.
Insert conductors into lugs or ferrules, driving out excess grease.
Apply dies to provide at least 2 indentations at each joint or termination.
Fusion weld method: Make joints by fusion welding with aluminium lugs. Protect cable insulation from
heat by fixing substantial heat sinks to the cable near the joint. After completion of the weld, wire brush
the joint and file sharp projections smooth.
Aluminium-to-copper jointing
Method: Use compression method, as for Aluminium-to-aluminium jointing.
Connector types: Select from the following:
Bi-metal: Lug or pin type with cast copper palm or pin, friction welded to an aluminium barrel section,
subsequently factory filled with oxidation inhibiting abrasive grease.
Case electro-tinned aluminium lug: Bolt the palm of the lug to the copper busbar or terminal by means
of a stainless steel bolt and nut with a large diameter stainless steel flat washer and a spring cup
washer.
2.2.7
Cable Installation
General
Fixing: If non-structural building elements are not suitable for fixing equipment and services to, fix directly
to structure and trim around holes or penetrations in non-structural elements.
Installation: Install equipment and services plumb, fix securely and organise reticulated services neatly.
Allow for movement in both structure and services.
Concealment: Conceal all cables, ducts, trays, pipes etc unless installed in plant spaces, ceilings, riser
cupboards, etc or unless otherwise detailed.
Lifting: Provide heavy items of equipment with permanent fixtures for lifting as recommended by the
manufacturer.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Suspended ground floors: Keep all parts of services under suspended ground floors > 150 mm clear of
the ground surface. Make sure services do not impede access.
Arrangement: Arrange services so that services running together are parallel with each other and with
adjacent building elements.
2.2.8
Unsheathed cables – installation
General
General: Provide permanently fixed enclosure systems, assembled before installing wiring. Provide draw
wires to pull in conductor groups from outlet to outlet, or provide ducts with removable covers.
Cable systems
Systems: Provide the following:
Accessible concealed spaces: Thermoplastic insulated and sheathed cables.
Inaccessible concealed spaces: Cable in UPVC conduit.
Plant rooms: Cable in heavy duty UPVC conduit, or on tray or in duct.
Plastered or rendered surfaces: Cable in UPVC conduit.
Stud walls without bulk insulation: Thermoplastic insulated and sheathed cables.
Walls filled with bulk thermal insulation: Cables in PVC conduit.
Differential movement
General: If the geotechnical site investigation report predicts differential movements between buildings
and the ground in which conduits are buried, provide movement control joints in the conduits.
Location: Adjacent to the conduit supports which are closest to the perimeter of the building.
Arrangement: Arrange conduits to minimise the number of movement control joints.
Magnitude: Accommodate the predicted movements.
Holes and chases
General: If holes and chases are required in masonry walls, provide proposals to demonstrate that the
structural integrity of the wall is maintained. Do not chase walls nominated as fire rated or acoustic.
Parallel chases or recesses on opposite faces of a wall shall not be closer than 600 mm to each other.
Chasing of blockwork: Only in core-filled hollow blocks or in solid blocks which are not designated as
structural or where there are restrictions on chasing, etc. intended to limit sound transmission (e.g. BCA)
and shall be to the Concrete blockwork chasing table.
Concrete blockwork chasing table
Block thickness (mm)
Depth of chase (maximum mm)
190
35
140
25
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Block thickness (mm)
Depth of chase (maximum mm)
90
20
Penetrations
Fire rated building elements: Seal penetrations with a system conforming to AS 4072.1.
Non-fire rated building elements: Seal penetrations around conduits and sleeves. Seal around cables
within sleeves. If the building element is acoustically rated, maintain the rating.
Sleeves
General: If piping or conduit penetrates building elements, provide metal or UPVC sleeves formed
from pipe sections as follows:
Movement: Arrange to permit normal pipe or conduit movement.
Diameter (for non fire-rated building elements): Sufficient to provide an annular space around the pipe
or pipe insulation of at least 12 mm.
Prime paint ferrous surfaces.
Terminations:
o
If cover plates are fitted: Flush with the finished building surface.
o
In fire-rated and acoustic-rated building elements: 50 mm beyond finished building
surface.
o
In floors draining to floor wastes: 50 mm above finished floor.
o
Elsewhere: 5 mm beyond finished building surface.
Termite management: To AS 3660.1.
Thickness:
Metal:
UPVC:
1 mm.
3 mm.
Sleeves for cables
General: For penetrations of cables not enclosed in conduit through ground floor slabs, beams and
external walls provide sleeves formed from UPVC pipe sections.
MIMS cables: Provide sleeves for penetrations through masonry.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
2.3
Cable support and duct systems
General
2.3.1
Aims
Responsibilities
General: Provide cable support and duct systems as documented.
2.3.2
Cross references
General
General: Conform to the General requirements (electrical) worksection.
2.3.3
Conduits Product
Conduits
Type
General: Rigid.
Sizes
Conduits:
20 mm.
Colour
Underground Power Conduits: Orange
2.3.4
Metallic conduits and fittings
Standard
Metallic conduits and fittings: AS/NZS 2053.7 or AS/NZS 2053.8.
Type
General: Screwed steel.
Corrosion protection
Steel conduits: Paint ends and joint threads with zinc rich organic primer to AS/NZS 3750.9.
2.3.5
Non-metallic conduits and fittings
General
Standards: Non-metallic conduits and fittings: AS/NZS 2053 Parts 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
Flexible conduit
General: Provide flexible conduit to connect with equipment and plant subjected to vibration. If
necessary, provide for adjustment or ease of maintenance. Provide the minimum possible length.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Associated fittings
Type: The same type and material as the conduit.
Wall boxes on UPVC conduits: For special size wall boxes not available in UPVC, provide prefabricated
earthed metal boxes.
Inspection fittings
General: Provide inspection-type fittings only in accessible locations and where exposed to view.
Joints
Type: Cemented or snap on joints.
2.3.6
Ducted wiring enclosures
Ducting
General: Provide purpose-made ducts, skirting ducts and floor ducts, incorporating segregation where
used for multiple services. Provide rigid supports. Round off sharp edges and provide bushed or
proprietary cable entries into metallic ducting.
Accessories
General: Provide purpose-made accessories and covers to match the duct system. Provide screw-fixed
covers or clip-on covers removable only with the use of tools.
Cable support: Except for horizontal runs where the covers are on top, support wiring with retaining clips
at intervals of not more than 1000 mm.
Outlet mounting: Centre mount outlets (power, voice and data) where possible (e.g. new ducts).
Corner protection angles: Provide protection angle inserts at duct corners (both internal and external
corners) to assist in maintenance of Cat. 5 and/or 6 communications wiring bending radius requirements.
2.3.7
Cable tray/ladder support systems
General
System: Provide a complete cable support system consisting of trays or ladders and including brackets,
fixings and accessories to the Wiring enclosures and cable support systems schedule and the following.
Finish: Hot dipped galvanized.
Manufacture: Provide proprietary trays, ladders, fittings and accessories from a single manufacturer for
the same support system.
Cable ladders: Run cables < 13 mm diameter on cable trays or in ducts.
2.3.8
Catenary systems
General
Catenary systems: May be used within suspended ceiling spaces in lieu of cable tray and ladder
systems.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Wire: Provide stainless steel cable and couplings for catenary systems.
2.3.9
Cable pits
General
Cable draw-in pits: Provide. Sizes given are internal dimensions.
Proprietary cable pits
Pits
1200 x 1200 mm: Provide proprietary concrete or polymer moulded pits.
In situ construction
Pits > 1200 x 1200 mm: Provide either:
Proprietary cable pits.
Construct walls and bottoms from rendered brickwork or 75 mm thick reinforced concrete. Incorporate
a waterproofing agent in the render or concrete.
Pit covers
General: Provide pit covers to suit external loads. Fit flush with the top of the pit.
Standard: To AS 3996.
Weight: < 40 kg for any section of the cover.
Lifting handles: Provide a lifting handle for each size of cover section.
Drainage
General: Provide drainage from the bottom of cable pits, either to absorption trenches filled with rubble or
to the stormwater drainage system.
Absorption trenches: Minimum size 300 x 300 x 2000 mm.
2.3.10
Columns
General
Columns: Conform to the following for fabricated columns more than 2400 mm high which are designed
to support accessories outdoors.
Design
General: Provide columns designed, manufactured and tested by a specialist manufacturer.
Dimensions: To AS 1798.
Construction
General: Hot dip galvanize columns and fittings after fabrication.
Bases: Provide columns with mounting bases for fixing to reinforced concrete footings.
Accessory mountings: Provide adjustable mountings, to suit accessories. Include provision for rigidly
clamping each item in position, once adjusted correctly.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Maintenance access: Provide pole stirrups secured to either side of the column for access to
accessories. Locate the first stirrup 3 m above ground level.
Electrical connections: Provide a recess fitted with a flush mounted cover at the base of the column for
access to cable connections and equipment.
Cable support: For connections higher than 3 m provide a catenary wire cable support system.
2.3.11
Conduit systems – installation
Set out
General: If exposed to view, install conduits in parallel runs with right angle changes of direction.
Bends
General: Install conduits with the equivalent of
2 right angled bends per cable draw-in run.
Conduits in roof spaces:
General: Locate below roof insulation and sarking. In accessible roof spaces, provide mechanical
protection for light-duty conduits.
Inspection fittings
General: Locate in accessible positions.
Draw cords
General: Provide 5 mm2 polypropylene or 3mm diameter galvanised steel wire draw cords in conduits not
in use.
Draw-in boxes
General: Provide draw-in boxes as follows:
Spacing: < 30 m.
At changes of level or direction.
Underground draw-in boxes: Provide casketed covers and seal against moisture.
Expansion
General: Allow for thermal expansion/contraction of conduits and fittings due to changes in ambient
temperature conditions. Provide expansion couplings as required.
Rigid conduits
General: Provide straight long runs, smooth and free from rags, burrs and sharp edges. Set conduits to
minimise the number of fittings.
Routes
General: Run conduits concealed in wall chases, embedded in floor slabs or installed in inaccessible
locations directly between points of termination, minimising the number of sets. Do not provide inspection
fittings.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Conduits in concrete slabs
Route: Do not run in concrete toppings. Do not run within pretensioning cable zones. Cross
pretensioning cable zones at right angles. Route to avoid crossovers and minimise the number of
conduits in any location. Space parallel conduits 50 mm apart.
Minimum cover: The greater of the conduit diameter and 20 mm.
Fixing: Fix directly to top of the bottom layer of reinforcing.
Hollow-block floors
Locate conduits in the core-filled sections of precast hollow-block type floors.
Columns
Conduits in columns:
4 per column.
25 mm diameter.
Locate conduits centrally in each column.
Bends: Enter columns via
150 mm radius bends. Do not use elbows.
Chasing: Do not chase columns.
2.3.12
Cable tray/ladder support systems – installation
Fixing to building structure
General: Fix supports to the building structure or fabric by means of 8 mm threaded rod hangers
attached to hot dipped galvanized U-brackets, or by means of proprietary brackets.
Cable fixing
General: Provide strapping or saddles suitable for fixing cable ties.
MIMS cables: provide non-magnetic straps.
Bend radius
General: Provide bends with an inside radius
cable carried.
12 times the outside diameter of the largest diameter
Cable protection
General: Provide rounded support surfaces under cables where they leave trays or ladders.
Access
General: Locate trays and ladders to provide
at least one side.
150 mm free space above and
600 mm free space on
Routes
Tray and ladder routes, where shown on drawings, shall be considered minimum requirements only.
Provide additional trays and ladder as required for cable supports using the installation methods
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
specified to avoid de-rating of cables and to maintain segregation between LV and ELV (i.e. data, voice,
broadband, EWIS, security, fire alarm, BAS, etc.) wiring systems.
Clearances
From hot water pipes: > 200 mm.
From boilers or furnaces: > 500 mm.
EMI: Locate support systems for electrical power cabling and communication cabling to minimise
electromagnetic interference.
2.3.13
Catenary systems – installation
General
Anchoring: Anchor catenary systems to the structure. Do not fix to any part of a suspended ceiling
system.
Design loads: Provide catenary systems designed to support the proposed load of the cables with a
spare capacity of 50% loading.
Fixing: Fix cables to the catenary system such that no cable is under stress due to tension or
compression. Use proprietary fixings that allow cables to be added or removed without destroying the
integrity of the system.
2.3.14
Cables in trenches – installation
Sand bed and surround
General: Provide clean sharp sand around cables and conduits installed underground.
Sealing ducts and conduits
General: Seal buried entries to ducts and conduits with waterproof seals. Seal spare ducts and conduits
immediately after installation. Seal other ducts and conduits after cable installation.
2.3.15
Columns – installation
General
General: Install columns as documented including the provision of in situ reinforced concrete footings to
the Wiring enclosures and cable support systems schedule.
2.3.16
Wiring enclosures and cable support systems schedule
Cable trays
Manufacturer
Burndy, Denco, Ezystrut
Type
31/26867/197021
Ladder tray systems with punched integral slotted rungs and
side rails and ‘Admiralty pattern’ tray with reverse stamped
perforations
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Material
Press formed metal
Finish
To AS 1397 for hot dipped zinc-coated and aluminium/zinc
coated sheet steel and strip
Tray dimensions
- Usable width
50% increase beyond initial requirements allowing for cable
spacing without de-rating
- Usable depth
19mm for subcircuit trays, 45mm for submains or where cable
loads exceed 20kg per metre
- Minimum thickness
< 150mm wide: 1mm base metal thickness (BMT)
150mm < 300mm wide: 1.2mm BMT
300mm wide: 1.6mm BMT
- Unit length
Ladder tray 3m, cable tray 2.4m
- Connector type and material
Supports
Per manufacturer’s standard
Trapeze (double-sided hanger) type. Single centre supports are
not permitted
Cable ladders
Manufacturer
Burndy, Denco, Ezystrut
Material
Steel or aluminium
Finish
Hot dipped galvanized steel or extruded structural grade
aluminium
Coating
Where exposed externally, hot dipped galvanized with a
protective coating or ‘marine grade’ aluminium
Dimensions
Usable depth
45mm minimum
Usable width
50% increase beyond initial requirements allowing for cable
spacing without de-rating
Minimum thickness
Manufacturer’s standard for medium duty (NEMA 2)
Unit length
31/26867/197021
3m or 6m
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Rung
Spacing
300mm maximum
Type
Perforated with 50% of its surface area open for air circulation
Connector type and material
Fixing to building structure
Manufacturer’s standard – metal
Direct fixing double-sided (trapeze) type hangers or brackets
(single centre supports not permitted)
Cable fixing
- Type
Proprietary cable clamps generally
Catenary systems
Maximum number of cables permitted to be
supported by a catenary system
- Lighting circuits
- Socket outlet circuits
6
6
Columns
Type
Fabricated/proprietary
Height
Refer Landscape Architects drawings as required
Sections/dimensions
Footing type/dimensions
Colour/finish
Refer structural engineering drawings and specifications
Painted in colour as selected after galvanizing
Material
2.4
Refer Landscape Architects drawings as required
Refer Landscape Architects drawings as required
Earthing
Earthing systems
Standard: Provide an earthing system.
Type: Multiple earthed neutral (MEN) system using a driven copper or copper and stainless steel
electrode (refer below for corrosive soil) or series of electrodes to the approval of the local electricity
Distributor.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Communications applications: Provide earthing systems for communications applications complying with
AS/ACIF S009.
Electrodes
General: Provide electrodes to suit soil resistivity.
Corrosive soil: Do not use stainless steel electrodes.
Earth and bonding clamps
General: Provide proprietary earthing and bonding clamps.
Standard: To AS 1882.
Footings and pipes: Bond to the building footings and metallic incoming services entry pipes.
2.5
Accessories
2.5.1
General
General: Conform to the following and as documented.
Conformity: All accessories and outlets located in close proximity are to be the same manufacture, size
and material if available.
2.5.2
Installation of accessories
General: Install accessories in conformance with the Installation of accessories table.
Flush mounting: Provide flush mounted accessories except in plant rooms.
Location: Final location of all outlets and equipment to be confirmed on site prior to installation.
Default mounting heights to centre of accessory plate:
Outlets
300 mm
Switches and controls
1100 mm
Restricted location: Do not install wall boxes across junctions of wall finishes.
Surface mounting: Proprietary mounting blocks.
Installation of accessories table
Wall construction
Installation and concealed cabling facilities
Rendered masonry partition
Flush wall box with conduit chased into wall
Double sided face brick partition
Vertically mounted flush wall box with conduit
concealed in cut bricks
Flush wall box with thermoplastic insulated cables
in conduit run in cavity and tied against inner brick
surface, or thermoplastic sheathed cables run in
cavity
Face brick external cavity wall
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Stud partition
2.5.3
Rewirable
Accessories
Standard:
General: To AS/NZS 3112.
Industrial: To AS/NZS 3123.
Pin arrangement: Mount outlets with the earth pins at the 6 o’clock position.
Mechanism: Construct the face plate and mechanism so that the mechanism cannot be displaced during
normal operation.
Indicators: Provide red indicators above or adjacent switch toggles, to be visible with switches “on”.
Types:
Stainless steel plates with black or charcoal mechanisms in prestige areas of the floor designated by
the architect and in tea-rooms/points.
Clipsal Slimline SC2000 Series or equal HPM elsewhere in either moulded plastic or metal finishes as
selected by the Architect.
Protected IP24 type in plantrooms and industrial style wet areas (e.g. garbage bin area).
Mounting Heights: Refer architectural drawings and notes on drawings. Note that special mounting
heights may be applicable for wheelchair-bound users in designated areas.
Plugs – 230/400 volt
General: Provide plugs with integral pins of the insulated type to AS/NZS 3112 for all equipment supplied
and installed.
Isolating switches
Standard: To AS/NZS 3133.
Type: To control whole current to the equipment or appliance connected. As for General purpose socket
outlets for the location identified.
Minimum rating: 20A 230 V/400 V a.c.
Special purpose power outlets (15 amp) for Comms Racks etc and direct connected with isolator for
equipment shall be provided for storage hot water units, roller doors, gates, etc.
Emergency stop switches
Standard: To IEC 60947-5-5.
3-phase outlets
Construction: Surface mounted type of high-impact resistant plastic, with flap lid on the outlet.
Minimum: 20 A, 400 V a.c.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Pin arrangement: Five round pins mounted with earth pins at the 6 o’clock position, neutral pins in the
centre and the red, white and blue phases in a clockwise sequence when viewed from the front of the
outlet.
Plug: Provide a matching plug top for each outlet.
Installation of ceiling mounted appliances
Connections: Appliances: Provide flush mounted outlets on the ceiling next to support brackets.
Connections: Fixed equipment: Provide concealed permanent connections.
Fixing: Provide support brackets fixed through ceiling to the building structure. Brace appliances that
have excessive bending moments, are heavy or vibrate, to prevent horizontal movement.
Lighting Outlets
Pin arrangement
Standard: 3 flat pin with looping terminal.
Emergency lighting: 4 flat pin if self-contained emergency lighting is to be connected.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
3.
Switchboards
General
3.1.1
Standards
General
Standards: To AS/NZS 3439.3.
3.1.2
Interpretations
Definitions
Proprietary assemblies: Low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies available as a catalogue
item, consisting of manufacturer's standard layouts and equipment.
Custom-built assemblies: Low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies manufactured to order.
Rated currents: Rated currents are continuous uninterrupted current ratings within the assembly
environment under in-service operating conditions.
Rated short-circuit currents: Maximum prospective symmetrical root mean square (r.m.s.) current values
at rated operational voltage, at each assembly incoming supply terminal, excluding effects of current
limiting devices.
Abbreviations
TTA: Type tested assemblies.
NTTA: Non-type tested assemblies.
PTTA: Partially type tested assemblies
3.1.3
Aims
Responsibilities
General: Provide switchboard components as follows and as documented.
3.1.4
Cross references
General
General: Conform to the General requirements (electrical) worksection.
3.1.5
Submissions
Calculations
General: Submit detailed certified calculations verifying design characteristics.
Standard: To AS 3865 and AS 4388.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Type test data
General: Submit type test certificates for components, functional units and assemblies. Verify that type
tests and internal arcing-fault tests, if any, were carried out at not less than the designated fault currents
at rated operational voltage.
Alterations to TTAs: Submit records of alterations made to assemblies since the tests.
Routine tests
General: Submit reports.
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings showing:
Types, model numbers and ratings of assemblies.
Component details, functional units and transient protection.
Detailed dimensions.
Shipping sections, general arrangement, plan view, front elevations and cross-section of each
compartment.
Projections from the assembly that may affect clearances or inadvertent operation, such as handles,
knobs, arcing-fault venting flaps and withdrawable components.
Fault level and rated short circuit capacity characteristics.
IP rating.
Fixing details for floor or wall mounting.
Front and back equipment connections and top and bottom cable entries.
Door swings.
External and internal paint colours and paint systems.
Quantity, brand name, type and rating of control and protection equipment.
Construction and plinth details, ventilation openings, internal arcing-fault venting and gland plate
details.
Terminal block layouts and control circuit identification.
Single line power and circuit diagrams.
Details of mains and submain routes within assemblies.
Busbar arrangements, links and supports, spacing between busbar phases and spacing between
assemblies, the enclosure and other equipment and clearances to earthed metals.
Dimensions of busbars and interconnecting cables in sufficient detail for calculations to be performed.
Form of separation and details of shrouding of terminals.
Labels and engraving schedules.
3.1.6
Specific Requirements
Provide new circuit breakers in existing distribution boards to accommodate new circuits.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Balance the loads across the three phases.
3.1.7
Balancing of Loads
Balance the electrical load at each switchboard evenly, over the three phases of the supply.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the final installation having:
a) An overall power factor 0.85
b) The three phases balanced and,
c) Within limits voltage drop
All to the satisfaction of the Supply Authority.
In calculating voltage drops the current used for mains and submain cables shall be equal to the
calculated maximum demand plus 20% of the rating or setting of the protective device, whichever is the
lesser.
3.2
Design
Approved manufacturers
NHP, Schneider, Cutler Hammer.
Layout
Position equipment to provide safe and easy access for operation and maintenance. Consider functional
relationships between items of equipment in the laying out of equipment on the assembly.
Service conditions
Normal service conditions.
Rated currents
Rated currents: Minimum continuous uninterrupted rated currents within the assembly environment,
under in-service operating conditions.
Fault levels
Rated short-circuit currents: Maximum prospective symmetrical r.m.s. current values at rated operational
voltage, at each assembly incoming supply terminal, excluding effects of current limiting devices.
Assembly short-circuit capacity characteristic: Rate main circuit supply and functional units as follows:
Back-up protective device provided: Rated short-circuit current for the maximum opening time of the
associated protective device.
Tested levels: Do not operate equipment at fault levels higher than tested levels, unless provided with
fault current limiting back-up protection.
Statutory authority’s equipment
General: Liaise with the supply authority with regard to the installation and coordinate with their
protective and control equipment.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Uniformity of switchgear
General: Ensure that all switchgear and components within assemblies and sub-assemblies are of the
same manufacture or brand. For example, circuit breakers on the main switchboard, generator main
control and downstream distribution boards and switchboards shall be provided from a common
manufacturer to ensure full coordination with discrimination.
Discrimination and coordination
General: Switchboard and distribution board assembly submains and final subcircuit protection devices
shall provide complete discrimination between upstream and downstream devices. Discrimination and
coordination shall be achieved for switchgear in mechanical and hydraulics assemblies and control
panels in addition to the switchgear in distribution boards and switchboard assemblies specified in this
worksection.
Distribution boards
The new building shall have distribution boards installed in selected locations around the market to
provide electrical services.
Each board shall be a form 1 and have an IP66 degree of protection. They will be equipped with local
isolation and circuit breakers necessary for connection of all submain and sub-circuit cabling required for
equipment, lighting and power installation.
Residual current protection circuit breakers will be installed to distribution boards for connection of subcircuit cabling associated with general-purpose outlets (GPO’s), lighting, etc.
Generally distribution boards will be of the wall or floor mounted sheet metal cubicle type suitable for
accommodation in separate electrical cupboards
Separation
Generally: Form 1 less than 200 Amps capacity.
Moulded case circuit breakers: Mount < 4 functional units within a common separated subsection.
Moulded case or miniature overcurrent circuit breakers rated up to 100 A, connected to circuits for
lighting, general purpose outlets and small single or multi-phase electrical accessories: Mount any
number of circuit breakers within a Form 1 separated subsection, provided the circuit breakers are
mounted on an approved multi-pole busbar chassis assembly, concealed with an escutcheon panel and
removable door.
Spare facilities
Provide at least 25% spare pole capacity after provision of 25% extra over RCBOs in equipped
mountings.
Connection
Indoor cable entries: Top and bottom.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
3.3
Switchboard Construction
3.3.1
General
General
General: Provide rigid, ventilated, insect screened enclosures, giving the documented enclosure,
separation and degree of protection.
Front connected – main distribution switchboards.
Supporting structure: Front access assemblies with frontal areas < 2 m2: wall mounted.
Protection (IP) rating: IP 66 minimum.
Supply authority’s equipment
General: Install equipment supplied by the supply authority, and provide wiring to complete the
installation.
Tariff meter compartment: Install the retailer/supply authority's tariff metering equipment in a separated,
sealed meter compartment or separate meter panel.
Layout
General: Position equipment to provide safe and easy access for operation and maintenance. Group
devices according to function.
Equipment on doors: Set out in a logical manner in functional unit groups, so it is accessible without the
use of tools or keys.
Segregation
General: Segregate BCA emergency equipment from non-emergency equipment by means of metal
partitions designed to prevent the spread of a fault from non-emergency equipment to emergency
equipment.
Enclosure materials
General: Fabricate from sheet metal of rigid folded and welded construction. Obtain approval for nonwelded forms of construction.
Material:
1.6 mm thick metallic-coated sheet steel.
Coating class:
Indoor assemblies: Z200.
Outdoor assemblies: Z450.
Insect proofing
General: Cover ventilation openings with non-combustible and corrosion resistant 1 mm mesh.
Equipment mounting panels
General: To support the weight of mounted equipment.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Metallic panels: Construct from
welded to enclosure sides.
3 mm thick metal with heavy metal angle supports or plates bolted or
Non-metallic panels: Provide non-metallic panels selected to suit the weight of the mounted equipment
and design the mounting structure for stability and stiffness.
Non-metallic boards: To IEC 60893-1.
Equipment fixing
Spacing: Provide 50 mm minimum clearance between the following:
Busbars for lifts, fire services and building emergency services.
General installation services, busbars and equipment.
Mounting: Bolts, set screws fitted into tapped holes in metal mounting panels, studs or proprietary
attachment clips. Provide accessible equipment fixings which allow equipment changes after assembly
commissioning.
Installation: For lightweight equipment, provide combination rails and proprietary clips.
Earth continuity
General: Strip painted surfaces and coat with corrosion resistant material immediately before bolting to
the earth bar. Provide serrated washers under bolt heads and nuts at painted, structural metal-to-metal
joints.
Construction
Supporting structure: Provide concealed fixings or brackets to allow assemblies to be mounted and fixed
in position without removing equipment.
3.3.2
Cable entries
General
General: Provide cable entry facilities within assembly cable zones for incoming and outgoing power and
control cabling. Provide sufficient clear space within each enclosure next to cable entries to allow
incoming and outgoing cables and wiring to be neatly run and terminated, without undue bunching and
sharp bends.
Spare entry space: Provide 33% spare space for future cables. Refer drawings also for spare space
requirements for separate busbar sections.
Cover and gland plates
Cover plates: Provide 150 mm maximum width cover plates butted together and covering the continuous
cable entry slot.
Gland plates: Provide removable gland plates fitted with gaskets to maintain the degree of protection.
Materials: 1.5 mm thick steel, 5 mm thick composite material or laminated phenolic. 6 mm thick brass for
MIMS cables and cable glands.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
3.3.3
Doors and covers
General
Provide lockable doors with a circuit card holder.
Door layout
Maximum width: 900 mm.
Minimum swing: At least 90º.
Door stays: Provide stays to outdoor assembly doors.
Adjacent doors: Space adjacent doors to allow both to open to 90º at the same time.
Door construction
Protection: Provide single right angle return on all sides and fit suitable resilient sealing rubber to provide
the documented IP rating and prevent damage to paintwork.
Hinges: Provide corrosion-resistant pintle hinges or integrally constructed hinges to support doors. For
removable doors, provide staggered pin lengths to achieve progressive engagement as doors are fitted.
Provide 3 hinges for doors higher than 1000 mm. Provide restraining devices and opposed hinges for
non lift-off doors.
Door hardware: Provide the following:
Corrosion resistant lever-type handles, operating a latching system with latching bar and guides
strong enough to withstand explosive force resulting from fault conditions within the assembly.
Dual, edge mounted, corrosion resistant T handles with provision for key locking cylinder.
Captive, corrosion resistant knurled thumb screws.
Locking: Incorporate cylinder locks in the latching system. Provide cylinder locks matched to the
principal’s requirements. Key alike, 2 keys per assembly.
Door mounted equipment: Protect or shroud door mounted equipment and terminals to prevent
inadvertent contact with live terminals, wiring, or both.
Earthing: Maintain earth continuity to door mounted indicating or control equipment with multi-stranded,
flexible earth wire, or braid of equal cross-sectional area, bonded to the door.
Covers
Maximum dimensions: 900 mm wide and 1.2 m 2 surface area.
Fixing: Fix to frames with at least 4 fixings. Provide corrosion-resistant acorn nuts if the cover exceeds
600 mm in width. Rest cover edges on the cubicle body or on mullions. Do not provide interlocked
covers.
Handles: Provide corrosion resistant D type handles.
Escutcheons
General: For doors enclosing circuit breakers, provide escutcheon plates as barriers between operating
mechanisms and live parts.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Escutcheon plates
General: Provide plates or removable covers with neat circuit breaker toggle cut-outs allowing
interchangeability of 1, 2 and 3 pole circuit breakers. Provide corrosion-resistant lifting handles or knobs.
Provide unused circuit breaker toggle cut-outs with blanking in-fill pole covers.
Maximum dimensions: 900 mm wide and 1.2 m 2 surface area.
3.3.4
Factory finishes
General
Standard: To AS 2700.
Extent: Apply protective coatings to internal and external metal surfaces of assembly cabinets including
covers, except to stainless steel, galvanized, electroplated, or anodised surfaces and to ventilation mesh
covers.
Finish coats: Thermoset powder coating to APAS-0155/1 or two-pack liquid coating of APAS-2971 primer
and proprietary or epoxy acrylic full gloss spray finish to Factory finishes schedule.
Factory finishes schedule
Mounting structure (brackets)
To match enclosure
Enclosure
Escutcheons
Indoor assemblies: Architect to confirm colour
Outdoor assemblies: Architect to confirm colour
Assembly interior: Architect to confirm colour
Removable equipment panels: Off white Y35
Doors
To match enclosure
Plinths
Black
3.3.5
Busbars
General
General: Provide main circuit supply busbars within assemblies, extending from incoming supply
terminals to the line side of protective equipment for outgoing functional units and for future functional
units.
Standards: To AS 3768, AS 3865 and AS 4388.
Submissions: Submit design calculations of non-type tested or non-proprietary busbar assemblies.
Definitions
Incoming busbars: Busbars connecting incoming terminals to line side terminals of main switches.
Main circuit supply busbars: Busbars connecting incoming functional unit terminals, or incoming busbars
where no main switches are included, to outgoing functional unit terminals or outgoing functional unit teeoffs.
Tee-off busbars: Busbars connecting main busbars to incoming terminals of outgoing functional units.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Busbar construction
Material: Hard-drawn high-conductivity electrolytic tough pitched copper alloy bars, designation 110.
Temperature rise limits - active and neutral conductors:
Maximum rated current temperature rise limits: 65
calculation to AS 3768 or AS 4388.
1.5ºC above a 40 ºC ambient by type test or
Maximum short-circuit withstand current temperature rise limits: 160ºC by calculation to AS 3865.
Cross section: Rectangular with radiused edges.
Supports: Sufficient to withstand thermal and magnetic stresses due to maximum prospective fault
currents.
Support material: Non-hygroscopic insulation capable of holding busbars at 105ºC.
Flexible busbars: Not permitted.
Phase sequence
General: For main busbars and connections to switching devices, set-out phase sequence for phases A,
B and C, from left-to-right, top-to-bottom and front-to-back when viewed from the front of the assembly.
Colour coding
General: Provide 25 mm minimum width colour bands permanently applied to busbars at 500 mm
maximum intervals with at least one colour band for each busbar section within each compartment.
Active busbars: Red, white and blue respectively for the A, B and C phase.
Neutral busbar: Black.
MEN link: Green-yellow and black.
Protective earth busbar: Green-yellow.
Restrictions: Do not provide adhesive type colour bands.
Busbar systems
Type: Multi-pole proprietary busbar assemblies or busbar systems, verified for short circuit capacity and
temperature rise-limits by type tests.
Current carrying capacity
Active conductors: Take into account thermal stresses due to short circuit current, assuming magnetic
material enclosures located indoors in well-ventilated rooms and 90ºC final temperature.
Neutral conductors: Size to match incoming neutral conductor current carrying capacity.
Protective earth conductors: Size for at least 50% of the rated short circuit withstand current for 100% of
the time duration.
Tee-off busbars current rating
For individual outgoing functional units: Equal to maximum frame size rating of the functional unit.
For multiple functional units: Equal to the diversity factors of AS 3439.1, based on frame size rating.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
MEN links
MEN links > 10 mm2 in cross-section: Bolted removable busbar links stamped MEN LINK, located in the
incoming compartment, between neutral and earth busbars.
Fault current limiters
General: Rate busbars connected to fault current limiters to 100% of the indicated fault current limiter
circuit breaker frame size or fuse base rating.
Busbar links
General: For current transformers, provide removable busbar links
450 mm long.
Cable connection flags
General: Provide and support busbar flags for equipment with main terminals too small for cable lugs.
Provide flags sized to suit cable lug termination, with current rating of at least the maximum equipment
frame size.
Phase isolation: Provide phase isolation between flags where the minimum clearance distances phaseto-phase and phase-to-earth are below the component terminal spacing.
Jointing
Type: High tensile steel bolts, washers and nuts, with lock nuts or locking tabs. Do not use tapped holes
and studs or the like for jointing current carrying sections.
Busbar insulation
Active and neutral busbars and joints: Select from the following:
Polyethylene: At least 0.4 mm thick with dielectric strength of 2.5 kV r.m.s for 1 minute, applied by a
fluidised bed process in which the material is phase coloured and directly cured onto the bars.
Close fitting busbar insulation mouldings at least 1 mm thick.
Heat shrink material: Only on rounded edge busbars.
Taped joints: Apply non-adhesive stop-off type tape, coloured to match adjacent insulation and half
lapped to achieve a thickness at least that of the solid insulation.
Damaged insulation: Repair damaged insulation before energising.
3.3.6
Neutral links and earth bars
Terminals
General: Provide terminals for future circuits.
Links
Assembly capacity > 36 poles: Provide neutral links and earth bars at the top and bottom of the circuit
breaker section.
Assembly capacity
36 poles: Provide links and bars at the point of entry of incoming supply cables.
Mounting: Mount neutral links on an insulated base.
Control circuits: Provide separate neutral links and earth bars.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Labels: Provide labels for neutral and earth terminals.
Cables > 10 mm 2: Provide bolts or studs.
3.3.7
Internal wiring
Wiring
General: Cable type: 0.6/1 kV copper cables. Provide V-90HT insulation where directly connected to
active and neutral busbars.
Cable interconnections
General: For the main circuit supply, provide cable interconnections as follows:
1.5 mm2 internal cables, with minimum V75 insulation rating with stranded copper conductors rated
to AS/NZS 3008.1.1. Provide cables with current ratings suitable for the internal assembly ambient air
temperature and for temperature rise limits of equipment within the assembly.
Run cables clear of busbars and metal edges.
Provide cables capable of withstanding maximum thermal and magnetic stresses associated with
relevant fault level and duration.
Run cables neatly. Provide slotted trunking sized for future cables or tie at 150 mm maximum
intervals with ties strong enough to withstand magnetic stresses created at the specified fault current.
Do not provide adhesive supports.
Ensure wiring for future equipment can be installed without removal of existing equipment.
Identify power and control cables at both ends with neat fitting ring type ferrules agreeing with record
circuit diagrams. Mark to AS/NZS 4383.
Terminate control cables and motor control circuits in tunnel terminals or, if necessary, provide
suitable palm type lugs and correct crimp tool.
For equipment mounted on hinged doors run cables on the hinge side to avoid restricting the door
opening. Bundle cables with spiral wrap PVC.
If recommended by device manufacturers, provide shielded wiring.
Adjacent circuit breakers: If suitable proprietary multi-pole busbar assemblies are available to link
adjacent circuit breakers, do not provide cable interconnections.
2
Cables > 6 mm
Terminations:
Tunnel terminals: Single cables.
Other connection points or terminals:
2 cables.
Doors: Do not run cables to hinged doors or removable panels.
Supports:
Spacing at enclosure:
Spacing generally:
31/26867/197021
200 mm from a termination.
400 mm.
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Strength: Capable of withstanding forces exerted during fault conditions.
Single core cables rated
300 A: Do not provide ferrous type metal cable saddles.
Terminals marked: Terminate marked cables for connection to external controls in correspondingly
marked terminals within the assembly.
Control and indication circuits
General: Provide conductors sized to suit the current carrying capacity of the particular circuit.
Minimum size: 1 mm2 with 32/0.2 stranding.
Cable colours
General: Colour code wiring as follows:
A phase: Red.
B phase: White.
C phase: Blue.
Neutral: Black.
Earthing: Green-yellow.
3.4
Switchboard Components
3.4.1
Switch-isolator and combination fuse-switch units
General
Standard: To AS 60947.1 and AS/NZS 3947.3.
Poles: 3.
Operation: Independent manual operation including positive ON/OFF indicator.
Shrouding: Effective over range of switch positions.
Rated breaking capacity:
3.4.2
rated full load current.
Moulded case and miniature circuit breakers
General
Moulded case breakers: To AS 60947.1 and AS 60947.2.
Miniature circuit breakers: To AS/NZS 60898.1 or AS 3111.
Operation: Independent manual operation including positive ON/OFF indicator.
Isolation facility: Required.
Mounting: Mount circuit breakers so that the ON/OFF and current rating indications are clearly visible
with covers or escutcheons in position. Align operating toggles of each circuit breaker in the same plane.
Utilisation category: Moulded case breakers:
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Final subcircuits category: Category A.
Mains and submains: Category B.
Trip settings: Set as documented, seal, and label.
Trip units: Connect circuit breakers with interchangeable and integrally fused trip units so that trip units
are not live when circuit breaker contacts are open.
3.4.3
Residual current operated circuit breakers
Standard: To AS/NZS 3190.
Integral non-overload protection type: To AS/NZS 61008.1.
Integral overload protection type: To AS/NZS 61009.1.
Modular type: To AS 60947.2.
Mounting: Comply with Moulded case and miniature circuit breakers, in Circuit breakers.
Maximum tripping current: 30 mA.
Nuisance tripping: Breakers shall be specifically suitable for operation in demanding environments where
disturbances (e.g. from transients, leakage currents, switching operation of capacitors, DC component in
currents, etc.) can cause nuisance tripping or blinding faults (non-tripping) of RCD.
Approved manufacture: Schneider Si range (for normal environments) and SiE range (for humid and/or
environments polluted by aggressive agents such as salt spray and chlorinated compounds), or equal
Terasaki/NHP.
3.4.4
Current transformers for Metering and Sub-metering
Standard
Measurement current transformers: To AS 60044.1.
Test links
General: Provide test links for connection of calibration instruments and meters and for shorting of
current transformer secondaries.
Energy meters, maximum demand meters, ammeters and protection relays: Provide with rail-mounted
links consisting of screw-clamped slide links and an earth link.
Test studs
General: For energy and demand meters provide rail-mounted potential test studs or plug connections
next to associated current transformer links. Provide at least one set of test studs for each compartment.
Accuracy classification
Energy measurements: Class 1.
Indicating instruments: Class 3.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Ratings
Rated short time current: At least the short time withstand current equivalent of the circuit in which the
transformer is installed.
Rated primary current: At least equal to the current rating of the functional unit.
Secondary windings: Rated at 5 A, burden of 0.4
(10 VA) with star point earthed.
Overload: At least capable of withstanding 20% overload above the primary rating.
Type
General: If practicable, cast resin encapsulated window-type with busbar clamping devices. Otherwise
wound-primary type with mounting feet.
Installation
General: Install transformers to permit easy removal.
Removable links: Provide removable links of minimum length for transformers fitted on busbar systems.
Connection details: To be clear and concise for both primary and secondary windings.
3.4.5
Instruments and meters
Standard
General purpose electronic induction watthour meters: To AS 62053.21.
Accuracy
Indicating instruments and accessories:
Class 1.5.
Thermal maximum demand indicators: Class 3.
Electricity (sub-) meters: Class 1.
Power factor meters, phase angle meters and synchroscopes: 2 electrical degrees maximum error.
Transducers: Class 0.5.
Mounting
General: DIN or flush mount meters on hinged panels.
Labels
General: If associated exclusively with one phase, label meters RED, WHITE, or BLUE as applicable.
If associated with a downstream distribution board, label with the name of the distribution board.
Protection devices
Meter potential protection devices: Group together behind associated meter cover or hinged door,
preferably next to current transformer test links.
Accessories
General: Mount next to associated instruments, inside cabinets.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Transducers
General: If necessary for transducer operation, provide auxiliary supply. Connect outputs to dedicated
rail-mounted isolating type terminals.
Ammeters
Type: Moving iron type oil dampened for motor starter circuits.
Overscale: For ammeters subject to motor starting currents, overscale to at least 5 x full load current.
Selector switches: 4-position type with positions designated R/W/B/OFF. Mount under or beside relevant
ammeters.
Voltmeters
Type: Moving iron.
Selector switches: 7-position voltage transfer type for measurement of phase-to-phase and phase-toneutral voltages with off. Mount under or next to relevant voltmeters.
Wattmeters and varmeters
General: Suitable for balanced 3 phase, 4 wire loads. Connect to measurement transducers.
Hours-run meters
General: 6 figure (minimum), horizontal linear digits dial with last digit read-out in 0.1 hour increments.
Watthour meters
Type: Electronic type.
3-phase metering: Polyphase meters suitable for balanced 3 phase, 4 wire loads.
1 or 2 phase metering: Single phase meters.
Current rating: To suit load and overload conditions. Provide direct connect meters suitable for current
range of 15 to 100 A and meters with current transformers suitable to 5 A secondary. Each meter shall
be pre-configured by the manufacturer for the required CT ratio and be labelled to show this or
incorporate dip switches to allow setting of the CT ratio.
Function: Measuring and recording kWh pulses via relay outputs for use by the BAS and ABGR energy
monitoring system.
Pulses: Each pulse shall represent an energy value of 0.1 kWh and have a duration not less than 250
msec.
Display: Provide a direct reading LCD or LED display, 3 x 4, of the large figure type visible from the front
of the display. Mark on the scale the metering transformer ratios and the multiplying factor applied to the
meter constant.
Isolation: Provide isolation transformers to eliminate interference/inaccuracy with readings.
Covers: Seal main covers.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
3.4.6
Control devices and switching elements
Standards
General: To AS 60947.1 and AS 60947.5.1.
Switching elements:
Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latching function: To AS 60947.5.4.
Electromechanical control circuit devices: To AS 60947.5.1.
Proximity switches: To AS 60947.5.2.
Rotary switches
General: Cam operated type with switch positions arranged with displacement of 60º.
Off position: Locate at the 12 o’clock position. Test positions must spring return to off position.
Rated operational current: At least 6 A at 230 V a.c.
Escutcheon plates: Provide rectangular plates securely fixed to the assembly panel. Identify switch
position and function.
Control relays
Standards: To AS 60947.5.1.
Operation: Suitable for continuous operation. Provide relays selected in conformance with the Control
relay selection table.
Construction: Plug-in types. Receptacle bases with captive clips which can be operated without using
tools.
Contact elements: Electrically separate, double break with silver alloy, non-welding contacts.
Configuration: For standard relays, provide assemblies with 2 sets of contacts and expandable to 8
sets of contacts in the same assembly. Provide at least one normally-open and one normally-closed
contact.
On site conversion: Provide contact blocks readily convertible to either normally-open or normally-closed
contacts.
Control relay selection table
Relay type
Minimum
contact rating
Interchangeable
1
Minimum
Base
mechanical life
(million
operations)
5
Plug-in
1.25IL
Yes
Minimum
number of
contact
elements
2
2
10
Plug-in
5 A at 240 V
Yes
2
3
10
Fixed mounting 5 A at 240 V
Yes
4
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Time delay relays
Adjustable range: Adjustable over the full timing range with timing repeatability within
setting.
12.5% of nominal
Electronic relays: Incorporate light emitting diodes indicating energisation states of relays.
Synchronous relays
General: Provide synchronous motor drive type relay fitted with anti-stalling device which protects
gearing during normal operation.
Phase failure relays
General: Provide separate solid-state phase failure relays which release at the following:
< 85% of normal voltage.
Single phase failure.
Reverse phase sequence after an appropriate time delay.
Sensing circuit: To reject induced voltage spikes and disturbances with frequencies other than 50 Hz.
Back-up protection: Provide high rupturing capacity fuses to each phase.
Push-buttons
Type: Oil-tight, minimum 22 mm diameter, or 22 x 22 mm.
Rated operational current: At least 4 A at 240 V a.c.
Emergency stop devices with mechanical latching: To AS/NZS 3947.5.5.
Marking: Identify functions of each push-button. For latched STOP or EMERGENCY STOP pushbuttons, provide label with instructions for releasing latches.
3.4.7
Semiconductor controllers and contactors
General
General: Provide semiconductor controllers and contactors rated for the characteristics of the controlled
load.
Standard: To AS/NZS 3947.4.3.
3.4.8
Indicator lights
Standard
General: To AS 60947.5.1.
Neon indicators
General: 240 V, 12 mm diameter with in-built resistor.
LED indicators
General: 12 or 24 V as necessary, in corrosion-resistant bezel, nominal 5 mm diameter.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Press-to-test
Compartments/subsections with < 5 indicating lights: Provide each indicating light with a fitted integral
press-to-test lamp actuator.
Compartments/subsections with
3.4.9
5 indicating lights: Provide a common press-to-test lamp push-button.
Indicating counters
General
General: Provide the following:
At least 6 digits.
Digits at least 3.5 mm high.
Continuous duty rated.
Non-reset type.
500 V surge diverters.
3.4.10
Alarm annunciators
General
General: Provide the following:
Labelled annunciator illuminated windows, to indicate status and alarm conditions.
Lamp test acknowledge-mute and reset individual push-buttons.
Audible alarm and associated logic circuitry.
Mode of operation
General: Provide the following functions:
Fault conditions: To initiate flashing of appropriate annunciator lamps and sounding of audible alarms.
Operation of acknowledge and mute buttons: To silence audible alarms and change annunciator
lamps to the steady state on condition.
Window: To extinguish only when fault condition has been cleared and alarm reset push-button has
been activated.
Subsequent alarms on other inputs: To reactivate the audible alarm and flash the appropriate
annunciator lamp.
Resetting: After correction of the fault condition, provide on-site choice of either automatic resetting or
manual resetting at the annunciator panel.
Type
General: Extra-low voltage, solid state, flush mounted, window type.
Lamps
General: Provide annunciators with 2 extra-low voltage lamps per window.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Rated voltage of lamps105% of the annunciator system voltage.
Replacing: Changeable from front of panel without affecting condition of annunciator.
Vibration: Provide lamps which do not disconnect due to vibration.
Extra-low voltage power supply
General: Provide an extra-low voltage power supply for the alarm annunciator.
Windows
Nominal size: 15 x 35 mm.
Engraving: Filled in black.
Background colours: White for status monitoring, red for alarms and shutdown functions.
3.4.11
Audible alarm devices
Sound level
General: The greater of the following:
- 65 dB(A) at 1 m.
- 15 dB(A) above ambient sound levels at any location in designated areas.
3.4.12
Extra-low voltage transformers
General
General: Provide the following:
Centre tap on secondary winding.
Primary and secondary windings wired out on opposite sides of transformer case.
Primary and secondary windings separated by means of an earthed screen wired out to an insulated
terminal.
Transformer rating 125% of maximum output load, taking account of degree of ventilation and
ambient temperature within assembly, and supplied load.
3.4.13
Spares cabinet
General
General: Provide a spares cabinet with main name plate, labelled shelves and non-lockable door. Size
for storing racking handles, special tools, spare lamps, spare fuse links and other equipment necessary
for satisfactory assembly operation.
Location: Either of the following:
Incorporated into assembly enclosure.
Wall mounted in main switchroom.
Finish: To match assembly.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
3.5
Execution
3.5.1
Marking and labelling
General
General: Provide labels including control and circuit equipment ratings, functional units, notices for
operational and maintenance personnel, incoming and outgoing circuit rating, sizes and origin of supply
and kW ratings of motor starters.
Labels on assembly exteriors
Manufacturer’s name: Required.
Assemblies: Label with essential markings.
Designation labels: For other than main assemblies, provide designation label stating source of electrical
supply. Identify separate sections of enclosures.
Assembly controls: Label controls and fault current limiters, including the following:
Circuit designation for main switches, main controls and submains controls.
Details of consumers mains and submains.
Incoming busbar or cable rating to first tee-off.
Fuse link size.
Labels on assembly interiors
General: Provide labels for equipment within assemblies. Locate so that it is clear which equipment is
referred to, and so that lettering is not obscured by equipment or wiring.
Moulded case circuit breakers: If circuit breaker manufacturer’s markings are obscured by operating
handle mechanisms or motor operators, provide additional markings open to view on, or next to, the
circuit breaker.
Arrestors: Label each group of primary arrestors, stating their purpose and the necessary characteristics.
Danger, warning and caution notices
Busbars: If polymer membrane coating is used without further insulation, provide warning notices on the
front cover near the main switch or local main switch and on rear covers, indicating that busbars are not
insulated.
Fault current limiters: In assembly sections containing fault current limiter fuses provide caution notices
fixed next to the fault current limiters, stating that replacement fuse links are to match the installed fuse
link ratings, make and characteristics. Provide separate label stating make and fault current limiting fuse
ratings.
Externally controlled equipment: To prevent accidental contact with live parts, provide warning notices for
equipment on assemblies not isolated by main switch or local main switch.
Stand-by power: Provide warning notices stating that assemblies may be energised from the stand-by
supply at any time.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Insulation and shrouding: For insulation or shrouding requiring removal during normal assembly
maintenance, provide danger notices with appropriate wording for replacement of insulation shrouding
before re-energising assemblies.
Positioning: Locate notices so that they can be readily seen, next to or, if impracticable, on busbar
chamber covers of functional units and behind the front cover of functional units. Provide circuit
identification labels in the cabling chamber of each functional unit, located next to external terminations.
Schedule cards
General: For general light and power distribution boards, provide schedule cards of minimum size 200 x
150 mm, with typewritten text showing the following as-installed information:
Submain designation, rating and short-circuit protective device.
Light and power circuit numbers and current ratings, cable sizes and type and areas supplied.
Mounting: Mount schedule cards in a holder fixed to the inside of the assembly or cupboard door, next to
the distribution circuit switches. Protect with hard plastic transparent covers.
Single-line diagrams
Custom-built assemblies: Provide single-line diagrams.
Format: Non-fading print, at least A3 size showing the situation as installed.
Mounting: Enclose in a non-reflective PVC frame and wall mount close to assembly.
Marking cables
General: Identify the origin of all wiring by means of legible indelible marking.
Identification labels: Provide durable labels fitted to each core and sheath, permanently marked with
numbers, letters or both to suit the connection diagrams.
Multicore cables and trefoil groups: Identify multicore cables and trefoil groups at each end with durable
non-ferrous tags clipped around each cable or trefoil group.
3.6
Completion
3.6.1
Completion Tests
General
Carry out the following tests:
Electrical operation.
Dielectric.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
3.7
Installations
3.7.1
General
Fixing
General: Before making inter-panel connections, fix assemblies and metering equipment enclosures into
position, level and plumb.
Cable entries
General: Neatly adapt one or more cable entry plates, if fitted, to accept incoming cable enclosure.
Provide the minimum number of entry plates to leave spare capacity for future cable entries. Do not run
cables into the top of weatherproof assemblies.
Single core cables rated > 300 A: Pass separately through non-ferrous gland plates. Do not provide
metal saddles.
Cable enclosures
Cable enclosures: Continue cable enclosures to or into assemblies and fit cable entry plates so that the
IP rating of the assembly and the fire rating of the cable are maintained.
Cable supports
Cable supports: Support or tie mains and submains cables within 200 mm of terminations. Provide cable
supports suitable for stresses resulting from short circuit conditions.
3.8
Training of Operation and Maintenance Staff
General
Provide training schedule and agenda and list of instructors from original equipment manufacturer
(OEM) and the trader contractor.
Provide classroom training
Provide field training with demonstration on operation and maintenance.
Review O&M documentation and test results.
Review spare part list.
Handing-Over and Employer’s Acceptance
Endorse defects list.
Provide all keys
Initiate certificate of readiness for handing-over.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
3.9
Selections
3.9.1
Proprietary switchboards
Construction requirements schedule
Assembly designation
Location
Refer drawings
Colour
Manufacturer’s standard unless exposed to view
where colour shall be to contract administrator’s
selection
Bus bar rated current (minimum)
Rated short-circuit current (minimum)
Form of separation (minimum)
Limiting overall dimensions (width, height, depth)
Main isolator rated current (minimum)
Future circuits required
Surge diversion required
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
160A
20kA for 0.2 seconds
Form 1
To fit the spaces allocated – manufacture
switchboards to suit
160A
20% spare poles
No
4.
Lighting
4.1
General
4.1.1
Aims
Responsibilities
General: Provide lighting as documented.
4.1.2
Project requirements
Proprietary equipment
General: The requirements of this specification for lamps, ballasts and luminaire control equipment override the specifications inherent in the selection of a particular make and model of luminaire.
Minimum energy performance standards (MEPS)
General: To AS/NZS 4783.2 and AS/NZS 4782.2 and the following.
EEI classification: Minimum Energy Efficiency Index performance classification for lamps and ballasts
shall be A1 for dimmable electronic, A3 for electronic and B1 for ferromagnetic.
4.1.3
Cross references
General
General: Conform to the General requirements (electrical) worksection.
Associated worksections
Associated worksections: Conform to the following:
- Low voltage power systems.
- Wiring and Accessories
4.1.4
Standards
Standards
EMC compliance: To AS/NZS CISPR 15.
Energy efficiency for ballasts and lamps: To AS/NZS 4783.2.
Fixed general purpose luminaires: To AS/NZS 60598.2.1.
Floodlights: To AS/NZS 60598.2.5.
Harmonic limits: AS/NZS 61000.3.2.
Luminaires, general requirements and tests: To AS/NZS 60598.1.
Luminaires: To AS/NZS 60598.1.
Luminaires with built-in transformers for filament lamps: To AS/NZS 60598.2.6.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Portable general purpose luminaires: To AS/NZS 60598.2.4.
Recessed luminaires: To AS/NZS 60598.2.2.
Road lighting luminaires: To AS/NZS 1158.6.
Radio interference limits: To AS/NZS CISPR 15.
4.1.5
Interpretations
Abbreviations
General: For the purposes of this worksection the abbreviations given below apply.
CCT: Correlated colour temperature.
CRI: Colour rendering index.
DALI: Digital addressable lighting interface.
EEI: Energy efficiency index.
ELV: Extra low voltage.
ILCOS: International lamp coding system.
LED: Light Emitting Diode
PLC: Programmable logic controllers.
RGB: Red Green Blue (Colour Changing)
SBC: Small bayonet cap.
SES: Small Edison screw.
Definitions
General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given below apply.
Control system: A lighting control system comprising a combination of some or all of the following:
o
Automatic sensing and control components.
o
Timers.
o
Manual overrides.
o
Programming using a computer interface.
Proprietary luminaires: Luminaires available as a catalogue item.
Custom-built luminaires: Luminaires manufactured to order.
4.1.6
Submissions
Technical data
General: Submit technical data of the following:
Luminaires
Lamps
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Ballasts
Power factor correction equipment
Lighting control systems.
All accessories.
Submit photometric data for each type of custom-built luminaire in hard copy and in IES standard
electronic format.
Standard: To AS 1680.3.
Samples
Prototypes: Submit completed prototypes of each type of custom-built luminaire before production runs
commence.
General: Submit samples of all luminaires and accessories.
Shop drawings
General: Submit shop drawings of lighting column mounting bases.
4.2
Products
4.2.1
Luminaires
General
General: Provide luminaires complete with lamps, luminaire control equipment, lighting control
equipment, and accessories as documented.
4.2.2
Construction
Stiffness
General: Provide materials, body shape and methods of manufacture so that luminaires neither warp nor
sag when installed.
Ceiling trim
Provision for recessed mounting in suspended ceilings: To AS 2946.
Moulded plastic bodies
Exterior use: UV stabilised.
Depth
Fluorescent T8 /T25 lamps ULB/LB luminaires: 100mm maximum.
Hinged diffusers
General: Provide hinged diffusers securely connected to the luminaire body, with the diffuser held
captive.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Reflectors and diffusers
Reflectors: Multi-cell parabolic. Iridescence to be avoided by processes to approval. Aluminium purity
99.85%.
Diffusers: K19 prismatic. UV stabilised polycarbonate in vandal-prone areas where indicated.
During construction the following items shall be considered:
No light leaks within luminaires and junction of ceiling to lamps
All luminaire components and trims to be securely fixed to avoid dislodgement or displacement
Luminaires to be capable of being securely fixed to all mounting points
Luminaire dimensions to be uniform and square in appearances
No components to deform whilst in usage
Enable lamp replacement to occur without total dismantling of the fitting
All luminaires to be fixed by multiple (min 2) fixing points
Provide a valid certificate of approval for all luminaires
4.2.3
Lamps
Standards
Fluorescent: To AS 4782.1 and AS 4782.2.
Self ballasted lamps: To AS/NZS 60968 and AS/NZS 60969.
Single capped fluorescent lamps: To AS/NZS 60901.
Fluorescent lamps
Lamps: 16mm diameter (T5) 49W CCT 4000K (unless otherwise directed), high efficiency, triphosphor,
low mercury ‘Philips’ TL5/840A or equal Sylvania, Osram.
Colour rendering: Group 1B to AS/NZS 1680.1.
Incandescent lamps
Shall not in general be used.
Tungsten halogen lamps
Tungsten halogen lamps not enclosed behind glass: low pressure, low UV emission type.
Low voltage dichroic lamps: Provide dichroic lamps with integral reflectors and clear glass lens.
Luminaires to be designed to withstand heat concentrations
Provide 50mm clear space around all luminaires for in-ceiling mounting
Provide open and clean ventilation chambers in luminaire recesses
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Luminaires to be aligned vertically unless otherwise noted
Provide Regulative labelling at switchboard for ELV lighting (refer AS3000)
Install Electronic transformers for ELV lights and maximum light fitting wattage
4.2.4
Other controlgear
Standard
General: To AS/NZS 61347 Parts 1 and 2.
ELV transformers
General: For extra-low voltage tungsten halogen lamps provide the following:
One dimmable electronic transformer per lamp with power rating matching the lamp, or.
Common dimmable electronic transformers with power rating matching the lamps.
Performance: Transformers shall maintain constant secondary voltage irrespective of load and maintain
primary/supply mains fluctuation within normal limits.
Transformer regulation: 5%.
Dimming capability: Suitable for the digital control system.
Type: Atco Tridonic or Osram.
Regulation
Output voltage: Not in excess of the nominal rated lamp voltage at a load of 75% of nominal transformer
rating.
4.2.5
Ballasts
General
General: Provide ballasts for lighting systems selected to be compatible with the lamp and control
method.
Standard: To AS/NZS 61558.1.
Electronic fluorescent lamp ballasts
Standards: To AS/NZS 61347.2.3 and AS/NZS 60929.
Current total harmonic distortion: < 15%.
Number of ballasts: Provide 1 ballast for both lamps in twin luminaires generally, except where separate
control is required (for example, separate up and down lamps). Multi-lamp ballasts are permitted in
luminaires where applicable.
Starting: Warm start within 1.5s and additionally to meet the starting requirements over the dimming
range.
Lamp failure mode: Automatic switch-off when lamps are defective. Auto-restart of replaced lamps.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Dimming ballast type: Digital addressable ballasts giving disturbance-free, precise control. Compliant
with DALI ballast standard in accordance with IEC 60929. Analogue ballasts not permitted.
Approved manufacturer: Atco Tridonic or Osram.
Reactive fluorescent lamp ballasts
Standard: To AS/NZS 60921 and AS/NZS 61347.2.8.
Connections: Provide quick-connect terminals or wiring, suitable for the operating temperature close to
the ballast.
Number of ballasts: Provide separate ballasts for each lamp.
Type: Atco LLEC equivalent.
Ballast performance measurement – fluorescent lamps
Standard: To AS/NZS 4783.1.
4.2.6
Power factor correction
General
General: Provide power factor correction on all luminaires to a minimum power factor of 0.9 lagging for
ferromagnetically ballasted luminaires and 0.95 for electronically ballasted luminaires.
Capacitors
Standard: To AS 61048 and AS 61049.
Integral fuses
General: Provide integral fuses for high intensity discharge (HID) lamp ballasts.
4.2.7
Accessories
Lighting outlets
Pin arrangement: Standard: 3 flat pin with looping terminal.
Lighting switches
General: Provide lighting switches as documented.
Standard: To AS/NZS 3133.
Style, material, colour: As nominated in General requirements (electrical). Where 6 or more switches are
ganged together use stainless steel switchplates with no visible fixings.
Minimum: 16 A, 230 V a.c.
Dimmer switches
General: Provide integral dimmer/switch units as documented. Refer also Lighting control system.
Proximity switches
General: Provide proximity switches as documented.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Standard: To AS/NZS 60947.5.2.
Daylight switches
General: Provide integral photo electric switch units as documented, interfaced to the digital control
system.
Performance: Adjustable between 50 and 1000 lux. Daylight switches shall incorporate a microprocessor
which will retain the programmed parameters in the event of power failure.
Time delay: > 2 minutes.
Illumination differential: > 50 lux. Daylight switches shall allow connected luminaires to be switched off
after they have dimmed to minimum output, or to hold light output at a minimum illuminance level
regardless of ambient levels.
Integration: May be integral with motion detector switches.
Compatibility: Dynalite.
Motion detector switches
General: Provide movement detectors which cover designated areas as documented, interfaced to the
digital control system.
Timer: Incorporate ‘on’ timer adjustable between 1 and 5 minutes minimum and 2 hours minutes
maximum.
Standard: To AS 2201.3 and BCA Section J Specification J6.
Type: Passive infra-red or ultrasonic microwave. May be integral with daylight switches.
Quantity: Provide sufficient quantity for full coverage of the designated zone or area. Mount detectors to
avoid detection of movement outside the designated areas. Detector beam patterns and types shall suit
the designated zone or area and include sensing range adjustments.
Compatibility: Dynalite.
Manual time delay switches
General: Proved manual time delay relay switches as documented.
Type: Electronic.
Duration: Adjustable between 5 minutes and 15 minutes.
Indicator light: Required. Activated when artificial illumination is ‘off’.
4.3
Lighting Control System
4.3.1
General
Aims
The purpose of this document is to specify a lighting control system complete with all dimmers, switches
and other control devices, control panels, power supplies, wiring and other equipment necessary to
provide a complete and operational installation. The system shall be Dynalite which provides free
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
topology incorporating distributed intelligence with unshielded twisted pair (UTP) network cabling
between each device
The system shall be installed by a contractor who shall be certified by Dynalite and who shall be
responsible for the overall system implementation and project management. The contractor shall provide
shop drawings, functional/addressing details, device programming, on site commissioning/ verification,
as-built documentation and defects liability maintenance. Where high level integration is required, the
contractor will consult with the relevant third party companies prior to commencement of installation, to
review the methodology and confirm responsibility of each party to ensure a functional solution is offered
that meets client requirements.
Documentation
Detailed lighting control system design documentation, shop drawings and test plan shall be produced by
the contractor before commencement of installation.
At project completion lighting control system shop drawings shall be provided to the client as hard
(printed) copies and software files (in PDF and either DWG or DXF format). These shall be updated to an
“as installed” state prior to acceptance and signoff.
Standards and Compliance
The works shall comply with the requirements of current relevant standards. These include:
Building Code of Australia
Australian Standards
Fire Services Regulations (for the relevant state or territory)
Electricity provider's regulations and conditions of supply
Australian Communications Authority Regulations
Occupational Health and Safety Regulations.
Installation
Installation shall be performed by subcontractors who hold a license appropriate for any work they
perform.
Programming
Dynalite programming shall be performed by Dynalite accredited personnel. Programming shall be
carried out in accordance with this Electrical Specification.
Balanced Load
Where multiple mains power phases are available the electrical load shall be distributed across all
phases as evenly as practicable.
Site Testing
A test plan shall be produced by the Dynalite system designer prior to commencement of installation.
Once the installation and programming of the lighting control system is complete, site testing shall be
performed in accordance with the test plan. As each test is performed with a passing result this shall be
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
recorded on the test plan. As a minimum, the following tests shall be included in the test plan and
performed prior to sign-off:
System Functionality Test
Verify that all inputs and outputs function correctly. Check each area’s functionality against the area
control strategies described in Section 3.0 and above. Where different strategies apply at difference
times (such as normal and after hours), ensure that each is tested.
Operation and Maintenance Manual
Prior to project sign-off the contractor shall compile an operation and maintenance manual and deliver it
to the project manager. The Operation and Maintenance Manual shall include the following information:
system architecture diagram
switchboard layout drawings
tags and programmed functions
channel connection identification
floor plans showing devices, load and cable run locations
recommended scheduled maintenance procedures
technical literature for each type of device used in the project
Control system configuration files on CD-ROM.
All drawings and diagrams shall be provided as hard (printed) copies and software files (in PDF and
either DWG or DXF format). Drawings shall be updated to an “as installed” state for placement in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Training
The installing contractor shall allow for on site training for the client or their nominated representative
after practical completion, at a time and date to be nominated by the facility manager or client’s
representative.
Provide on site training for a duration of 2 hours.
Acceptance and Signoff
Acceptance shall take place once installation, programming, commissioning and maintenance obligations
have been fulfilled. At this point sign-off shall occur by presenting a client acceptance form to be signed.
The client acceptance form shall outline test procedures and results, as-built documentation including
wiring diagrams, control equipment layout, device configuration schedules, functionality statements and
other supporting documentation deemed necessary to provide the client with an acceptable level of
project information.
Review and Maintenance
The project shall be reviewed at three months after the date of practical completion as submitted by the
contracting party, to ensure that appropriate system configuration is maintained. Maintenance shall not
extend to system configuration changes deemed desirable by the client which are outside the review and
maintenance agreement.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Allow for 1 day on site works for modifications as deemed desirable by the Client to the system, three
months after the date of practical completion.
4.3.2
System Strategy
Design or System Modifications
Any modifications to the topology, system components or functionality shall be submitted to the electrical
consultant or client representative for approval.
Bus Protocol
The lighting control system shall use distributed intelligence where individual units update their status
and provide transmission error checking.
The protocol shall use full duplex communication and utilise checksum algorithms to ensure incorrect
data is ignored. The protocol shall be available to third party companies to develop interfaces to the
installed system.
The system shall be capable of providing constant feedback on the operational status of inputs and
outputs and be capable of interrogating the status of specific devices. Units shall use non-volatile
memory to retain programmed parameters when not powered.
Network Topology
The network topology of the lighting control system shall be flexible and allow devices to be connected in
a star, daisy chain (in series) or combination of star and daisy chain configuration. An individual network
shall support up to 255 unit addresses and many thousands of group address/application address
combinations. The topology shall allow up to 255 networks to be connected utilising a Dynet, USB or
Ethernet backbone, or combination of backbone types.
Cabling
Cabling between lighting control system components shall be yellow Cat-5 unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
with a mains rated outer sheath. The cable colour shall be yellow so as to differentiate from cables used
for other purposes.
Lighting control system cabling shall be segregated from mains cabling in accordance with AS3000 and
the system’s manufacturer requirements.
Cable shall be continuous, joined only by RJ45 connectors/sockets/surface mount blocks or terminated
in screw block terminals using bootlace ferrules (crimps).
RJ45 plugs shall be used to connect cable to system components which provide RJ45 connection
sockets. The RJ45 plugs must be suitable for the cable they are attached to in terms of wire type (solid or
stranded).
When landscape (horizontally) mounted DIN Rail enclosures are used, lighting control system cabling
shall be neatly arranged and fed to the left side of the DIN enclosure; mains wires shall be neatly
arranged and fed to right side. Segregation must be maintained in accordance with relevant standards.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Programmability
Individual components of the lighting control system shall be configurable across the network using PC
software with a Windows® operating system. Each unit which communicates on the network shall be
given a unit address unique to the specific network, and have a serial number which may be retrieved by
the configuration software.
High Level Integration Options
The lighting control system shall be capable of integrating with third party systems including DALI, DSI,
HVAC, audiovisual and building management systems via various mediums and protocols including
Ethernet, RS-232, NEC IR, OPC, BACnet.
The lighting control system shall be capable of being controlled via a hand held remote control, and by a
networked PC.
The manufacturer shall liaise with the relevant third party companies and submit for approval shop
drawings and demonstration systems to confirm compatibility and functional requirements.
Emergency Override
Lights controlled by the lighting control system shall be capable of being simultaneously switched on
manually or automatically in the event of a lighting control system communications failure whenever
mains power is available. This shall be switchable through the lighting control system network cable
irrespective of whether the network is powered and functional.
4.4
Execution
4.4.1
Supports
General
General: Install luminaires on proprietary supports by means of battens, trims, noggings, roses and
packing material.
Suspended luminaires
Rods: Steel pipe suspension rods fitted with gimbal joints.
Chains: Electroplated welded link chain.
Levelling wire: Stainless steel.
Levelling: Adjust the suspension system length so that the lighting system is level and even.
Horizontal tolerance:
4.5
3 mm between luminaires within the one space.
Wiring
Flexible cords
2
General: Provide recessed luminaires with an external 1.5 m length of 0.75 mm 3-core V75 (minimum)
PVC/PVC flexible cord, connected to a 10 A 3-pin moulded plug to AS/NZS 3112.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
DALI dimmable luminaires: Provide, in addition, an external 1.5m length of 0.75mm2 2-core V75
(minimum) PVC/PVC flexible cord, connected to a suitable moulded plug (alternatives to be considered
include integration with 3-core flexible cord).
Other fittings flexible cord cross sectional area:
contract administrator.
1 mm2. Where exposed, colour as directed by the
Terminal blocks
General: Provide terminals with 2 screws each and capable of accommodating
conductors.
three 2.5 mm2
Minimum cable size
Screwed connectors: 24/0.2 mm.
Quick connectors: 1/0.75 mm.
Fluorescent luminaires
Cable: V-90HT copper cable conductor.
Loom wiring: Neatly loom the wiring and install it clear of ballasts. Fix looms to the luminaire body with
clips made from soft metal or polyethylene.
4.5.1
Wiring connection
Suspended luminaires
Accessible ceilings: Connect suspended luminaires to a plug socket outlet within the ceiling void. Provide
a neat, flat plate for the plug access at the ceiling plane; plate colour to match ceiling colour.
4.6
Completion
General
General: Verify the operation of all luminaires.
Digital controls/lighting control system: The commissioning of the lighting control system, including DALI
ballasts, must be undertaken by the lighting control system supplier and must be performed on site.
Re-lamping: Replace lamps and starters which have been in service for a period greater than 25% of the
lamp life as published by the lamp manufacturer.
Dust and finger-marks: Remove all dust and finger-marks from louvres and luminaires
Spare luminaires and outlets schedule
Provide the following additional luminaires and lighting outlets at locations not shown on drawings or
scheduled elsewhere, as directed during the works. Include circuit breakers, cabling, accessories,
installation, etc. as required.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Spare item
Quantity to be
allowed
Interior 3-pin lighting outlet connected to a lighting outlet on the same circuit, 15m
cable route length
5
Interior 4-pin lighting outlet connected to a lighting outlet on the same circuit, 15m
cable route length
5
Exterior luminaire and lighting outlet connected to a lighting outlet on the same circuit, 5
15m cable route length
Exterior luminaire and mounting equipment connected to a lighting outlet on the same 2
circuit, 30m cable route length
4.7
Maintenance
4.7.1
Working Procedures
Personnel: Experienced persons to be responsible for safe working procedures during the maintenance
period.
Notification: Ensure that the occupants are advised of proposed maintenance periods. Allow to reschedule maintenance periods if emergency use of the audio visual systems is required.
4.7.2
Operational Maintenance
Maintenance Period: Co-extensive with the Defects Liability Period.
Required: During the maintenance period:
Carry out periodic inspections and perform maintenance work at the frequencies and following the
procedures recommended by the manufacturers of the supplied equipment (except for maintenance
work specified to be performed by the Principal);
Promptly rectify faults. Replace failed materials and equipment, including batteries, lamps and fuses.
Minimum number of Visits: Once every three months for the complete defects liability period including
extensions.
Certification: At the end of the maintenance period make a final service visit and, upon satisfactory
completion of the above procedures, certify in writing that the installation is operating correctly. At the
final service visit, make adjustments to the audio visual systems as instructed by the occupants.
4.7.3
Manuals
Requirement: Before commencement of operational maintenance, provide the specified number of
copies of a combined operator's manual and technical manual, written in clear concise English,
containing a title page listing suppliers' names, addresses and telephone numbers, a table of contents,
and the following data:
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Operator's Manual
Correct procedures for switch on and shut down of each audio visual system.
Correct procedures for operating each audio visual system.
Maintenance procedures: Recommended maintenance periods and procedures.
Tools: Particulars of maintenance equipment and tools provided with instructions for their use.
Technical Manual
A copy of the Work-As-Executed drawings including schematic diagrams, layout drawings and
joinery shop drawings.
A technical description of the equipment supplied with diagrams and illustrations.
Procedure for dis-assembly and assembly of components.
A list of spare parts provided.
A complete set of customer data.
Procedures for set-up and configuration.
Hard copy of all software and programming.
Hard copy of all set ups
Form: A4 size, printed or typed on durable printing paper, with each page consecutively numbered, and
neatly bound in durable vinyl or similar hard covers.
Number of copies: Three (3)
Prototype copy: Provide a prototype copy before the start of the commissioning phase for approval by
the Project Manager.
4.7.4
Training
Requirement: Provide a training course for up to six (6) staff personnel over a period of one day in the
set-up, use and operation of the complete audio visual system. The course shall be carried out on site
using the equipment installed under this contract and additional equipment as necessary for
comprehensive simultaneous instruction.
Notice: Give sufficient notice that training for the audio visual systems is to commence to allow the
Project Manager to coordinate attendance.
Minimum notice required: 10 working days.
Operator Training: Provide basic training in the set-up and use of all Audio Visual System components.
Maintenance Training: Provide basic training in the adjustment, programming, reconfiguration and basic
maintenance of the system. Include instruction on:
Component installation and removal
Control system programming including setup for additional AV equipment
Basic fault finding including connectors, fuses and lamps
Periodic routine maintenance
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
5.
Emergency Evacuation Lighting
5.1
General
5.1.1
Aims
Responsibilities
General: Provide stand alone weatherproof non-maintained emergency lighting and maintained exit signs
with 24 metre and 32 metre viewing distance of pictograph element as documented on layout drawings.
5.1.2
Cross references
General
General: Conform to the General requirements worksection.
Associated worksections
Associated worksections: Conform to the following:
Electrical general requirements.
Low voltage power systems.
Luminaires – custom-built.
5.1.3
Standards
General
System design, installation and operation: AS 2293.1.
Inspection and maintenance: To AS/NZS 2293.2.
5.1.4
Submissions
Samples
General: Submit samples of all luminaires, exit signs and suspension materials.
Technical data
General: Submit technical data for each type of luminaire and exit sign including the following:
Maximum luminaire spacing for a given mounting height.
Luminaire classification to AS 2293.3.
Type test data
General: Submit type test data.
Shop drawings
General: Submit the following:
Construction details, overall dimensions and wiring arrangement for each custom built luminaire and
exit sign.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
5.2
Products
5.2.1
Emergency and Exit luminaires
General
Visual indicator lights: Provide a red indicator, readily visible when the luminaire is in its operating
location, which indicates that the battery is being charged.
Inverter system: Provide protection of the inverter system against damage in the event of failure, removal
or replacement of the lamp, while in normal operation.
Local test switches: Provide a momentary action test switch, accessible from below the ceiling, on each
luminaire to temporarily disconnect the mains supply and connect the battery to the lamp.
Common test switches: Provide a common test switch on the local distribution board which disconnects
main supply to the luminaires and tests for discharge performance. After testing, this switch must
automatically revert to normal operating mode.
Batteries
Type: Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium batteries capable of operating each lamp at its rated output
continuously at least 2 hours during completion tests and 1.5 hours during subsequent tests.
Battery life: At least 3 years when operating under normal conditions at an ambient temperature of 25 C
and subjected to charging and discharging at 6 monthly intervals.
5 or 6 years is possible in some circumstances. See AS/NZS 2293.2 for system checks.
Marking: Indelibly mark each battery with its date of manufacture.
5.3
Execution
5.3.1
Emergency and Exit Luminaires
Power supply
General: Provide an unswitched active supply to each luminaire and exit sign, originating from the test
switch control panel.
Data monitoring
General: Provide a connection from each emergency and exit luminaire and connect to the monitoring
computer.
Test switch
General: Provide a timed test switch at each distribution board.
Function: To energise emergency lights and exit signs and then to automatically reset controls after a
maximum of 2 hours.
5.3.2
Marking and labelling
Labelling
General: Label each luminaire with a unique identifying number and record the number and luminaire
location in a schedule included in the emergency evacuation lighting operation and maintenance manual.
The label must be permanently fixed, indelible and readable at a distance of 1 m.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
5.3.3
Tests
General
General: Carry out tests, including out-of-hours tests, to demonstrate the emergency and evacuation
system’s performance. Include the following:
Test components for correct function and operation.
Demonstrate illumination performance on site, to at least the level stated in the manufacturer’s
performance specification for that device.
Test operation of battery discharge test and control test switch functions, including discharge and
restoration.
Demonstrate system functions under mains fail condition.
Demonstrate operation of the battery and charger including a full discharge/recharge over the
designated time.Mains supply
General: Before commissioning, ensure mains supply has been continuously connected for at least 24
hours.
5.3.4
Maintenance
General
Emergency evacuation lighting: To AS 2293.2.
Interval: Carry out the 6-monthly procedures before practical completion and again before the end of the
maintenance period.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
6.
Photovoltaic
6.1
General
6.1.1
Aims
Provide photovoltaic (PV) rooftop grid-connected generating systems as documented to the roof of the
following buildings:
South Melbourne Market Carpark Roofover with a minimum nominal rated capacity of 37 kilowatt
peak
Site locations are given in Drawing 31-26867-E006.
6.2
Scope of Work
The works in this contract shall comprise the provision of all materials, labour, transport, tools, plant,
applications, payment of fees and everything else necessary for the design, supply, installation,
commission and maintenance of PV grid-connect rooftop systems with a total 37 kilowatt peak minimum
nominal rated capacity as documented and shall include:
Photovoltaic (PV) modules – Monocrystalline 245 watt nominal rated peak capacity
Grid-connected inverters – 17kW with grid monitoring, power balancing, ground fault protection and
grid protection capability
Mounting frame and structural steelwork for installation of PV modules
Balance of system components including DC and AC cabling and switchboards, data cabling,
junction boxes, switchboards, conduit, cable tray, mounting brackets, etc.
Stainless steel cabinet to house solar inverter.
Grid connection and metering requirements of Citipower
Data-logger(s) for monitoring PV system performance
A display panel for displaying PV system performance (location to be nominated by South Melbourne
Market)
Lightning surge protection
Testing and commissioning
Inspections and witness testing of the PV system by the Engineer and/or Citipower
Training of local staff in the basic operation, maintenance, and trouble-shooting of the PV systems
Operation and Maintenance manuals
Operating warranty
All permanent and temporary safety and access equipment necessary for lifting materials and
working at heights
Warning labels in accordance with AS 3100 on all switchboards which have the PV installation
upstream/downstream as per AS 4777
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Application and documentation required to satisfy Citipower requirements for connection of the PV
system to its network
Construction Certificate and Occupational Certificate.
Sundry minor works as specified herein
All supports, brackets, drilling, penetrations, fire stops, water proofing and other building works
associated with the above.
The tenderer shall advise any ambiguities in the document at the time of tender for the works specified.
Claims for extra costs based on lack of knowledge of the documents will not be accepted after
submission of the tender.
Provide all apparatus, appliances, materials, labour and services not specifically mentioned, that are
necessary to form a complete fully operational system in all respects and without any additional cost.
Price variation or extensions of time will not be allowed on the basis of lack of knowledge or
familiarisation with other documentation for the project.
In carrying out the design and installation of grid-connected solar PV systems, the contractor will be
required to undertake the work in accordance with the following most recent Australian Standards:
AS 3100 Approval and Test Specification – General Requirements for Electrical Equipment
AS 5033 Installation of Photovoltaic Arrays
AS 3000 Electrical Wiring Rules
AS 1768 Lightning Protection
AS 1170.2 Wind Loads
AS 4777 Grid Connections of Energy Systems via Inverters
AS 2053 Conduits and Fittings for Electrical Installations
AS 4509 Stand-Alone Power Systems
AS 1664 Aluminium Structures
Building Code of Australia
Electricity Safety Act 2005c) and associated Safety Regulations
Electricity Distribution Code (Vic)
Victorian Service & Installation Rules
Citipower requirements specifically deal with embedded generation.
Other appropriate Australian Standards Contractor Requirements
6.3
Accreditation
The contractor must be accredited by the Clean Energy Council of Australia (CEC), formerly the
Australian Business Council for Sustainable Energy (BCSE) in order to carry out PV design and
installation works. For further information please see the Clean Energy Council of Australia Website at:
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
http://www.cleanenergycouncil.org.au/
6.4
Licences
The contractor must be registered as Registered Electrical Contractor to carry out all and all electrical
work associated with connecting the PV systems into the building’s electrical systems and electricity grid.
Submissions
6.5
Technical Data
Prior to purchasing equipment, submit for approval the following technical data:
Technical description and specifications of each system component.
Physical layout of photovoltaic arrays showing location of PV modules, mounting equipment,
inverters and cable runs.
Single line schematic(s) showing the configuration of PV strings and inverters and the
interconnection with the building electrical systems and connection to Citipower’s network.
Structural calculations for structural loads to AS 1170.
Shop drawings of switchboards for review.
6.6
Citipower
Submit all design, testing, and commissioning documentation necessary to satisfy the requirement of
Citipower for the connection of the PV systems to its network. As a minimum this includes:
All documentation as required by Citipower including Pre-approval Application for Solar PV Systems
and Interconnection Agreement for Solar PV Systems;
Single line diagram. Specifically show:
–
The main switchboard.
–
Any internal distribution sub-panels to which the inverter will be connected.
–
The location of all fuses and switches between the grid and the inverter.
–
Brief details of all the DC-side connections of the inverter.
Obtaining a Certificate of Electrical Safety (CES) at the completion of the works. A copy of the CES
must be returned to Citipower with the completed Interconnection Agreement for PV Systems.
6.7
Site’s Electricity Retailer
The contractor must send a copy of the Electrical Works Request (EWR) and the CES to the site’s
Electricity Retailer to notify them of the new PV Systems. Citipower will only install co-generation capable
metering upon receipt of a service order from the Electricity Retailer.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
6.8
PV System Requirement
6.8.1
General
The PV arrays must comprise sufficient number of PV modules whose individual nominal rating under
Standard Test Conditions (STC) results in a minimum:
37 kilowatt peak array nominal rated capacity for South Melbourne Market Carpark Roofover;
The arrangement of all the components of the photovoltaic system will be arranged so that the PV
modules, inverters, data loggers, and any other component, is readily accessible for maintenance and
replacement when required.
6.9
Modules
6.9.1
Selection of Modules
No particular brand or model of photovoltaic modules is specified. The contractor will nominate the
brand and model of photovoltaic module proposed for this contract, however, high efficiency modules are
sought.
6.9.2
Australian Standards
The proposed photovoltaic modules must comply with AS/NZS 5033.
6.9.3
Certification
Crystalline photovoltaic modules (monocrystalline): must be certified with IEC-61215.
All PV modules: must be certified with IEC-61730 and must be listed on listed on the Clean Energy
Council approved PV modules list.
6.9.4
Equipment Class
PV modules must be Application Class A (Safety Class II) or better.
6.9.5
Encapsulation
PV modules must be encapsulated in toughened glass.
6.9.6
Protection Rating
PV modules and PV array junction boxes exposed to the environment shall be at least IP65 compliant in
accordance with AS 60529 and shall be UV resistant.
6.9.7
Temperature Coefficient
Maximum allowable temperature coefficient of maximum power is -0.5% / °C.
6.9.8
Operating Temperature
Operating module temperature -20°C to +80°C.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
6.9.9
Module Efficiency @ Standard Test Conditions
Monocrystalline: > 15%
Multi/poly-crystalline: > 15%
Thin film: not accepted
6.9.10
Mechanical Protection
Hailstone impact testing: Required.
6.9.11
Warranty
20 years – at 80% power output
The contractor is responsible for ensuring the PV modules are installed as per manufacturer’s
installation, operation or maintenance instructions.
6.10
PV Array Arrangement
Notwithstanding the total PV array power capability for each of the five systems as required under this
specification, the number of individual PV modules must be such, and the array so arranged, that the
physical arrangement of the array is grouped together symmetrically or geometrically ordered.
Locate the PV arrays within the area indicated in Drawings 31-27445-E006
6.11
PV Mounting Frame
6.11.1
General
Provide proprietary products that are appropriate for this particular installation and the installation
environment.
The mounting system shall be mechanically fixed to the exiting roofs. Custom made mounting systems
will not be accepted.
6.11.2
Warranty
The mounting systems must have a minimum warranty of 10 years in meeting the requirements of
AS1170.2 for normal operating conditions. The contractor must supply a warranty to which the Principal
can make a warranty claim.
6.12
Inverter
6.12.1
Selection of Inverter
The selection of the inverter brand and model is not specified, but must be fully compliant with Australian
Standards and all other relevant Authorities’ requirements including Citipower.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
The contractor will nominate the brand and model of inverters proposed for this project. The inverters
must be suitable for use with the specified PV system and string configuration taking into account voltage
drop and PV module temperature effects.
The total inverters AC nominal power output rating must be equal to or greater than the kilowatt peak
rated capacity of the PV modules at Standard Test Conditions (STC).
6.12.2
Australian Standards
The inverter(s) supplied must be certified with AS4777. The inverter(s) must also be listed on the Clean
Energy Council approved grid-connect inverter list.
6.12.3
Technical Requirements
The inverter(s) must be also be well ventilated to prevent over-heating and must be capable of
autonomously synchronizing with the existing grid voltage.
Waveform: True sine wave.
Waveform quality: to AS 4777.
Voltage regulation: ± 8%.
Max DC voltage: must exceed open-circuit voltage (Voc) of PV strings at 5°C cell temperature.
Maximum power point tracking range: must be between maximum power voltage (Vmp) of PV strings at
25°C and 70°C cell temperature.
Harmonic distortion of output current:< 4%.
Frequency regulation: ± 1%.
Efficiency:
95% at 10% load.
Protection: Overload, short circuit and transient required.
Automatic no-load shutdown: required.
Display: Output power and grid stability.
6.12.4
Load Balancing
A multiple inverter system must be balanced within 5% across the 3 phases and to the approval of
Citipower’s requirements.
6.12.5
Warranty
The inverter must have a minimum warranty of 10 years. The contractor must supply a warranty to
which the Principal can make a warranty claim to the inverter manufacturer.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
6.13
Communication System
6.13.1
General
The communication system must comprise data-logger(s), a display screen and all interfaces including
computer system.
Data-logger(s) must be supplied, installed and connected to the solar PV power systems’ inverters. The
data-logger must be fully compatible with the nominated inverters.
A display screen must be supplied, installed and connected to the data-logger(s) for PV systems
performance monitoring and visualisation.
6.13.2
Technical Requirements
The communication system must be capable of recording and displaying the following information:
Instantaneous electrical energy generation of array (kW)
Current daily energy generation total (kWh)
Rolling weekly energy generation profile (chart) including total (kWh)
Weekly CO2 avoided (kg)
Outside air temperature (degrees C)
Current Solar irradiance (W/m2)
Current building total energy demand (kWh)
Percentage of total building demand supplied by solar energy (%)
Time period / date for energy generated
Instantaneous voltage of PV system (V)
Instantaneous current of PV system (A)
The communication system must be capable of monitoring multiple inverters at once and must be able to
record individual inverter performance and operation parameters of the PV, such as DC voltage and
current, and AC voltage, current and frequency.
The communication system must provide the following functions:
Interface the data-logger(s) to the inverters via all communication means including computer system
This information is to be made available online.
Presentation of system data in diagrams and tables
Ability to customise individual display pages
A LCD display panel must be provided for visualisation.
The data-logger(s) and interface must have the following capabilities:
Storage data capacity
Save cycles
31/26867/197021
1 gigabyte
30 minutes
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Connection interfaces: USB-interface, USB socket, 8-pin data cable (RS 485), network plug (RJ 45sockets) and RS232.
The contractor shall provide training to up to 4 nominated staff, for up to 1 hour, in the use and
functionality of the web service product and shall supply all information necessary to maintain the system
upon practical completion, including necessary licences, usernames and passwords.
Installation
General: To manufacturers recommendations.
Warranty
Minimum 5 years.
6.14
Moulded Case and Miniature Circuit Breakers
Circuit breaker on Main Switchboard to match existing.
Moulded case breakers: To AS 60947.1, AS 2184 and AS 60947.2.
Miniature circuit breakers: To AS/NZS 60898.1 or AS 3111.
Operation: Independent manual operation including positive ON/OFF indicator.
Trip type:
Moulded case breakers: Adjustable thermal, fixed magnetic.
Miniature circuit breakers: Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic.
Current limiting:
Moulded case breakers: Required.
Isolation facility: Required.
Mounting: Mount circuit breakers so that the ON/OFF and current rating indications are clearly visible
with covers or escutcheons in position. Align operating toggles of each circuit breaker in the same plane.
Utilisation category: Moulded case breakers:
Final subcircuits category: Category A.
Mains and submains: Category B.
Trip units: Connect interchangeable and integrally fused trip units so that trip units are not live when
circuit breaker contacts are open.
6.15
Power Cables
6.15.1
Standard
PVC and XLPE cables: To AS/NZS 5000.1.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
6.15.2
Cable
General: Select multi-stranded copper cable generally, except for mineral insulated metal sheathed
(MIMS).
Minimum size: 2.5 mm2 or as shown on the detailed design drawings
Voltage drop: Select final subcircuit cables within the voltage drop parameters dictated by the route
length and load.
Fault loop impedance: Select final subcircuit cables selected to satisfy the requirements for automatic
disconnection under short circuit and earth fault/touch voltage conditions.
Distribution cables: To AS/NZS 4961.
6.15.3
Conductor Colours
General: For fixed wiring, provide coloured conductor insulation. If this is not practicable, slide at least
150 mm of close fitting coloured sleeving on to each conductor at the termination points.
Active conductors in single phase circuits: Red.
Active conductors in polyphase circuits:
A phase: Red
B phase: White
C phase: Blue
6.15.4
DC Cabling Sizing
DC cables must be sized to maximise system performance. The voltage drop of the photovoltaic system
between the photovoltaic array and inverter must be lower than 1% of the total PV array DC voltage.
6.15.5
AC Cabling Sizing
The AC cables must be sized such that the voltage drop between the inverter station and the distribution
board is less than 1% of the total PV inverter AC voltage.
6.16
Electrical Installation Requirements
6.16.1
Australian Standards
In addition to the standards listed elsewhere, grid protection devices must be installed in accordance with
AS4777.
The photovoltaic system must also be installed in accordance with AS/NZS 5033.
The installation must also comply with AS/NZS 3000 Clause 7.3.8.2.
6.17
DC Cabling Installation
The DC cables shall not be positioned in locations of water drainage or in locations that are likely to
prevent the egress of rainwater.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Provide DC isolation within view of the PV array as per AS3000. If the DC isolation equipment is exposed
to the environment, provide an IP65 rated enclosure.
The Contractor must allow for the shortest possible DC cable run with facilitated cable installation and
cable access without obstructing any walkways, passages or windows.
Provide DC isolation adjacent to the inverter stations.
No DC cabling is to be run live without being terminated at both ends with appropriately rated enclosures.
6.18
AC Cabling Installation
The Contractor must allow for the shortest possible AC cable run with facilitated cable installation and
cable access without obstructing any walkways, passages or windows.
6.19
Wiring
Conceal cables and conduits wherever practicable.
6.20
Conduits
Type: Rigid.
Conduit size:
20 mm.
6.21
Cable Trays
6.21.1
General
Provide new cable tray for DC string cabling on the rear side of PV modules and AC cabling within the
plant room area.
Cable trays shall be of perforated metal and fully earthed. All trays shall have a cold rolled galvanised
finish and shall be machine press formed, with both edges returned a minimum of 50mm for stiffening.
Tray shall be of the following minimum gauges:
Width of Tray
Thickness of Material
75, 100, 150 mm
1.0 mm
225 mm
1.2 mm
300 mm
1.6 mm
The tray width selected with each application shall allow 20% spare space for future cables.
Tray shall be complete with galvanised perforated fishplates, bends and galvanised fixings, all to
manufacturer's recommendations.
6.21.2
Installation
Tray shall be secured to the structure and shall be installed with sufficient clearance to permit installation
of cable clips and other cable fixings. Supports shall be evenly spaced to ensure that tray is true and
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
straight. Spacing of supports shall be within the manufacturer's recommendations for the loading
concerned and in any case not less than two (2) supports shall be provided per length of tray.
Supports shall be of substantial fabricated hot-dip galvanised steel construction. The complete
installation shall be free of any distortion or bowing.
All cable trays and supports where exposed shall be painted to match existing. Colour to be approved by
Principal prior to painting.
All dissimilar metals must be separated to prevent galvanic corrosion.
6.22
Colour Code
The following colour code must be used throughout the installation:
Busbars and cabling within switchboards, and all submains cores and polyphase subcircuits must be
coloured red, white and blue in accordance with the Electricity Distributor's phase rotation and consistent
throughout the site. Wrong phase rotation and consequences shall be rectified at the contractor's
expense.
Single-phase subcircuits for lighting and power must be coloured as follows:
Active conductors Three Phase red, white, blue
Single Phase red
Neutral conductors black
Switchwires white
Earth conductors green/yellow
6.23
Marking and Labelling
General: Provide labels including control and circuit equipment ratings, functional units, notices for
operational and maintenance personnel, incoming and outgoing circuit rating, sizes and origin of supply.
ADDITIONAL MARKINGS: Provide marking as follows in addition to that required by AS 3000.
Labelling of switchboards must be in accordance with AS 4777.1. Signs shall be installed in prominent
positions on the Main Switchboard, Inverter Cubicle and all immediate distribution boards. The warning
label wording must be identical to the SIGN EXAMPLES given in APPENDIX A of AS 4777.1.
Lettering heights: Include the following requirements:
Isolating switches:
5 mm
Switchboards, main assembly designation:
Switchboards, outgoing functional units:
8 mm
Switchboards, sub assembly designations:
Warning notices:
31/26867/197021
4mm
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
25 mm
15 mm
6.24
Single-Line Diagrams
Provide a single-line diagram of each PV system adjacent to the new solar switchboard and on the inside
door of existing distribution broad.
Format: Non-fading print, laminated, at least A3 size, showing the situation as installed.
6.25
Shut-Down Procedure
Provide a step-by-step shut-down procedure immediately adjacent to the Main Switchboard and the new
solar switchboard as per Section 4 of AS4509.1.
Specifically reference Main Switchboard and circuit breaker numbers in shut-down procedure.
Format: Non-fading print, laminated, at least A3 size, showing the situation as installed.
6.26
Citipower Requirements
6.26.1
Standards and Guidelines
The technical and safety requirements of the PV Systems need to conform with the current Standards,
Codes or Regulations as follows:
Victorian Electricity Supply Industry (VESI) Service & Installation Rules (SIR);
Electricity Distribution Code;
Australian Standards, with particular reference to AS 3000 (Wiring Rules) and AS 4777 (Grid
Connection of energy systems via inverters); and
Electrical Safety Act 1998 and the associated Safety Regulations.
6.26.2
Completion of the Interconnection Agreement for PV Systems
The Interconnection Agreement must be completed and signed by the Principal, the PV System Installer
and the Registered Electrical Contractor (REC). Citipower will not process an agreement until such time
that it deems it to have been completed to its satisfaction.
The contractor will be able to assist in responding to any of the technical aspects of the interconnection
agreement. As per the SIR clause 6.8.1, a schematic diagram of the electrical installation supply
arrangements must be submitted to Citipower. Provision for the schematic diagram has been included as
part of the interconnection agreement. Sample diagrams can be found on Citipower’s website.
6.26.3
Alternative Supply Signage
As part of compliance with standards and guidelines, the following signage must be installed prior to the
installation of co-generation capable metering:
A sign must be placed within the metering enclosure stating “An alternative power supply system is
connected to this installation”;
Overhead Supplies – A sign must be placed at the fused overhead connection box (FOLCB) stating
“An alternative power supply system is connected to this installation”; and
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Underground Supplies – A sign must be placed at the consumer terminals and incoming service fuse
stating “An alternative power supply system is connected to this installation”.
6.26.4
Certificate of Electrical Safety
The REC must obtain a Certificate of Electrical Safety (CES) at the completion of the works. A copy of
the CES must be returned to Citipower with the completed Interconnection Agreement for PV Systems.
5. Customer’s Retailer
The Contractor must send a copy of the Electrical Works Request (EWR) and the CES to the Pricinpal’s
Electricity Retailer to notify them of the new PV System. Citipower will only install co-generation capable
metering upon receipt of a service order from the customer’s Electricity Retailer.
6.27
Testing and Commissioning
6.27.1
Test
Commissioning tests as listed below must be performed in accordance with AS/NZS 5033:2005
Appendix I.
In addition to the commissioning tests outlined below all photovoltaic equipment must be tested that they
are operating correctly including the photovoltaic modules, modules strings, inverter(s), meter, datalogger and electrical protection devices.
Open Circuit Voltage Measurements
Short Circuit Current Measurements
Earth Fault Protection Test (if relevant)
Functional In Service Test of Inverter Protection
Remove all loads in the installation (e.g. remove all circuit fuses except for the inverter circuit). Isolate
normal supply main switch. The inverter should trip by its own internal protection in less than 2 seconds
following disconnection from the distribution system supply. Then close the main switch. The inverter
should reconnect after a minimum 1 minute time delay.
Electrical Installations
Inspection: Visually inspect the installation to AS/NZS 3000 before testing. Record on a checklist.
Test and verify the installation to AS/NZS 3000 Section 6 (Mandatory and Optional tests), using the
methods outlined in AS/NZS 3017. Record the results of all tests.
Where electrical tests are required and the actual load is not available, provide a dummy load equal to at
least 75% of the design load.
6.28
Records
The contractor must prepare a report that includes voltage and temperature measurements, the current
and irradiance measurements and the Earth Fault Protection Test (if relevant) and also states the
condition of the PV array wiring after the test, including any repairs and corrections carried out as a result
of the inspections.
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
GHD
180 Lonsdale Street
Melbourne, Victoria 3000
T: (03) 8687 8000 F: (03) 8687 8111 E: [email protected]
© GHD 2011
This document is and shall remain the property of GHD. The document may only be used for the
purposes for which it was commissioned and in accordance with the Consultancy Agreement for the
commission. Unauthorised use of this document in any form whatsoever is prohibited.
Document Status
Reviewer
Rev
No.
Author
A
B
Approved for Issue
Name
Signature
Name
Signature
Date
GL
M.Markey
*M.Markey
G.Lovell
*G.Lovell
31/05/11
GL
P.Chan
*P.Chan
G.Lovell
*G.Lovell
2/11/11
31/26867/197021
South Melbourne Market
Electrical Services
Paul Morgan Architects
Specification for South
Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Services
December 2011
Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
31/26867/197586
General
4
1.1
Definitions
4
1.2
Scope of Work
4
1.3
Inclusions
5
1.4
Cross references
5
1.5
Standards
5
1.6
Authorities
6
1.7
Authority applications, permits and fees
7
1.8
Notice of Inspection
7
1.9
Demolition
7
1.10 Site Visit
7
1.11 Contractor's Submissions
7
1.12 Building penetrations
9
1.13 Painting
10
1.14 Identification
10
1.15 Commissioning Tests
10
1.16 Operational Maintenance Period
11
1.17 OH&S Requirements
11
Cold Water System
12
2.1
Scope
12
2.2
Pipework Materials
12
2.3
Pipework Installation
13
2.4
Accessories
13
2.5
Backflow prevention
14
2.6
Rainwater Pump Systems
14
2.7
Rainwater Reticulation
14
Stormwater
15
3.1
General
15
3.2
Downpipes
3.3
Rainwater Harvesting Tanks
15
3.4
Connection
15
Fire Service
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
Error! Bookmark not defined.
16
5.
31/26867/197586
4.1
General
16
4.2
Standard
16
4.3
Materials And Workmanship
16
4.4
Testing
17
4.5
Finishes
18
Extinguishers
19
5.1
General
19
5.2
Components
19
5.3
Completion
19
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
1.
General
1.1
Definitions
The following terms shall represent the relevant parties in this specification.
"Superintendent"
-
Acting as the Principal
"Contract
Administrator"
-
Client's representative, i.e. Architect or Project Manager
"Engineer"
-
GHD Pty Limited
"Builder"
-
The Company who shall sign the Building Contract for
the construction of the Works and who is named in the
Articles of Agreement of the Building Contract.
"Contractor"
-
Hydraulics Services Contractor tendering on the
contract works as given in this specification
"Contract"
-
Hydraulics Services Contract works being tendered as
specified herein.
“Specification”
-
This Hydraulics Services Specification and the
associated design drawings and standard drawings.
“Authorities”
1.2
Statutory bodies or inspectors of such bodies having
jurisdiction over the Works under relevant current
regulations and statutes.
Scope of Work
This scope covers the manufacture, supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning, and warranty of
the Hydraulics Services as specified herein including but not limited to the following associated with the
South Melbourne Market, Melbourne, Victoria. The specification shall be read in conjunction with the
architectural, mechanical, structural, survey, civil and electrical services documentation.
This document shall also be read in conjunction with Hydraulic Services Drawings.
This section of the Contract shall include the following hydraulic services as specified herein and as
depicted on the relevant drawings:
Fire services
Domestic cold and rainwater water service
Rainwater harvesting tanks, pipes, pumps and accessories as indicated on the drawings.
Modification/additions to storm water system to suit water harvesting storage tanks
Painting and labelling of hydraulic services equipment in accordance with Code requirements.
Three (3) copies of maintenance manuals and shop drawings detailing all “as-installed” hydraulic
services and associated controls.
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
Defects warranty period as specified herein.
Provision of all cranage and hoisting for the work of this Contract.
Co-ordination of all building/roof/wall/floor penetrations and plant, pipe and duct routes with all other
trades.
Demolition, cut and seal as per AS 3500 and removal of redundant piping and hydraulic services.
1.3
Inclusions
Conduct a site survey of the hydraulic layout to confirm the extent of plumbing work. Supply and install
hydraulic systems to AS 3500 and the requirements of the relevant authorities. Materials, products and
systems used shall be selected from the owners register, where provided, or accredited materials.
Pay all applicable fees and charges in accordance with the controlling authority's current fee scales,
including all headworks, contribution and developer levies and charges. Pay all charges for insurance,
sales tax and storage.
The contractor shall carry out all incidental works for the hydraulic services, including but not limited to
the following:
All cutting, patching and framing up and making good associated with the hydraulic services.
Form all penetrations where required.
Power supply and connection for pumps and hot water units,
Make good as required where pipework has been removed.
All works shall be carried out in manner that does not disrupt the operation of the adjoining areas of the
building. Where access is required to adjoining areas for installation or alteration of service pipes, the
contractor shall carry out the works at a time that is agreeable to the occupants.
The Contractor is required during the tendering procedure to note any discrepancy between these
documents and the regulations and/or authority requirements and is required to note the matters in his
tender submission and provide additional separate pricing accordingly.
These documents reflect the minimum quality acceptable in this contract. Any omissions of detail
applicable to the regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over the works shall be
adjusted, amended and incorporated by the contractor without cost variation.
1.4
Cross references
Refer to drawings.
The drawings are diagrammatic only and do not purport to show all structural and architectural details.
Final locations of all equipment and pipe works shall be determined in co-ordination with other services,
structural and architectural drawings. All locations are to be confirmed prior to installation. Do not scale
drawings.
1.5
Standards
All work shall comply with the following Australian Standards.
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
AS 3500
National Plumbing and Drainage Code
AS 1074
Steel tubes and tubulars for ordinary service.
AS 1345
Identification of the contents of piping, conduits and ducts.
AS 1477
Unplasticised PVC pipes and fittings for pressure applications.
AS 1530
Methods of fire tests on building materials, components and structures.
AS 1572
Copper and copper alloys - seamless tube for engineering purposes.
AS 1628
Water supply - copper alloy gate, globe and non-return valves.
AS 1836
Tubed for pressure purposes - welded steel.
AS1841.1
Portable Fire Extinguishers - General Requirements
AS1841.2
Portable Fire Extinguishers - Water Type
AS1841.3
Portable Fire Extinguishers - Wet Chemical Type
AS1841.4
Portable Fire Extinguishers - Foam Type
AS1841.5
Portable Fire Extinguishers - Powder Type
AS1841.6
Portable Fire Extinguishers - Carbon Dioxide Type
AS1841.7
Portable Fire Extinguishers - Vaporising Liquid Type
AS1850
Portable Fire Extinguishers Classification Rating & Fire Testing
AS 1851.2
Maintenance of fire protection equipment - Hose Reels
AS 1851.4
Maintenance of fire protection equipment - Fire Hydrant Installations
AS 1851.6
Maintenance of fire protection equipment - Management Procedures for
Maintaining Features of Air Handling System
AS 2032
Installation of PVC pipe systems.
AS 2129
Flanges for pipes, valves and fittings.
AS 2419
Fire hydrant installations.
AS 2441
Installation of fire hose reels.
AS 2444
Portable fire extinguishers - Selection and location.
AS 2700
Colour Standards for General Purposes
AS 3688
Water supply - copper and copper alloy body compression and capillary fittings
and threaded-end connectors.
AS 3795
Copper Alloy Tubes for Plumbing and Drainage Applications
AS 4130
Polyethylene (PE) Pipes for Pressure Applications
Plumbing Regulations 2008
Building Code of Australia
1.6
Authorities
The Hydraulic services installation shall comply with the requirements of the following authorities.
Relevant Building Surveyor
MFB
South East Water
City of Port Phillip
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
Any other authority having jurisdiction over all or part of the installation.
1.7
Authority applications, permits and fees
The Hydraulics Contractor is responsible for:
applying for and obtaining all authority required permits and applications,
applying for and lodging all authority applications for plumbing works,
paying all fees and charges in connection with the works including fees applicable to applications
and connections to existing authority assets.
1.8
Notice of Inspection
Give sufficient notice so that the Superintendent may attend tests and so that inspection may be made of
concealed services prior to covering.
1.9
Demolition
Allow to remove redundant pipework to allow for new installation works. All redundant pipework shall be
capped off at the source of supply of termination point of drainage in a secure and tradesman like
manner. Demolished material shall be removed from site.
1.10
Site Visit
Visit the site before submitting final tender to assess "on site" conditions. Include for all on site conditions
in tender.
1.11
Contractor's Submissions
1.11.1
Samples and product data
Submit samples when requested and manufacturer's product data as follows:
Certified drawings;
Performance and rating tables; and
Recommendations for installation.
1.11.2
Work-as-executed drawings
Submit drawings showing the "as installed" location of hydraulic services and equipment. All "Work as
Constructed" drawings shall be carried out on AutoCAD Version 2000 or later in DWG drawing format Prior
to Practical Completion submit to the Superintendent for review, three sets of prints of all "As Built"
drawings. Upon review provide one CD copy and one set of "As Built" prints within each copy of the
Operation & Maintenance Manuals.
. All drawings shall be produced on full sized sheets and to the Contract drawing format.
stamped “AS CONSTRUCTED”
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
fully dimensioned locations of all drain and water services installations in the ground relative to the
building grid system and AHD levels
hydraulic services contractors contact details
1.11.3
Tests records
For each required test and system balance, submit a report or certificate in a form suitable for inclusion in
the maintenance manual.
1.11.4
Maintenance manual
Prior to practical completion, submit three copies of operating and maintenance instructions for the
equipment installed.
Contents
No.
Section
Sub-section
Requirement
1
Directory
Builder
Provide Contact information.
Sub-contractors
Designers
Manufacturers
2
3
4
5
Warrantees
Certificates
Descriptions
Equipment,
Fixtures and
Fittings
31/26867/197586
Schedule
Provide a brief schedule of warrantees identifying
warrantor, duration, etc.
Warrantee
Documents
Actual warrantee documents.
Schedule
Provide a schedule of certificates identifying item and
issuing authority.
Certificate
Documents
Actual certificates.
Systems
Provide a description of the various systems in the
installation
Installation
Technical description of the systems installed, written to
ensure that the principal's staff fully understand the
scope and facilities provided. Identify function, normal
operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
Schedule
Provide a schedule of the various components in the
installation.
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
No.
Section
Sub-section
Requirement
Technical
Information
Manufacturers' technical literature for equipment
installed, assembled specifically for the project,
excluding irrelevant matter. Mark each product data
sheet to clearly identify specific products and
component parts used in the installation, and data
applicable to the installation.
6
Valve
Schedule
Refer to Valve Tag clause in this specification.
7
Operation
Procedures
Safe starting up, running-in, operating and shutting
down procedures for systems installed. Include logical
step-by-step sequence of instructions for each
procedure.
Control sequences and flow diagrams for systems
installed.
Legend for colour-coded services.
Schedules of fixed and variable equipment settings
established during commissioning and maintenance.
8
Maintenance
Procedures
Schedule of normal consumable items, local sources of
supply, and expected replacement intervals up to a
running time of 40,000 hours. Include lubricant and
lubrication schedules for equipment.
Instructions for use of tools and testing equipment.
Emergency procedures, including telephone numbers
for emergency services, and procedures for fault finding.
9
Reports
10
Drawings
Schedule
Provide a schedule of maintenance items including
frequency.
Meetings with
Local Authorities.
Provide copies of all meeting records with local
authorities.
Test Reports
Provide copies of all test report.
Commissioning
Reports
Provide copies of all commissioning reports.
Shop Drawings
As-constructed
Drawings
1.12
Building penetrations
Obtain approval for provision of penetrations including locations of sleeves or core holes in the following
building elements:
Existing structural members including external walls, fire walls, floor slabs and beams; or
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
Membrane elements including damp-proof courses, or waterproofing membranes.
Sleeves: Where pipes pass through building elements provide purpose-made metal or plastic
sleeves formed from pipe sections. Prime paint ferrous surfaces. If the building element is acoustic
rated, maintain the rating by packing the annular space with suitable insulation.
Fire-rated elements
Concrete building elements: Obtain approval for the location of sleeves or core holes.
Where approval is given to penetrate membranes, provide a waterproof seal between the membrane and
the pipe.
Where pipes pass through building elements provide purpose-made metal or plastic sleeves formed from
pipe sections. Prime paint ferrous surfaces. If the building element is acoustic rated, maintain the rating
by packing the annular space with suitable insulation.
Seal penetrations in fire-rated elements using a system conforming to AS 4072.1.
1.13
Painting
Paint new services and equipment where exposed to view, including in plant rooms. Colours to be in
accordance with AS 1345.
Proprietary equipment: Provide the manufacturer's standard finish.
Minimum coverage: One priming coat, one intermediate coat and two finishing coats of gloss enamel. Do
not spray paint.
1.14
Identification
1.14.1
General
Identify all items of equipment and piping using permanent labelling.
1.14.2
Pipework
Identify throughout its length (including in concealed spaces) to AS 1345.
1.14.3
Equipment labels
Use engraved laminated plastic type, mechanically fixed to the equipment.
1.14.4
Valves
Provide stamped brass or engraved laminated melamine plastic labels identifying the service, fixed to the
valve handles.
1.15
Commissioning Tests
Carry out operational tests on all plant and equipment in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
On completion of the installation, commission the plant and carry out tests to demonstrate that the
systems and components meet the performance requirements. Leave the plant ready for operation.
Provide test reports and include a copy in maintenance manuals.
Provide for an inspection service to carry out inspections for all underground drains in accordance with
the requirements of the Plumbing Industry Commission requirements.
1.16
Operational Maintenance Period
The maintenance period shall continue for the period of 12 months after the date of Practical Completion.
During liability period attend to emergency calls and rectify all defects.
During the maintenance period maintain a repair log showing details of all breakdown/defects calls.
At the end of the defect liability period, carry out a final check of the installation before handing over the
installation and submitting the repair/replacement log.
The cost of maintenance during the Maintenance Period shall be included in the contract amount.
1.17
OH&S Requirements
The contractor shall become familiar with current OH&S requirements with respect to installation of all
pipe work, equipment etc
The contractor shall allow to undertake risk and safety assessments during these construction works.
Failure to comply with these requirements shall not constitute a cost variation to the project.
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
2.
Cold Water System
2.1
Scope
Provide a new cold and rain water supply and reticulate to all fixtures and items of equipment noted on
the drawings.
2.2
Pipework Materials
2.2.1
Copper pipe
To AS 1432, Type B.
Jointing methods: Use capillary fittings, compression fittings, silver brazed slip joints or screwed joints.
2.2.2
Cross linked Polyethylene (PE-X) pipe
Cross linked Polyethylene pipes with Brass compression fittings (PE-X) shall be manufactured by
“Rehau”.
Cross linked Polyethylene pipes with Brass compression fittings (PE-X) shall be manufactured in
accordance with AS2492 – 1981 and AS2537 - 1982 with pressure ratings of not less than PN20 capable
of 60 C at 1.62Mpa and 80 C at 1.33Mpa
All pipes and jointing systems used shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be jointed with brass
compression joints system and equipment designed specifically for the purpose supplied by the pipe
manufacturer.
2.2.3
Medium Density Polyethylene (pressure) MDPE pipe
Medium density polyethylene shall be manufactured to AS 4131 1993, PE compounds and AS 4130 PE
pressure pipe applications.
Minimum class pressure to be used shall be Class 12 however where Class 12 pipes are unavailable
then Class 16 pipes and fittings can be used.
2.2.4
Polypropylene Type III (PP-R) pipe
Polypropylene pipes and fittings (PP-R Type III) shall be manufactured in accordance with DIN 8077, DN
8078 and BS 4991 with pressure ratings of not less than PN20 capable of 60 C at 10 Bar and 80 C at 6
Bar
All pipes and jointing systems used shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be jointed with electro
fusion system with equipment designed specifically for the purpose supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
2.2.5
Finishes
Finish exposed pipework, including fittings and supports as follows:
Copper and copper alloy pipework in internal locations such as ablution, toilet and kitchen areas:
Chrome plate to AS 1192 service condition 2, bright.
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
Metal pipework including protective coatings, except chrome plating: A full gloss solvent borne paint
system or equivalent (interior or exterior as appropriate), colour to match adjacent surfaces.
Pipework in concealed but accessible spaces (including ducts and non-habitable enclosed spaces):
Leave unpainted except for required identification marking.
Exposed fire service pipework painted red.
2.2.6
Valves
Finish valves to match connected pipework.
2.3
Pipework Installation
2.3.1
General
Install pipework in straight lines and uniform grades. Arrange and support the pipework so that it remains
free from vibration, whilst permitting thermal movement. Keep the number of joints to a minimum.
Prevent direct contact between incompatible metals.
2.3.2
Concealment
Where practicable conceal pipework and fittings requiring maintenance or servicing so that they are
accessible within non-habitable enclosed spaces such as roof spaces, subfloor spaces and ducts. Do not
run pipelines in masonry cavities. Keep pipelines in subfloor spaces at least 150 mm above ground.
Provide not less than 25 mm clearance between adjacent pipelines (measured from the pipe insulation
where applicable).
2.3.3
Pipe supports
Materials: The same as the pipe, or galvanized or non-ferrous metals, with bonded PVC or glass fibre
woven tape sleeves where needed to separate dissimilar metals.
Steel fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized to AS 1214.
Fixing to masonry: Fix supports to masonry and concrete with galvanized steel or non-ferrous metal bolts
or screws with expanding metal masonry or chemical anchors. Do not use explosive powered fixings.
2.3.4
Cleaning
On completion flush the pipeline with water and leave it clean.
2.4
Accessories
2.4.1
General
Provide the accessories and fittings necessary for the proper functioning of the cold water system,
including taps, valves, outlets, pressure and temperature control devices, strainers, gauges and pumps.
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
2.4.2
Cover plates
Where exposed water lines emerge from wall, floor or ceiling finishes, provide cover plates of non-ferrous
metal, finished to match the pipe, or of stainless steel.
2.4.3
In ground valves
Valves installed in ground to be provided with a standard cast iron stop tap box, set flush with ground
level and a length of suitable pipe extending from the valve cover to the valve. Plastic valve boxes will
not be accepted.
Isolating valves and temperature mixing valves inside the building are to be located in walls in accessible
locations with suitable sized stainless steel box with hinged access panel. Valves in ceilings will not be
accepted.
2.5
Backflow prevention
Provide and install backflow prevention devices in accordance with AS 3500.1 :2003 and as shown on
working drawings.
Hose taps located in all areas to be fitted with appropriate backflow prevention device as required by AS
3500.1: 2003.
Hose taps located in areas accessible to the general public are to be provided with approved antivandal/tamper proof handles.
2.6
Rainwater Pump Systems
Supply, installation and commission of “All Purpose pumps” or equal approved by Superintendent,
pressure boosting and filtration treatment plant for harvested rainwater as shown on the project
drawings. This plant designed and manufactured to meet a constant pressure peak duty of 2.0 litres per
second at 500kPa.
System to be complete with all components mounted, wired, plumbed utilising ABS pipe-work and
housed within a weather proof metal cabinet upon a concrete base.
2.7
Rainwater Reticulation
Extend Rainwater Reticulation from the Filtration Plants and reticulate to fixtures and items of equipment
within the building as shown on the project drawings.
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
3.
Stormwater
3.1
General
3.1.1
Scope
Provide alterations and additions to existing or new stormwater system as required to suit the new
rainwater harvesting/storage tank.
The general layout of drainage indicated on the drawings is a diagrammatic representation only.
The rainwater tanks shall be provided with overflow devices, pumps, filters, pipes and all accessories as
indicated on the hydraulic drawings and required by AS/NZS 3500.
3.1.2
Standard
To AS 3500.3.
3.2
Rainwater Harvesting Tanks
Provide and install a complete rainwater harvesting system including a rainwater harvesting tank, valves,
outlets and overflows as detailed in the cold water section of the specification.
The rainwater harvesting tank shall be 1,000,000L steel bolted Tyco Flow Control, or the Tasman Tanks
Co or equal approved by Superintendent above ground storage tank, fabricated to Australian Standards
and is to incorporate the following:
inlets into tank,
tank overflows from tank to drainage system,
inlet filter and leaf filter basket;
access pit and level indicator,
50mm outlet and isolation valves,
interconnecting MDPE pipework from tank to the pump,
pipe support brackets from concrete pad,
electrical works within the confines of the rainwater treatment plant including an electrical schematic
wiring diagram.
3.3
Connection
If connection into an existing drain is required, carry out the excavation necessary to locate and expose
the connection point. On completion reinstate the surfaces and elements that have been disturbed such
as roads, pavements, kerbs, footpaths and nature strips to the requirements of the Superintendent and
the regulatory authority.
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
4.
Fire Service
4.1
General
4.1.1
Scope
Provide a fire hydrant/hose reel service with all necessary piping, branches, fittings, valves, hydrants,
hose reels and connections as indicated completely in accordance with the requirements of the relevant
authority.
Provide the following fire protection systems.
New hose reels (including cabinets) refer to drawings for number and locations.
Fire Hydrants (including cabinets) and accessories,
Fire Services Pipe works,
Valves and accessories
Updated block plan.
4.2
Standard
AS 1221
Fire hose reels
AS 1530
Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures
Part 4 – Fire-resistance tests of elements of construction
AS 1851
Maintenance of fire protection equipment
Part 1 – Portable fire extinguishers
Part 2 – Fire hose reels
Part 4 – Fire hydrant installations
AS 2419
Installation of fire hydrants
AS 2441
Installation of fire hose reels
AS 2792
Fire hose – Delivery lay flat
4.3
Materials And Workmanship
4.3.1
General
Fire hydrants: To AS 2419.
Layflat delivery hose for connection to fire hydrants: To AS 2792.
MARKING: Fire layflat delivery hose, shall bear the Australian Standards Association ‘Standards Mark’
symbol under the Australian Standards Certification Trade Mark Scheme.
4.3.2
Fire Hydrant – Fire Protection
INSTALLATION: to AS 2419
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
FIRE HOSE: to AS 2792
HYDRANT TYPE: Dual 63 mm millcocks with fittings suitable for the fire brigade.
4.3.3
Fire Hose Reel – Fire Protection
STANDARD: to AS 1221
INSTALLATION: to AS 2441
REQUIREMENT: fitted with 36 m of 19 mm hose, with Orion spray nozzle
4.3.4
Inspections – Fire Hydrant
NOTICE: Arrange for the following inspections, tests, and the like as listed below and give sufficient
notice so that the Superintendent may witness them.
Authorities: Inspections and tests required by regulations and other nominated authorities prior to their
approval of the installation or its stages.
Work in Progress:
Installation and testing of buried pipework prior to enclosing
Pressure tests on all hidden piping systems.
All performance and compliance tests.
4.4
Testing
On completion of the fire services installation, engage an approved independent certified fire tester to
carry out test and compliance report in accordance with the requirements of AS 2419 and the local fire
authority.
Pay all fees associated with tests and compliance testing and report carried out by the independent fire
tester.
Any compliance report subject to conditions shall not be accepted and additional testing shall be carried
out until full compliance with AS 2419 is met.
4.4.1
Factory Tests – Fire Hydrant
REQUIREMENT: to AS 2419
4.4.2
Commissioning Tests – Fire Hydrant
SYSTEM PROVING TESTS: Perform the tests necessary to certify completion as specified in AS 1221
and AS 2441.
HYDROSTATIC TEST: Test pipework to AS 2419. Maintain the test pressure beyond the specified
period if necessary to complete the inspection of pipework under test.
WATER QUALITY TESTS: Demonstrate that the system water is clean and free from foreign matter,
including sand, sediments, and other impurities, by the following tests:
Discharge test: water discharged from all points
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
Test failure: A test has failed if foreign matter is observed in quantities considered by the Superintendent
to be likely to impair the functioning of the system.
Remedial action:
If either test fails, drain the system, open and clean the system, and recharge the system with water;
4.5
Finishes
4.5.1
Finishes – Fire Hydrant
CORROSION PROTECTION: Provide corrosion protection and finish paint all pipework to the Fire
Hydrant system by means suitable to the location and environment. Manufacturers’ standard finishes
shall be not inferior to those specified in FINISHES Section for pipework, as applicable.
PIPE IDENTIFICATION: To AS 1345, by means of the ‘basic identification colours’ applied as full length
painting.
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
5.
Extinguishers
5.1
General
This section describes the requirements for hand held fire extinguishers.
5.2
Components
5.2.1
Authorised products
General
Provide equipment listed in the SSL Register of Accredited Products - Fire Protection Equipment.
5.2.2
Extinguishers
Standards
General: Provide portable fire extinguishers and location signs as follows:
General requirements: To AS/NZS 1841.1.
Water: To AS/NZS 1841.2.
Wet chemical: To AS/NZS 1841.3.
Foam: To AS/NZS 1841.4.
Powder: To AS/NZS 1841.5.
Carbon dioxide: To AS/NZS 1841.6.
5.3
Completion
5.3.1
Maintenance
Fire extinguishers
Standard: To AS 1851.1.
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
GHD
180 Lonsdale Street
Melbourne, Victoria 3000
T: (03) 8687 8000 F: (03) 8687 8111 E: [email protected]
© GHD 2011
This document is and shall remain the property of GHD. The document may only be used for the
purposes for which it was commissioned and in accordance with the Consultancy Agreement for the
commission. Unauthorised use of this document in any form whatsoever is prohibited.
Document Status
Reviewer
Rev
No.
Author
A
I. Krakov
Name
31/26867/197586
South Melbourne Market
Hydraulic Specification
Approved for Issue
Signature
Name
Signature
Date
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement